Brother 3450CN - HL Color Laser Printer Service manual

Brother 3450CN - HL Color Laser Printer Service manual
Brother Color Laser Printer
SERVICE MANUAL
MODEL: HL-3450CN
Read this manual thoroughly before commencing any maintenance work.
Keep this manual in a convenient place for quick and easy reference at all times.
January, 2002
SM-PRN028
© Copyright Brother 2002
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or by any means without permission in
writing from the publisher.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Trademarks:
The brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Apple, the Apple Logo, and Macintosh are trademarks, registered in the United States and other
countries, and True Type is a trademark of Apple computer, Inc.
Epson is a registered trademark and FX-80 and FX-850 are trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Hewlett Packard is a registered trademark and HP Laser Jet is a trademark of Hewlett Packard
Company.
IBM, IBM PC and Proprinter are registered trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
PREFACE
This service manual contains basic information required for after-sales service of the color laser printer
(here-in-after referred to as "this machine" or "the printer"). This information is vital to the service
technician to maintain the high printing quality and performance of the printer.
This service manual covers the HL-3450CN color laser printer.
This manual consists of the following chapters:
CHAPTER 1:
OUTLINE OF PRODUCT
Features, parts names, internal structure, and description of the control panel.
CHAPTER 2:
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications, etc.
CHAPTER 3:
INSTALLATION
Installation conditions and installation procedures.
CHAPTER 4:
STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Basic operation of the mechanical system, the electrical system and the electrical
circuits and their timing information.
CHAPTER 5:
CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
Operation and setting procedures on the control panel.
CHAPTER 6:
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Description of periodic maintenance parts and procedures for periodic replacement
and cleaning.
CHAPTER 7:
DISASSEMBLY
Procedures for replacement of the mechanical system parts.
CHAPTER 8:
TROUBLESHOOTING
Description of error messages on the control panel, troubleshooting image failure,
etc.
APPENDICES : SERIAL NO. DESCRIPTIONS, ETC.
Information in this manual is subject to change due to improvement or re-design of the product. All
relevant information in such cases will be supplied in service information bulletins (Technical
Information).
A thorough understanding of this printer, based on information in this service manual and service
information bulletins, is required for maintaining its print quality performance and for improving the
practical ability to find the cause of problems.
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REGULATIONS..................................................................................vi
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................viii
SHIPMENT OF THE PRINTER.........................................................xiii
CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT OUTLINE ................................................. 1-3
1. FEATURES.....................................................................................................1-3
2. PARTS NAMES & FUNCTIONS .....................................................................1-6
3. INTERNAL STRUCTURE ...............................................................................1-8
4. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROL PANEL ..........................................................1-9
4.1 Video Controller Mode .........................................................................................................1-9
4.2 Engine Controller Mode .......................................................................................................1-9
CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS...................................................... 2-3
1. RATING ..........................................................................................................2-3
2. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................2-4
2.1 Printing .................................................................................................................................2-4
2.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................2-4
2.3 Electrical and Mechanical ....................................................................................................2-5
2.4 Paper....................................................................................................................................2-6
2.5 Printing Area ........................................................................................................................2-8
3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS.................................................................2-11
3.1 Ambient Temperature / Humidity / Altitude ........................................................................2-11
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION ......................................................... 3-3
1. CONDITIONS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION...........................................3-3
1.1 Environmental Conditions ....................................................................................................3-3
1.2 Basic Layout of Printer Set-up Location...............................................................................3-3
2. UNPACKING...................................................................................................3-5
2.1 Unpacking the Printer ..........................................................................................................3-5
2.2 Unpack the Starter Kit..........................................................................................................3-7
3. INSTALLATION WORK ..................................................................................3-8
3.1 Install the Oil Bottle and Fuser Cleaner ...............................................................................3-8
3.2 Install the OPC Belt Cartridge ..............................................................................................3-9
3.3 Install the Toner Cartridge into the Printer .........................................................................3-11
3.4 Install the Media Cassette and Adaptor .............................................................................3-12
3.5 Test Print............................................................................................................................3-14
ii
HL-34500CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS.............. 4-3
1. BASIC STRUCTURE ......................................................................................4-3
1.1 Mechanical Structure ...........................................................................................................4-3
1.2 Basic Mechanism of Color Printing ......................................................................................4-5
1.3 Structure of the OPC Belt ....................................................................................................4-7
1.4 Print System and Transfer System ......................................................................................4-8
1.5 Scanning System ...............................................................................................................4-23
1.6 Paper Transportation System ............................................................................................4-25
1.7 Fusing Unit .........................................................................................................................4-26
2. STRUCTURE OF THE CONTROL SYSTEM.................................................4-28
2.1 Basic Structure - Electrical System and Functions ............................................................4-28
2.2 Control System - Control of the Print Process ...................................................................4-37
2.3 Main PCB (Video Controller PCB) .....................................................................................4-46
2.4 Low-voltage Power Supply Unit .........................................................................................4-60
2.5 High-voltage Power Supply Unit ........................................................................................4-63
2.6 Connection Diagram ..........................................................................................................4-65
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION ............................... 5-3
1. PANEL LAYOUT.............................................................................................5-3
2. VIDEO CONTROLLER MODE........................................................................5-4
2.1 Configuration of Operational Mode ......................................................................................5-4
2.2 Line Test Mode ....................................................................................................................5-5
2.3 DRAM Test Mode ................................................................................................................5-9
2.4 Test Print Mode..................................................................................................................5-10
2.5 NVRAM Reset Mode..........................................................................................................5-10
3. ENGINE CONTROLLER MODE ...................................................................5-11
3.1 Configuration of Operational Mode ....................................................................................5-11
3.2 Operation of Normal Mode.................................................................................................5-13
3.3 Service Mode .....................................................................................................................5-20
3.4 Adjustment Work Procedures ............................................................................................5-44
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................... 6-3
1. GENERAL.......................................................................................................6-3
1.1 Handling Precautions ...........................................................................................................6-3
1.2 List of Maintenance Tools 6-4
1.3 List of Consumables for Maintenance..................................................................................6-5
2. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CLEANING .........................................................6-6
2.1 Cleaning the Register Roller ................................................................................................6-9
2.2 Cleaning the Paper Guide..................................................................................................6-10
2.3 Cleaning the Paper Exit Roller ...........................................................................................6-11
2.4 Cleaning the Transfer Roller ..............................................................................................6-12
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.5 Cleaning the Paper Discharger ..........................................................................................6-13
2.6 Cleaning the OPC Belt Cartridge .......................................................................................6-14
2.7 Cleaning the Transfer Drum...............................................................................................6-15
2.8 Cleaning the Dustproof Glass in the Laser Unit.................................................................6-16
2.9 Cleaning the Printer Interior ...............................................................................................6-17
2.10 Cleaning the Oil Pad ........................................................................................................6-18
3. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PARTS..............................................................6-19
4. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ................................................6-21
4.1 OPC Belt Cartridge Replacement ......................................................................................6-21
4.2 Fusing Unit Replacement...................................................................................................6-23
4.3 Transfer Roller Replacement .............................................................................................6-26
4.4 Paper Discharger Replacement.........................................................................................6-28
4.5 Drum Cleaner Replacement ..............................................................................................6-30
4.6 Ozone Filter Replacement .................................................................................................6-32
4.7 Paper Feeding Roller and Separator Pad Replacement....................................................6-33
4.8 Transfer Drum Replacement..............................................................................................6-34
4.9 Oil Pad Replacement .........................................................................................................6-35
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY............................ 7-4
1. BEFORE STARTING DISASSEMBLY............................................................7-4
1.1 Precautions ..........................................................................................................................7-4
1.2 Preparation of Disassembly .................................................................................................7-4
2. PARTS NAME.................................................................................................7-6
2.1 Cover ...................................................................................................................................7-6
2.2 Circuit Boards (PWBs) .........................................................................................................7-7
2.3 Motor Units...........................................................................................................................7-7
2.4 Clutches ...............................................................................................................................7-8
2.5 Sensors ................................................................................................................................7-8
3. DISASSEMBLY FLOW ...................................................................................7-9
4. DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE.....................................................................7-10
4.1 Right Side of the Printer .....................................................................................................7-10
4.2 Top of the Printer ...............................................................................................................7-23
4.3 Left Side of the Printer .......................................................................................................7-32
4.4 Paper Exit Unit ...................................................................................................................7-42
4.5 Front of the Printer .............................................................................................................7-47
4.6 Rear of the Printer..............................................................................................................7-50
4.7 Fusing Unit .........................................................................................................................7-54
iv
HL-34500CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................... 8-3
1. OUTLINE OF TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................8-4
2. OPERATOR CALL..........................................................................................8-5
2.1 Video Controller Mode .........................................................................................................8-5
2.2 Engine Controller Mode .......................................................................................................8-8
3. PAPER TRANSPORT ERROR.....................................................................8-10
3.1 Feed Jam ...........................................................................................................................8-10
3.2 Inner Jam ...........................................................................................................................8-11
3.3 Outer Jam ..........................................................................................................................8-13
3.4 Others ................................................................................................................................8-13
4. SERVICE CALL ............................................................................................8-14
4.1 Video Controller Mode .......................................................................................................8-15
4.2 Engine Controller Mode .....................................................................................................8-18
5. IMAGE FAILURE ..........................................................................................8-47
APPENDIX 1 ................................................................................... A-1
APPENDIX 2 ................................................................................... A-6
APPENDIX 3 ................................................................................... A-7
APPENDIX 4 ................................................................................... A-8
APPENDIX 5 ................................................................................. A-11
APPENDIX 6 ................................................................................. A-14
APPENDIX 7 ................................................................................. A-21
APPENDIX 8 ................................................................................. A-36
APPENDIX 9 ................................................................................. A-38
v
REGULATIONS
REGULATIONS
LASER SAFETY (FOR 110-120 V MODEL ONLY)
This printer is certified as a Class I laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human
Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and
Safety Act of 1968. This means that the printer does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external
covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
FDA REGULATIONS (FOR 110-120 V MODEL ONLY)
U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has implemented regulations for laser products
manufactured on and after August 2, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the
United States. One of the following labels on the back of the printer indicates compliance with the FDA
regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
Caution
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
vi
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
IEC 60825 SPECIFICATION (FOR 220-240 V MODEL ONLY)
This printer is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC 60825 specifications. The label shown below
is attached in countries where required.
This printer has a Class 3B Laser Diode which emits invisible laser radiation in the Scanner Unit. The
Scanner Unit should not be opened under any circumstances.
Caution
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
The following caution label is attached near the laser unit.
5mW
780nm-800nm
DANGER-
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
VORSICHT- UNSICHTBARE
LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG
GEÖFFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG
ÜBERBRÜCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
DANGER-
RAYON LASER INVISIBLE LORS DE L’OUVER TURE.
EVITER L’EXPOSITION DIRECTE.
PELIGRO-
RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE AL ABRIR. EVITAR
LA EXPOSICION DIRECTA AL HAZ.
MAS
For Finland and Sweden
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
Varoitus! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa
käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
Varning – Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna Bruksanvisning specificerats, kan
användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
vii
SHIPMENT OF THE PRINTER
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAFETY PRINCIPLE
1) Before starting any operations, read this manual thoroughly. Especially read the safety instructions
in this section carefully and ensure that you understand the contents.
2) Perform all the operations by following the procedures described in this manual. Follow all the
cautions and warnings set out in the procedures and on safety labels affixed to the machine.
Failure to do so may result in human injury or equipment damage.
3) Perform only the procedures explained in this manual. Refrain from opening or touching any
portions that are not related to your required operation(s).
4) Repair and replacement of parts should be performed by trained and qualified persons only.
Operators should not attempt to do such repair or replacement work.
5) It must be appreciated that the above-mentioned cautions and warnings do not cover every
circumstance because it is impossible to evaluate all the conditions of repair situations.
SPECIAL SAFETY INFORMATION
Introductory Information
Cautions and warnings are made clear by them following a ‘Safety Alert Symbol’ or ‘Signal Word’ such
as DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION.
<SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL>
This is the safety alert. When you find this symbol placed on the equipment or marked in this manual,
be aware of the potential of human injuries. Follow the recommended precautions and safety
operation practices.
<Understanding Signal Words>
DANGER is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which will cause severe human injuries or a fatal
accident if the warning is ignored.
WARNING is used to indicate the presence of a hazard or unsafe practices which may cause severe
human injuries or a fatal accident if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION is used to indicate the presence of a hazard or unsafe practices which may cause minor
human injuries if the warning is ignored. CAUTION also calls your attention to safety messages in this
manual.
<Follow Safely Instructions>
Carefully read all the safety messages set out in this manual and also in the safety warning signs
placed on the equipment. In this manual, the safety instructions (safety alert symbols and signal
words) are enclosed in a rectangular enclosure to bring them to your attention. Keep the safety signs
on the equipment in good condition and ensure none are missing or damaged. Replace the safety
signs if unreadable or damaged. Learn how to operate the equipment and how to use the controls
properly. Do not let anyone operate this equipment without following the instructions. Keep the
equipment in proper working condition. Unauthorized modification to the equipment may impair the
function & safety and affect the life of the equipment.
Listed below are the various kinds of “WARNING” messages contained in this manual.
<Caution for the batteries>
There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced.
Do not replace the battery.
Do not disassemble, recharge or dispose of in fire.
Used battery should be disposed of according to local regulations.
viii
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
WARNING
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
May cause serious injuries or fatal accidents. Voltage is now applied from the power
supply of printer. There is a danger of electrical shock if you touch the active area
inside the printer.
Be sure to turn the power supply switch OFF and pull the plug out from the power
outlet before starting maintenance work on the printer.
WARNING
HARMFUL OZONE GAS
Inhalation of an excessive amount of ozone gas may adversely affect the respiratory
organs.
An Ozone Filter is fitted to this printer to reduce the exhausted ozone. This filter
must be replaced with a new filter periodically in accordance with the manual
supplied with the printer.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The Fusing Unit reaches a temperature of approx.160°C and adjacent parts are also
very hot.
When you need to change the cleaning pad or remove jammed paper, wait about 20
minutes after opening the paper exit unit to allow the unit to cool down.
CAUTION
ROTATING PARTS
Be aware of the potential danger of various rollers and take care not to get your
fingers or hand caught in the machine, this can cause serious injuries. Note that the
exit roller that ejects the printed paper rotates during printing.
Be careful not to get your hair, fingers, hands, sleeve or necktie caught in the
machine while operating the machine.
ix
SHIPMENT OF THE PRINTER
CAUTION
HAZARDOUS POWDER
Toner is a fine powder which can cause a powder explosion if disposed of into a fire.
Under no circumstances dispose of toner into a fire.
CAUTION
HAZARDOUS POWDER
Toner is a fine powder which may cause irritation to the eyes and respiratory organs
if inhaled.
Handle the toner cartridge, waste toner pack and developing unit carefully so as not
to spill the toner.
CAUTION
POWER CORDS & PLUGS
This printer is equipped with a 3-wire power cord fitted with a 3-pronged plug (bipolar plug with grounding) for the user’s safety.
Use these power cords in conjunction with a properly grounded electrical outlet to
avoid an electrical shock.
CAUTION
SAFETY INTERLOCK
The front cover, paper exit unit and transfer unit of this printer have electrical safety
interlocks to turn the power off whenever they are opened. Do not attempt to
circumvent these safety interlocks.
CAUTION
N Do not step on or lean against the media cassette. It may cause the product to tilt
or fall over and result in injuries.
N Do not lean against or apply any excessive force to the media cassette or open
covers, otherwise it may cause the product to tilt or fall over and result in injuries.
x
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
CAUTION
Do not lean against or apply any excessive force to the paper cassette, open cover
of Duplex unit. Otherwise it may cause the product to decline or fall down and result
in the injuries.
xi
SHIPMENT OF THE PRINTER
<Label Location>
5
1
4
3
2
1. Hot Caution Label
WARNING
Hot surface.
Avoid contact.
WARNUNG
Heiße oberfiäche.
Bei beseitigung.
AVERTISSEMENT
Surface chaude.
Eviter tout contact.
2. Laser Caution Label
5mW
780nm-800nm
DANGER-
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
VORSICHT- UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG
GEÖFFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG
ÜBERBRÜCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
DANGER-
RAYON LASER INVISIBLE LORS DE L’OUVER TURE.
EVITER L’EXPOSITION DIRECTE.
PELIGRO-
RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE AL ABRIR. EVITAR
LA EXPOSICION DIRECTA AL HAZ.
MAS
xii
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
3. Rating Label
(For US)
(For Europe)
4. Operation Label
5. Jam Label
xiii
SHIPMENT OF THE PRINTER
SHIPMENT OF THE PRINTER
If for any reason you must ship the printer, carefully package the printer to avoid any damage during
transit. It is recommended that you save and use the original packaging. The printer should also be
adequately insured with the carrier.
CAUTION
N When shipping the printer, remove the toner cartridges, the OPC belt cartridge
and the waste toner pack from the printer to prevent toner spill in the printer or
damage of the toner cartridge and the OPC belt cartridge.
N When shipping the printer, remove the oil bottle and the fuser cleaner from the
fusing unit. After removing the oil bottle, be sure to remove the oil remaining in the
fusing unit with the supplied syringe. Failure to do so will cause severe damage to
the printer.
xiv
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 1
PRODUCT OUTLINE
CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT OUTLINE ..................................................... 1-3
1. FEATURES.......................................................................................................... 1-3
2. PARTS NAMES & FUNCTIONS .......................................................................... 1-6
3. INTERNAL STRUCTURE .................................................................................... 1-8
4. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROL PANEL ............................................................... 1-9
4.1 Video Controller Mode................................................................................................................. 1-9
4.2 Engine Controller Mode............................................................................................................... 1-9
1-2
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 1
1.
PRODUCT OUTLINE
FEATURES
This printer has the following features:
2400 x 600 dpi Class Resolution
The printer prints pages with a resolution of 600 dots per inch (dpi) as default. It also
provides higher quality printout which is the equivalent of 2400 x 600 dpi resolution when
using High Resolution Control (HRC) or Color Advanced Photoscale Technology (CAPT).
High Speed Color Laser Printing
The printer allows crisp printing in 24 bit brilliant color. The printer prints at a speed of 24
pages per minute in monochrome mode and 6 pages per minute in full color mode when
printing A4 or Letter size paper in Landscape orientation. The controller utilizes a high speed
32-bit RISC microprocessor and special hardware chips, which provides a very fast
processing speed.
High Resolution Control (HRC)
The high resolution control (HRC) technology provides clear and crisp printouts and improves
even the 600 dpi resolution. This mode is effective when printing text data.
Color Advanced Photoscale Technology (CAPT)
®
The printer can print graphics in 256 shades for each color in HP color printer PCL5C™ and
BR-Script 3 emulations, producing nearly photographic quality. This mode is effective when
printing photographic images.
Maintenance-Free & Economical Toner Cartridge
A toner cartridge can print up to 14,000 (Black) and 8,500 (Cyan, Magenta and Yellow)
single-sided pages at 5% coverage. The one piece, easy-to-replace toner cartridges do not
require difficult maintenance.
Universal Media Cassette
This printer loads paper automatically from the media cassette. Since the media cassette is
a universal type, a number of different sizes of paper can be used. Even envelopes can be
loaded from the media cassette.
Three Interfaces
This printer has a high speed, bi-directional parallel interface, USB and Ethernet
10/100BaseTX.
If your application software supports the bi-directional parallel interface, you can monitor the
printer status. It is fully compatible with the industry-standard bi-directional parallel interface.
The Brother network board (NC-4100h) is factory installed in the HL-3450CN, which enables
you to use this printer in the TCP/IP, IPS/SPX, Apple Talk, DLC/LLC, Banyan VINES, DEC
LAT and NetBEUI environments. Also, many useful utilities, such as BRAdmin Professional
for the administrator and Brother network printing software, are included in the CD-ROM
supplied with the HL-3450CN printer. For setup, see the Network User’s Guide.
1-3
CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
Automatic Interface Selection
The printer can automatically select the bi-directional parallel, USB, or Ethernet 10/100 Base
TX depending on the interface port through which it receives data. With this feature, the
printer can be connected to more than one computer.
Five Emulation Modes
®
®
®
The printer can emulate Hewlett-Packard Color PCL 5C language (PCL6 in monochrome
®
mode), PostScript 3 language emulation (Brother BR-Script 3) printers, the industry®
®
®
standard HP-GL™ plotter as well as EPSON FX-850™, and IBM Proprinter XL printers (in
monochrome mode). It is possible to print with all application programs that support one of
these printers.
Automatic Emulation Selection
The printer can automatically select the printer emulation mode depending on the print
commands it receives from the computer software. With this feature, many users can share
the printer on a network.
Data Compression Technology
The printer can internally compress the received graphics and font data in its memory so that
it can print larger graphics and more fonts without additional memory.
Various Fonts
The printer has 66 scalable and 12 bitmapped fonts. The fonts that can be used will vary
according to the selected emulation mode.
In PCL mode, you can also print the 13 kinds of bar codes listed below. In BR-Script mode,
the printer has 165 scalable fonts.
< Bar Code Printing >
This printer can print the following 13 types of bar codes:
x
x
x
x
Code 39
Code 128
Interleaved 2 of 5
Codabar
x
x
x
x
ISBN (EAN)
ISBN (UPC-E)
UPC-A
UPC-E
x
x
x
x
EAN-8
EAN-13
EAN-128
FIM (US-PostNet)
x
Post Net
(US-PostNet)
CCITT G3/G4
Since the printer supports the CCITT G3/G4 format in addition to HP-compatible formats, it
can quickly receive and print data compressed in this format.
Lock Panel
If the panel button settings have been changed, the printer may not work as expected. It is
possible for the administrator of the printer to lock the settings to prevent changes from being
made.
Power Save Mode
The printer has a power save mode. As laser printers consume power to keep the fixing
assembly at a high temperature, this feature can save electricity when the printer is on but
not being used. The factory setting of the Power Save mode is ON so that it complies with
the new EPA Energy Star new specification.
1-4
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Toner Save Mode
The printer has an economical toner save mode. This mode allows you to reduce the printer
running cost substantially in addition to the improved life expectancy of the toner cartridge.
Reprint Function
A touch of a panel button allows reprinting of the last print job without sending the data again
from the computer. When there is not enough memory to print the last complete job out, the
last print page can be reprinted. Data can be stored in an IDE HDD that can be optionally
installed. It can be reprinted by selecting a document from the control panel or the browser.
When the private print driver is selected, Secure Printing can be executed which allows you
to print only when a password is entered.
Saving User Settings
It is possible to operate the printer differently from other users with the panel button settings.
One set of user settings can be stored.
®
*PANTONE Calibrated
There are many variables in process reproduction of colors generated by the HL-3450CN,
any one of which may affect the quality of the PANTONE Color simulation, including;
x
x
x
x
Type of paper used
Type of toner used
Effective final resolution
Dot structure/halftones
For optimal results, it is recommended that the following materials and settings are used.
1) NEUSIEDLER color copy paper
2) Brother Toner Cartridges TN-02 BK/C/M/Y
3) 600 x 600 dpi resolution
1-5
CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
2.
PARTS NAMES & FUNCTIONS
<Front View>
1. Upper cover
2. Control panel
4. Top cover
(Paper Exit Unit)
5. Power button
3. Front cover
Media cassette
Fig. 1-1
<Rear View>
Paper exit unit
8. Controller box
6. Power inlet
7. Rear access cover
Fig. 1-2
1-6
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
No.
Part Name
Outline of Functions
1
Upper cover
To act as an upper enclosure and also as a
paper tray for printed paper.
2
Control panel
To display the status of printer operations and
control the printer directly.
3
Front cover
To act as a front enclosure, opened when
replacing a toner cartridge or waste toner pack.
4
Top cover (Paper exit
unit)
To exit the printed paper onto the upper cover,
acting also as part of the paper tray for printed
paper. To be opened when replacing an OPC
belt cartridge or Drum cleaner.
5
Power button
6
Power inlet
To connect a power supply cable.
7
Rear access cover
To act as a rear enclosure, opened when
clearing an internal jam or doing maintenance
work.
8
Controller box
Space where the main (video controller) PCB is
installed.
To operate power-on and off to the printer.
(Push for On/Off operation)
1-7
CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
3.
INTERNAL STRUCTURE
<Cross Sectional View >
2. OPC Belt Cartridge
3. Drum Cleaner
1. Toner Cartridge
(K, Y, M, C)
4. Fusing Unit
K
Y
M
11. Laser Unit
C
9. Media Cassette
7. Paper Discharger
8. Transfer Roller
5. Transfer Unit
6. Transfer Drum
10. Paper Pick-up
Roller
Fig. 1-3
No.
Components Name
Outline of Functions
Contain the toner (K, Y, M, C) for developing.
1
Toner Cartridge
2
OPC Belt Cartridge
Forms images and includes the OPC belt.
3
Drum Cleaner
Cleans and collects waste toner adhering to the transfer
drum.
4
Fusing Unit
Fixes by heat and pressure the toner image onto the paper.
5
Transfer unit
Transfers toner images from the transfer drum to the paper.
6
Transfer Drum
Forms color images, combining the toner images from the
OPC belt on the drum.
7
Paper Discharger
Emits a corona charge for separating the paper from the
transfer drum.
8
Transfer Roller
Transfers the toner image on the transfer drum to the paper.
9
Media Cassette
Feeds paper automatically.
10
Paper Pick-up Roller
Feeds paper automatically from the media cassette.
11
Laser Unit
Generates a modulated laser beam and scans the OPC belt
to produce the image.
Each toner cartridge (K, Y, M, C) is independent.
1-8
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROL PANEL
The printer control panel provides control of the printer including test printing, maintenance
operations performed by the video controller and also the ones which are performed by the
engine controller.
The Video Controller Mode and the Engine Controller Mode have some common functions.
Under normal circumstances the functions in the Video controller mode will be used. Refer to
CHAPTER 5 for further information.
4.1
Video Controller Mode
The printer goes into the Video Controller Mode when the power is turned on by pressing the
power button.
The Video Controller Mode supplies the general test printing and setting functions and some
of the maintenance operations. If further engine settings are required, use the Engine
Controller Mode.
4.2
Engine Controller Mode
The printer goes into the Engine Controller Mode when power is turned on by pressing the
power button at the same time as holding down the Secure print, Back and Set buttons.
(Refer to Fig.1-4.)
NOTE:
This mode provides unique control panel display and operation functions which are
completely different from the ones described on the actual control panel labels or in the
user’s guide. Refer to CHAPTER 5 for detailed information.
1-9
CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
1
K
C
M
Y
3
2
Power
Ready
Data
5
4
6
7
Alarm
Job
Cancel
Go
8
9
10
Secure
Print
12
Menu
13
11
Reprint
Back
Set
Fig. 1-4
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
LED / Button Name
LCD: 16 character by 2 lines
Power LED
Ready LED
Data LED
Go button
Job Cancel button
Alarm LED
Secure Print button
- button
+ button
Reprint button
Back button
Set button
1-10
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 2
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................... 2-3
1. RATING .............................................................................................................. 2-3
2. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................ 2-4
2.1 Printing ....................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2 Functions .................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3 Electrical and Mechanical........................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4 Paper .......................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.4.1 Printable media .................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.4.2 Media cassette capacity ...................................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.3 Printed output....................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.5 Printing Area............................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.5.1 Effective printable area ........................................................................................................ 2-8
2.5.2 Print guarantee area .......................................................................................................... 2-10
3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS..................................................................... 2-11
3.1 Ambient Temperature / Humidity / Altitude............................................................................... 2-11
2-2
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 2
1.
SPECIFICATIONS
RATING
WARNING
Use the power supply cable supplied with the printer, or a similar cable complying
with the following specification (3-wire power cable with ground).
Use of an “out of specification” cable may result in an electric shock.
Destination
Voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Input Current (A)
Power Cord (Piece)
US / Canada
120
50/60
11
1
Europe
220 - 240
50/60
6
1*
* For European models, the power supply cable depends on the country as follows;
Figure
A
Rating
250VAC, 6A
Approval Agency
Applicable Area
VDE, DEMKO, SEV
Europe (Continent)
BS
UK
B
Figure A: For Europe (Sample)
2.5m
Figure B: For UK
2.5m
NOTE:
For details of other power supply cables, refer to the parts reference list.
** For rating labels, refer to ‘Safety Instruction’ on Page viii.
2-3
CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.
2.1.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Printing
Print method
Electro photography by semiconductor laser beam scanning
Laser
Wavelength:
Output:
Resolution
600 x 600 dots per inch (Fine)
2400 x 600 dots per inch (using HRC and CAPT)
(The resolution can be enhanced to 2400dpi class by using Brother
exclusive HRC (High Resolution Control) and CAPT (Color Advanced
Photoscale Technology).)
Print speed
Monochrome mode: 24 page/minute
Full color mode:
6 page/minute
(when printing A4/Letter-size paper in Landscape orientation)
780nm
5mW max.
Monochrome mode: 12 page/minute
Full color mode:
3 page/minute
(when printing A3/Ledger-size paper in Portrait orientation)
2.2.
Warm-up
Max. 210 seconds at 20°C (68°F)
First print
Monochrome mode: 19 seconds or less
Full color mode:
34 seconds or less
(when loading A4/Letter-size plain paper in Landscape orientation by
face down print delivery from standard upper cassette feed)
Print media
Toner in a single-color single-component cartridge.
Life Expectancy:
14,000 single-sided pages/cartridge (Black)
8,500 single-sided pages/cartridge (C/M/Y)
(when printing on A4/Letter-size paper with 5% coverage)
Resident printer fonts
<HP PCL, EPSON FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL modes>
66 scalable fonts and 12 bitmapped fonts,11 bar codes
<BR-Script 3 mode>
165 scalable fonts
Functions
CPU
Toshiba TMPR4955-266 (TX4955-266MHz)
Emulation
x
Interface
Automatic interface selection among the bi-directional parallel,
Universal Serial Bus (USB) and Ethernet 10/100 Base TX.
RAM
64 Mbytes
(Expandable up to 384Mbytes with DIMMs)
The standard memory fitted can vary depending on the printer model
and country.
HDD option
2.5 inch IDE HDD
Compact Flash
1 card slot: Compact Flash Type II
Control panel
8 buttons, 4 LEDs and a 16-column x 2 lines liquid crystal display
Diagnostics
Self-diagnostic program
Automatic emulation selection
HP Color Printer (PCL5C) including HP LaserJet 4+ (PCL5e) and
HP LaserJet 5 (PCL6 monochrome)
x BR-Script 3 (Adobe PostScript 3 compatible)
x HP-GL
x EPSON FX-850
x IBM Proprinter XL
2-4
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2.3.
Electrical and Mechanical
Power source
U.S.A. and Canada:
AC 120V, 50/60Hz
Europe and Australia: AC 220 to 240V, 50/60Hz
Power consumption
Printing (peak*):
Printing (average):
Standing by (peak*):
Standing by (average):
Sleep:
1350W or less
600W or less
1350W or less
200W or less
30W or less
Noise:
Printing:
Standing by:
55dB A or less
48dB A or less
Temperature:
Operating:
Non operating:
Storage:
10 to 32.5°C (50 to 90.5°F)
5 to 35°C (41 to 95°F)
0 to 35°C (38 to 95°F)
Humidity:
Operating:
Storage:
20 to 80% (non condensation)
10 to 90% (non condensation)
Dimensions:
(W x D x H)
615 x 540 x 420 mm (24.2 x 21.3 x 16.5 inches)
615 x 620 x 610 mm (24.2 x 24.4 x 24.0 inches)
with the Duplex Unit and one optional lower tray unit fitted
615 x 620 x 750 mm (24.2 x 24.4 x 30.6 inches)
with the Duplex Unit and two optional lower tray units fitted
Weight:
Approx. 46kg (101lbs.)
Approx. 54kg (119lbs.) including consumables*
*Consumables are defined as:
Belt cartridge, Toner cartridge (Y, M, C, K), Fuser oil bottle,
Fuser cleaning roller, Waste toner Pack
Optional Units:
Lower Tray Unit: Approx. 11kg (24lbs.)
x Duplex Unit: Approx. 12kg (26lbs.)
x Standard Media Cassette: Approx. 2.1kg (4.6lbs.)
x Lower Tray Unit Media Cassette: Approx. 2.7kg (6.0lbs.)
x
*NOTE:
x
x
x
x
The peak figure of power consumption is worked out when the halogen heater lamp is
turned ON.
The peak figure of power consumption is worked out excluding inrush current value.
The peak figure of power consumption is a reference value and should be used internally
at Brother offices only.
The power consumption figure quoted for sleep mode is when the fan has stopped.
2-5
CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.
Paper
The standard media cassette (upper cassette) is supplied with the printer. The optional lower
tray unit and the optional A4/Letter cassette can also be installed.
NOTE:
The standard upper cassettes and the optional A4/Letter cassette are interchangeable
between the upper and the lower feeder.
2.4.1
Printable media
(1) Type & size
Paper source
Paper type
Standard upper cassette
Paper Size
Plain paper
A3, B4, A4, Ledger, Executive, Legal,
Letter, B5 (ISO/JIS), 330x483mm
(13”x19”)
Envelope
COM10, DL,
Transparency
A4, Letter
Label
A4, Letter
Other size
width 210-330mm (8.2”-12.9”)
length 176-483mm (6.9”-18.8”)
Optional lower cassette
Plain paper
A3, B4, A4, B5 (ISO/JIS), Legal, Ledger,
Letter
Optional A4/Letter cassette
Plain paper
A4, Letter, B5 (ISO/JIS), Executive
Envelope:
COM10, DL
Transparency
A4, Letter
Label
A4, Letter
Other size:
width 210-297mm (8.2”-11.7”)
length 176-297mm (6.9”-11.7”)
(2) Paper weight specifications
Paper cassette
Normal paper
Optional lower tray
m
2
60 to 90 g/m
(16 to 24 lbs)
Thick stock
2
Optional duplex unit
m
2
90 to 160 g/m
90 to 105 g/m
(24 to 43 lbs)
(24 to 28 lbs)
2-6
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(3) Recommended paper specifications
Item
Description
2
Basis Weight (g/m )
82 ± 5
Thickness (µ m)
95 ± 6
Smoothness (Bekk) (seconds)
90 ± 20
Stiffness (Clark)
100 ± 15
Brightness (%)
85 ± 2
Surface Resistance (:)
10 ~ 10
Grain Direction
Long
Measurement Condition:
!
10
11
17.5 ~ 27.0°C, 50 ~ 70%RH
CAUTION:
When you are choosing print media, be sure to it is designed for use with a laser printer and
load the media cassette correctly. Also follow the information given below to prevent any
paper jams, print quality problems or printer damage;
<Paper type to avoid>
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Highly textured paper.
Smooth or shiny paper.
Paper that is coated or has a chemical finish.
Damaged, wrinkled or pre-folded paper.
Paper exceeding the recommend weight specification in the manual.
Paper with tabs and staples.
Letterheads using low temperature dyes or thermography.
Multipart or carbonless paper.
<Envelopes type to avoid>
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Envelopes constructed with a paper with a weight that exceeds the paper weight
specifications for the printer.
Poorly manufactured envelopes with edges that are not straight or consistently square.
Envelopes with ‘baggy’ construction of folds that are not sharply creased.
Envelopes with transparent windows, holes, cutouts or perforations.
Envelopes with clasps, snaps or tie strings.
Envelopes made with smooth or shiny paper.
Envelopes that are rough, highly textured, or deeply embossed.
Envelopes that do not lie flat or that are curled, wrinkled, or irregularly shaped.
Envelopes having an open flap with an adhesive that seals the envelope.
<Transparencies / labels type to avoid>
x
Transparencies / labels that cannot withstand a temperature of 200 degrees centigrade
(392 degrees Fahrenheit) for a period of 0.1 seconds.
NOTE:
Keep the paper sealed in the bag as supplied and do not open the bag until the paper is
required for use.
2-7
CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.2
Media cassette capacity
Maximum load height:
x
Plain paper:
27mm (1.06 inches)
250 sheets of 75g/m2 (20lb) paper for the standard/optional A4/Letter
cassette
500 sheets of 75g/m2 (20lb) for the optional lower cassette
2.4.3
x
Envelopes :
x
Transparency: 50 sheets
x
Label:
15 sheets
80 sheets
Printed output
(1) Capacity
250 sheets of 75g/m2 (20lb) paper (plain paper stacked in the output tray)
(2) Delivery
Face-down print delivery
Note: Face down:
Delivers the printed side of the paper downwards.
2.5
Printing Area
2.5.1
Effective printable area
The effective printing area means the area within which the printing of all the data received
without any omissions can be guaranteed. (Refer to Table 2-1 for details.)
A
F
E
B
C
D
F
Fig. 2-1
2-8
E
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Table 2-1: Effective Printing Areas
Size
A4
Letter
Legal
B 5 (JIS)
B 5 (ISO)
Executive
COM-10
DL
13x19
A3
B4
Ledger
A
210.0mm
8.27”
(2,480 dots)
215.9mm
8.5”
(2,550 dots)
215.9mm
8.5”
(2,550 dots)
182.0mm
7.16”
(2,149 dots)
176.0mm
6.93”
(2,078 dots)
184.2mm
7.25”
(2,175 dots)
104.8mm
4.125”
(1,237 dots)
110.1mm
4.33”
(1,299 dots)
330mm
13”
(3,900 dots)
297mm
11.7”
(3,507 dots)
257mm
10.1”
(3,035 dots)
279.4mm
8.5”
(3,300 dots)
B
297.0mm
11.69”
(3,507 dots)
279.4mm
11.0”
(3,300 dots)
355.6mm
14.0”
(4,200 dots)
257.0mm
10.12”
(3,035 dots)
250.0mm
9.84”
(2,952 dots)
266.7mm
10.5”
(3,150 dots)
241.3mm
9.5”
(2,850 dots)
221mm
8.66”
(2,598 dots)
482.6mm
19”
(5,700 dots)
420mm
16.5”
(4,960 dots)
364mm
14.3”
(4,298 dots)
432mm
14”
(5,100 dots)
C
203.2mm
8.0”
(2,400 dots)
207.44mm
8.16”
(2,450 dots)
207.44mm
8.16”
(2,450 dots)
173.54mm
6.82”
(2,049 dots)
167.54mm
6.59”
(1,978 dots)
175.74mm
6.91”
(2,075 dots)
96.34mm
3.785”
(1,137 dots)
101.64mm
3.99”
(1,199 dots)
306.5mm
12.1”
(3,620 dots)
288.5mm
11.4”
(3,407 dots)
248.9mm
9.8”
(2,935 dots)
270.9mm
10.7”
(3,200 dots)
D
288.5mm
11.36”
(3,407 dots)
271.0mm
10.67”
(3,200 dots)
347.1mm
13.67”
(4,100 dots)
248.5mm
9.78”
(2,935 dots)
241.5mm
9.5”
(2,852 dots)
258.3mm
10.17”
(3,050 dots)
232.8mm
9.16”
(2,750 dots)
211.5mm
8.33”
(2,498 dots)
475.8mm
18.7”
(5,620 dots)
411.5mm
16.2”
(4,860 dots)
355.4mm
14”
(4,198 dots)
423.3mm
16.7”
(5,000 dots)
E
3.4mm
0.13”
(40 dots)
4.23mm
0.17”
(50 dots)
F
4.23mm
0.17”
(50 dots)
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
11.85mm
0.47”
(140 dots)
4.23mm
0.17”
(50 dots)
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
NOTE:
x
x
x
x
The paper sizes indicated here should conform to the nominal dimensions specified by
JIS.
A4 paper must accommodate 80 characters printed in pica pitch (203.2 mm).
The dot size is based on 300 dpi resolution.
Organizer is not supported by any printer emulation (command).
2-9
CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.5.2
Print guarantee area
<Plain paper>
4mm
Paper: 5mm
Other: 10mm
Non printable
area
Print
guarantee
area
Non guarantee
area
4mm
3mm
3mm
5mm
5mm
Paper: 4mm
Other: 10mm
Fig. 2-2
<Envelope>
Non guarantee
area
42mm
Non printable
area
Print guarantee
area
3mm
16mm
4mm
4mm
#10: 68mm
DL: 40mm
#10: 68mm
DL: 40mm
Fig. 2-3
2-10
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Ambient Temperature / Humidity / Altitude
Under Operational conditions: 10.0 a 32.5qC (50 ~ 90.5qF), 20 a 80%RH (See the
figure below)
(1)
Humidity (%RH)
80
Ambient
3.1
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
70
60
Recommended Condition;
17.5 a 27.0qC
50 a 70%RH
50
40
20
0
(2)
10
17.5 20
27 30
Ambient Temperature ( C)
32.5 40
Under Non Operational conditions: 5.0 a 35.0qC (41 ~ 95qF), 10 a 80%RH (See the
figure below.)
80
Ambient Humidity (%RH)
3.
60
40
30
20
10
0
5
10
20
Ambient Temperature( C )
2-11
30
35
40
CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS
(3)
Storage and transportation environment of printer
The following defines the storage and transportation environment of printers that have been
packed according to Brother specification. However, this section does not cover the OPC
belt cartridge, toner cartridges and developer cartridges.
In particular, since consumables such as the toner cartridges and OPC belt are individually
packaged, the following environmental conditions should be respected. During
transportation, strictly refrain from leaving the goods on the ground or under the sun.
Temperature
Normal
Conditions
0qC a 35qC (32qF a 95qF)
Severe
Conditions
High Temperature: 35qC a 40qC (95qF a 104qF)
Low Temperature: -10qC a 0qC (14qF a 32qF)
Humidity
10% a 90%RH
Period of Storage
One Year
Other
No condensation
Atmosphere
613 a 1,067hpa (460 a 800mmHg)
The period under the severe conditions should not be continuous, and is assumed as an
accumulation of intermittent time. However, an individual period of intermittent time under
severe conditions should not be allowed to exceed 48 hours.
NOTE:
Normal conditions should occupy more than 90% of total storage period.
Severe conditions should be less than 10% of total storage period.
2-12
CHAPTER 3
INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION .........................................................3-3
1. CONDITIONS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION........................................... 3-3
1.1. Environmental Conditions.....................................................................................................3-3
1.2. Basic Layout of Printer Set-up Location ...............................................................................3-3
2. UNPACKING................................................................................................... 3-5
2.1 Unpacking of Printer ..............................................................................................................3-5
2.2 Unpack the Starter Kit ...........................................................................................................3-7
3. INSTALLATION WORK .................................................................................. 3-8
3.1 Install the Oil Bottle and Fuser Cleaner.................................................................................3-8
3.2 Install the OPC Belt Cartridge ...............................................................................................3-9
3.3 Install the Toner Cartridge into the Printer...........................................................................3-11
3.4 Install the Media Cassette and Adaptor...............................................................................3-12
3.4.1 Install the media cassette .............................................................................................3-12
3.4.2 Install the envelope adaptor..........................................................................................3-13
3.5 Test Print .............................................................................................................................3-14
3-2
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 3
1.
INSTALLATION
CONDITIONS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION
Any Laser beam printer is likely to be influenced by the environment of the set-up location. If
the printer is set-up in an inappropriate location, the printer may not perform as expected.
Therefore, the following factors should be taken into consideration before deciding where to
set-up the printer.
1.1.
Environmental Conditions
The printer should not be set up in the locations referred to in the following items (1) through
(8) which specify inappropriate locations for set-up.
(1) Where it is likely to receive direct sunlight or similar light. (For example, next to a
window)
(2) Where it is likely to suffer a big difference in temperature and humidity between the
maximum and minimum levels. (Normal operation environment is within 10qC a 32.5qC,
20 a 80%RH and without any condensation.)
(3) Where it is likely to be in a draft of cold air from an air-conditioner or warm air from a
heater, or to receive direct radiant heat.
(4) Where it is likely to be excessively dusty or be subject to corrosive gases such as
ammonia.
(5) Where it is likely that an ultrasonic humidifier will be used.
(6) Where it is likely to have poor ventilation.
(7) Where it is likely to have unstable conditions such as when the set-up table is not strong
enough.
(8) Where it is likely to be tilted (angle from the horizontal should not be greater than r1q).
1.2.
Basic Layout of Printer Set-up Location
CAUTION
In the case when the printer is set on a table, confirm that the media cassette does not to
protrude out beyond the edge of the table.
x Any protrusion of the media cassette may catch a passersby and result in damage to the
printer.
x Protrusion of the media cassette may cause the printer to tilt or fall over if the operator
leans against or applies excessive force to the media cassette, which may cause injuries.
3-3
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION
Fig.3-1 shows the basic layout of the printer set-up location that is suitable for smooth
operation and maintenance of the printer.
Table
50cm (20")
20cm (8")
16cm
(6.4")
70cm
(28")
20cm (8")
Front Side
Paper Exit Side
70cm
(28")
80cm (32")
10cm (4")
Fig. 3-1
x
A space in front of the printer of 70cm is necessary to open the front cover.
x
A space at back of the printer of 20cm is necessary to open / close the rear access cover.
x
The space on both sides of the printer of 10cm is necessary for general access.
3-4
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2.
UNPACKING
WARNING
x The package containing a printer weighs approximately 66kg (145lbs), so it is too heavy
for one person to carry. It needs two adults or more to move the printer. Since the printer
is a precision machine, make sure that it is carried slowly with care so that no impact
occurs to the printer while moving it.
x Do not attempt to lift a printer when it is covered by the polyethylene bag because it is
slippery and may result in damage and injury if dropped.
2.1
Unpacking the Printer
Refer to Fig.3-2 on the next page.
1)
Cut the two bands from around the packing carton.
2)
Remove the binding tape from the top of the package.
3)
Open the top of the package and take the ST packing set out.
4)
Remove the upper packing (4 locations).
5)
Take the customisation kit** out of the box.
6)
Take the power cable out of the box. (for US / Canada only).
7)
Open up the polyethylene bag enclosing the printer and remove it.
8)
Remove the silica gel.
9)
Lift up and set up the printer in a suitable location using at least two persons.
** For USA/Canada, the kit contains the use’s guide and printer driver disks.
For other countries, the kit contains the use’s guide, printer driver disks and the
powercable.
3-5
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION
STARTER PACKING
SLEEVE
STARTER KIT PACKING (U)
Media cassette
OUTER BOX
Toner cartridges
STARTER KIT PACKING (M)
STARTER KIT
(ST PACKING SET 3 (B))
OPC belt cartridge
Oil bottle
L-SHAPED
PAPER SUPPORT
Toner cartridges
Fuser cleaner
STARTER KIT
PACKING (L)
BAND
Power cable
L-SHAPED
PAPER SUPPORT
SHIPPING TAPE
TAPE
POLYETHYLENE
BAG (EN)
BASE SET 3 (B)
PROTECTIVE
PACKING
PALLET 3 (B)
SILICA GEL
Fig. 3-2
3-6
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2.2
Unpack the Starter Kit
<Unpacking Procedure>
No.
1)
Open the vinyl bag and slide off the cardboard sleeve covering the starter kit.
2)
Confirm all of the following parts are inside the starter kit packing box.
Kit Name
Appearance
Quantity
Y (Yellow)
M (Magenta)
C (Cyan)
K (Black)
1
Toner Cartridge (Y, M,
C, K)
2
OPC Belt Cartridge
1
3
Oil Bottle
1
4
Fuser Cleaner & Syringe
1
5
Media Cassette with
Envelope Adapter
1
4
PRECAUTION
When shipping the printer, remove the oil bottle and the fuser cleaner from the fusing unit.
After removing the oil bottle, be sure to remove the oil remaining in the fusing unit with the
supplied syringe. Failure to do so will cause severe damage to the printer.
3-7
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION
3.
INSTALLATION WORK
CAUTION
Do not lean against or apply any excessive force to the media cassette or open covers;
otherwise it may cause the product to tilt or fall over and result in injuries.
Install the parts of the starter kit into the printer according to the following procedures:
3.1
Install the Oil Bottle and Fuser Cleaner
(1) Release the two sets of retainer lock
levers for both the oil bottle and the
fuser cleaner.
Pressure release
lever
(2) Set the fusing unit pressure release
levers to the SET position.
Pressure release
lever
Fig. 3-3
(3) Install the oil bottle into the fusing unit.
Oil bottle
NOTE:
When installing the oil bottle, be sure not to
touch the oil feed connection at the bottom
of the bottle to avoid oil leakage.
Fig. 3-4
(4) Install the fuser cleaner into the fusing
unit.
Fuser cleaner
(5) Secure the oil bottle and the fuser
cleaner with the retainer lock levers.
(6) Close the top cover.
Fig. 3-5
3-8
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
NOTE:
The retainer lock levers for the fuser cleaner and oil bottle are located as shown in the figure
below;
Retainer lock levers
Fuser cleaner
Oil bottle
Retainer lock levers
Fig. 3-6
3.2
Install the OPC Belt Cartridge
PRECAUTION
x
Do not directly touch the OPC belt surface with bare
hands or gloves.
x
If the belt is exposed for more than two minutes to a light
source of 800 lux, the belt may be damaged.
(1) Open the front cover and the top cover
by releasing the latches.
Top cover
PRECAUTION
When installing or removing the OPC
belt, be sure to open the front cover first.
Failure to do so will cause the OPC belt
to be damaged due to contact with the
toner cartridges.
Front cover
Fig. 3-7
3-9
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION
(2) Release the belt cartridge lock levers
(left & right).
Belt cartridge
lock lever (L)
Belt cartridge lock
lever (R)
Fig. 3-8
Tension
release pin
(3) Pull and remove the tension release
pins on both sides (left & right) of the
OPC belt cartridge.
(4) Remove the protective sheet from the
OPC belt
OPC belt cartridge.
cartridge
Tension
release pin
Protective sheet
Fig. 3-9
(5) Install the OPC belt cartridge into the
guides at both sides in the printer.
OPC belt cartridge
(6) Set the belt cartridge lock lever at both
sides (left and right).
Fig. 3-10
3-10
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
3.3
Install the Toner Cartridges into the Printer
(1) Rock each of the cartridge 3 to 4 times
o
through 30 to the horizontal.
30o
30o
Fig. 3-11
(2) Pull off the tape labeled ‘REMOVE’ from
the toner cartridge.
Protective label
Fig. 3-12
(3) Remove the protective cover from the
toner cartridge.
Protective
cover
@
?
Fig. 3-13
(4) Install the four toner cartridges by
sliding them gently along the guides into
the printer. DO NOT USE FORCE TO
INSERT THE CARTRIDGES AND DO
NOT PUSH THEM FULLY INTO THE
PRINTER, THEY WILL BE
POSITIONED CORRECTLY WHEN
THE FRONT COVER IS CLOSED.
Fig. 3-14
NOTE:
The installation order of the four toner
cartridges should be from the bottom to the
top, in terms of colors this is in the order
Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and
Black (K).
K
Y
(3) Close the front cover.
M
C
Fig. 3-15
3-11
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION
3.4
Install the Media Cassette and Adapter
3.4.1
Install the media cassette
(1) Remove the cassette cover from the
media cassette.
Cassette cover
Fig. 3-16
(2) Set the paper guide according to the
print paper size.
Paper guide
i) Horizontal direction; Holding the
green side plate to meet the paper
size position.
ii) Vertical direction; Holding the green
color lever, adjust the end plate to
meet the paper size position.
Paper guide
Fig. 3-17
(3) Load the paper into the cassette.
PAPER
LABEL
OHP FILM
PRECAUTION
Loading capacity of the cassette is
subject to the type of media in use.
Keep the loading level below the upper
limit marked on the label. Excessive
loading of media over the upper limit will
result in paper feed jams or print quality
problems.
(4) Install the cassette cover.
Fig. 3-18
(5) Install the cassette into the printer.
3-12
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
3.4.2
Install the envelope adapter
NOTE:
The specification of envelopes feedable from the envelope adapter are as follows;
x Capacity: 15 envelopes
DL (110 x 220 mm), #10 (105 x 241 mm)
x Size:
Envelope adapter
(1) Prepare the media cassette and
envelope adapter.
(2) Put the adapter on the cassette base
and engage the hooks provided on the
leading edge of the adapter (left and
right) into the cassette base.
Cassette base
Fig. 3-19
(3) Move the envelope guide to meet the
adapter base.
Envelope guide
Adaptor base
Fig. 3-20
(4) Move the paper guides to meet the
desired envelope size.
Paper guide
Paper guide
(5) Load the envelopes into the adapter.
PRECAUTION
Do not load media in the adapter higher
than the specified capacity limit,
otherwise it may result in paper feed
jams or print quality problems.
Fig. 3-21
CAUTION
When removing the envelope adapter from the media cassette, pull the adapter toward you
while holding the trailing edge of the adapter up approximately 10mm.
Do not hold up the trailing edge of the adapter by force, otherwise it may result in damage to
the hooks provided at the leading edge of the adapter.
Envelope adaptor
Cassette base
Hook
Fig. 3-22
3-13
Cassette base
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION
3.5
Test Print
(1)
Make sure the printer power button is off. Do not connect the interface cable.
Fig. 3-23
(2)
Connect the AC power cord to the printer, and then plug it into the AC outlet.
Fig. 3-24
(3)
Turn on the power button.
Fig. 3-25
3-14
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(4)
After the printer warms, the READY message will appear.
K
C
M
Y
NETWORK READY
HL-3450CN
Power
Ready
Data
Go
Job
Cancel
Back
Set
Alarm
Secure
Print
Reprint
Fig. 3-26
(5)
Press the Go button. The printer will print a test page. Check that the test page is
printed correctly.
K
C
M
Y
NETWORK READY
HL-3450CN
Power
Ready
Data
Go
Job
Cancel
Back
Set
Alarm
Fig. 3-27
3-15
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 4
STRUCTURE OF
SYSTEM
COMPONENTS
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS.................. 4-3
1. BASIC STRUCTURE ....................................................................................... 4-3
1.1 Mechanical Structures ............................................................................................................ 4-3
1.2 Basic Mechanism of Color Printing ......................................................................................... 4-5
1.2.1 Principle of color printing .................................................................................................. 4-5
1.2.2 Basic color printing process ............................................................................................. 4-5
1.3 Structure of the OPC Belt ....................................................................................................... 4-7
1.4 Print System and Transfer System ......................................................................................... 4-8
1.4.1 Structure of the printer...................................................................................................... 4-9
1.4.2 Basic structure of the printing system ............................................................................ 4-10
1.4.3 Details of each process .................................................................................................. 4-12
1.5 Scanning System .................................................................................................................. 4-23
1.6 Paper Transportation System ............................................................................................... 4-25
1.6.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................ 4-25
1.6.2 Structure of paper transportation system ....................................................................... 4-25
1.7 Fusing Unit............................................................................................................................ 4-26
1.7.1 Structure......................................................................................................................... 4-26
1.7.2 Fusing process ............................................................................................................... 4-27
2. STRUCTURE OF THE CONTROL SYSTEM................................................. 4-28
2.1 Basic Structure - Electrical System and Functions ............................................................... 4-28
2.2 Control System - Control of the Print Process ...................................................................... 4-37
2.3 Main PCB (Video Controller PCB) ........................................................................................ 4-46
2.3.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................ 4-46
2.3.2 Circuit ............................................................................................................................. 4-48
2.4 Low-voltage Power Supply Unit ............................................................................................ 4-60
2.5 High-voltage Power Supply Unit ........................................................................................... 4-63
2.6 Connection Diagram ............................................................................................................. 4-65
4-2
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 4
1.
1.1
STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
BASIC STRUCTURE
Mechanical Structures
This laser beam color printer (hereinafter called “Printer”) consists of five mechanical
systems; Print, Transfer, Scanning, Paper Transport and Control System. The printer
produces color printing through the interactive operations of these five systems as shown in
Fig.4-1.
(1)
Print System
The print system consists of the following 6 (six) functional parts located around the
OPC belt which form a toner image on the OPC Belt.
(2)
x
Charger Part
x
Exposure Part
x
Development Part
x
First Transfer Part
x
Discharger Part
x
Cleaner Part
Scanning System
The scanning system consists of the following 2 (two) functional parts which form an
electrostatic latent image on the OPC Belt by scanning it with a laser beam.
(3)
x
Scanner Unit
x
Scanner Motor (SCM)
Transfer System
The transfer system consists of the following 3 (three) functional parts and transfers
the toner image formed on the transfer drum onto the page.
(4)
x
Transfer Drum
x
Second Transfer Part
x
Drum Cleaner Unit
Paper Transport System
The paper transport system consists of the following 5 (five) functional parts and picks
up paper from the media cassette, separates the paper from the transfer drum and
exits it from the printer body after fusing the toner image on the paper.
x
Media Cassette
x
Transport rollers
x
Paper Discharger
x
Fusing unit
x
Paper Exit
4-3
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Main Motor
MM
Developer Motor
Paper Exit Unit
Paper Exit
I/F Controller
Drum Cleaner Unit
DM
Fusing Unit
Toner
Cartridge
OPC Belt
Drum Cleaning
Operation
Development
Transfer Unit
K
MCTL
I/F Control
Sequence Control
Y
M
Laser Control
Fix
Paper Discharger
Transfer Drum
C
First Transfer
AC Discharger Unit
Transfer Roller
Second Transfer
Scanner Unit
Exposure
LD
Discharge
Laser Diode
Resistration Roller
Charge
Transport Roller
Erase Lamp
DC Charger
Cleaning
Paper Feed
Paper Cassette
Fig. 4-1
4-4
SCM
Scaner Moter
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(5)
Control System
The control system consists of the following 4 (four) control parts and runs the printer
by processing the interface signals transmitted from the Host computer and interfacing
to the print, transfer, scanning and transport systems.
x
Sequence Control
x
Laser Control
x
Fusing Temperature Control
x
Interface Control
1.2
Basic Mechanism of Color Printing
1.2.1
Principle of color printing
Color printing is made through the subtractive process by combining the three primary colors,
yellow, magenta, and cyan. Fig.4-2 shows the three primary colors and subtractive process:
C
G
B
K
M
R
Y
Y: Yellow
M: Magenta
C: Cyan
R: Red
G: Green
B: Blue
K: Black
Fig. 4-2
1.2.2
Basic color printing process
(a)
The printer has a toner cartridge of each color yellow, magenta, cyan and black as
shown in Fig.4-3.
(b)
The toner image developed using the primary colors is transferred to the transfer drum
for the printed color combination as shown in Fig.4-4 a .
(c)
The toner image formed on the transfer drum is transferred to the transported paper as
shown in Fig.4-4 b .
(d)
The toner on the paper is fused by the thermal fixing unit to fix the toner image onto
the paper as shown in Fig.4-4 c .
Summarizing the above processes, a toner color layer is formed on the transported paper,
and subsequently, the color image is made through the subtractive process.
4-5
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
OPC belt
Toner cartridge
Transfer crum
K
Y
M
C
Fig. 4-3
Toner
a First Transfer
a
MMM
CC C
Y Y Y CC Y Y Y
Transfer Drum
b Second Transfer
b
Y Y Y
Y Y Y
MMM C C C CC
Paper
Red
C Fusing
C
R
Cyan
Green
C
G
Paper
Fig. 4-4
4-6
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
1.3
Structure of the OPC Belt
The OPC belt consists of a surface layer having a photoconductor (OPC) of organic material,
the inner layer of an insulator material (PET) and an aluminum deposit layer in between. The
OPC belt is located as shown in Fig.4-5 as the main part of the print system.
OPC belt cartridge
Toner cartridge
OPC belt
Transfer drum
Scanner Unit
Fig. 4-5
Electrode
Photoconductor (OPC)
Aluminum deposit layer
Insulator material
Fig. 4-6
4-7
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1.4
Print System and Transfer System
Fig.4-7 shows the basic structure of the print system having the OPC belt as the main part
and the transfer system having the transfer drum. Color printing is achieved by actuating in
sequence each process in the print system and transfer system.
1
Chargimg
2
Exposing
KCMY
6
OPC Belt Cleaning
3
Developing
KCMY
5
Belt Discharge
9
Transfer Drum Cleaning
Print System
4
KCMY
OPC Belt
Transfer Drum(First Transfer)
Transfer Drum
Transfer System
KCMY
7
Second Transfer(Paper)
8
Paper Dischanging
10
Fusing
11
Paper Exit
Transport System
Fig. 4-7
4-8
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
1.4.1
Structure of the printer
No.
Component Part
Process
1
Charger
Charging
2
Scanner Unit
Exposing
3
Toner cartridge
Developing
4
OPC belt cartridge
Receives the Image
5
Transfer drum
Transfers the Image
6
Erase lamp
Discharges the Belt
7
Cleaning blade
Cleaning the Belt
8
Transfer roller
Transferring
9
Paper discharger
Discharges the Paper
10
Drum cleaner
Cleans the Drum
11
Fusing unit
Fusing
12
Paper exit unit
Exits the Paper
4. OPC belt cartridge
12. Paper exit unit
10. Drum cleaner
3. Toner cartridge
(K, Y, M, C)
11. Fusing unit
9. Paper discharger
8. Transfer roller
Transfer unit
5. Transfer drum
Paper pick-up roller
6. Erase lamp
1. Charger
7. Cleaning Media cassette
blade
Fig. 4-8
4-9
2. Scanner Unit
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1.4.2
Basic structure of the printing system
A toner image is formed through the potential of the OPC belt varying in each of the charger,
exposure, development, transfer and cleaning processes.
(1)
Process of Print System (See Fig.4-9.)
i) The OPC belt is biased to the voltage -CBV (V) by the power supply CBV.
ii) A negative high voltage is applied to the charger unit by the power supply CHV, and
a corona is generated as the result.
iii) The developer roller of the toner cartridges is biased to -DBV (V) by the power
supply DBV.
iv) The frame potential of the transfer drum is GND.
Cleaning Unit
FCBV
Fusing Unit
Toner
OPC Belt
Toner Cartridge
K
Develop
Paper Discharger
Y
Transfer Drum
M
ACHV
DBV
C
Transfer Roller
CBV
Scanner Unit
THV (+)
THV ( - )
Cleaning
Paper
Erase Lamp
Brade
Charger
CHV
ZDV
Fig. 4-9
4-10
Po
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(2)
Variation of OPC Belt Potential (See Fig.4-10.)
i) The OPC belt is initially biased to -CBV (V).
ii) The OPC belt surface is evenly charged to V0 (V) in the charging process.
iii) The potential of the exposure part of the OPC belt is reduced to -VR (V) as it is
exposed to the laser beam in the process of exposing, and an electrostatic latent
image is formed on the OPC belt as the result.
iv) Negatively charged toner is moved onto the exposed part of the OPC belt in the
development process due to the difference of potential between -VR (V) and -DBV
(V), and a visible toner image is formed as the result.
v) Negatively charged toner on the OPC belt moves to the transfer drum surface in the
transfer process because the GND potential of the transfer drum is greater than VR (V) of the OPC belt.
vi) The OPC belt is discharged by the erase lamp.
2
1
Process
3
5
4
Transfer Drum
GND
OV
Toner
- CBV
- VR
OPC Belt
DBV
Toner
Dev. roller
- VO
1
2
3
4
5
Charger
CBV
CHV
DBV
Charging Process
Exposing Process
Developing Process
Transfering Process
Cleaning (Erase)
CBV Power Supply for OPC Belt Bias
CHV Power Supply for Charging
DBV Power Supply for Dev. Roller Bias
- VR Remain voltage on the OPC Belt
Fig. 4-10
4-11
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1.4.3
Details of each process
1
Charging
The charging process ensures that the OPC belt is evenly charged by the charger system.
(1)
Structure of the charger unit (Refer to Fig.4-8 and Fig.4-11)
i) The charger unit is located as shown in Fig.4-8.
ii) The charger unit consists of the case, corona wire and grid.
iii) The charger unit charges the OPC belt surface to the potential -V0 (V) with the
corona charge.
iv) The charger unit has the grid controlled to the constant voltage ZD (V) for even
charging.
(2)
Process of charging (Refer to Fig.4-12.)
i) The status of the OPC belt surface before charging is -CBV (V).
ii) The charger unit charges the OPC belt surface evenly to -V0 (V) by generating a
negative charge.
Corona wire
Grid
-V0
ZD
Case
CBV
CHV
Cleaning
(Blade)
Fig. 4-11
Charging
Fig. 4-12
4-12
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2
Exposing
The exposing process means that the OPC belt surface is exposed to the laser beam to form
an electrostatic latent image.
(1)
Structure of scanner unit
i) The scanner unit is located as shown in Fig.4-8.
ii) The source of the laser beam is a semiconductor laser.
iii) The laser light is scanned onto the OPC belt by converting the laser light to a beam
of light through the lens and reflective mirror to form an electrostatic latent image.
(2)
Process of exposing (Refer to Fig.4-13.)
i) The OPC belt surface has been charged to the potential -Vo (V) in the charging
process.
ii) The laser light is scanned at right angles to the forward direction of the OPC belt.
iii) High speed switching of the laser is made according to the transmitted image data.
iv) The charge of the areas radiated by the laser light is reduced to the potential -VR
(V).
v) An invisible electrostatic latent image is formed on the OPC belt as shown in Fig. 413.
-V R
-V O
Charging
Exposing
Fig. 4-13
4-13
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
3
Developing
The developing process means that an electrostatic latent image on the OPC belt is made
visible by depositing toner onto the exposed areas of the OPC belt.
(1)
Structure of the Toner Cartridge (Refer to Fig.4-8 & 4.14.)
i) The toner cartridge is located as shown in Fig.4-8.
ii) Four toner cartridges are made available from the top to bottom in the order black,
yellow, magenta and cyan.
iii) Each color toner is loaded in the corresponding toner cartridge.
(2)
Process of Developing (Refer to Fig.4-8, 4-14, 4-15, and 4-16)
i) Toner adheres to the developer roller of the toner cartridge.
Developing is processed by this roller contacting the OPC belt surface.
ii) The developer roller has been biased to the potential -DBV (V). Fig.4-15 describes
the relationship established between the potential of the toner, the potential -V0 (V)
at the non-exposed area of OPC belt and the potential -VR (V) on the exposed area
of the OPC belt.
iii) Developing is processed by the toner adhering to the OPC belt due to the attraction
between the potential of the toner and the potential -VR (V) on the exposed area of
the OPC belt. A visible Toner image is formed on the OPC belt.
iv) No developing takes place on the non-exposed area because the potential of the
toner and that of the OPC belt is the same polarity and therefore repel each other.
OPC belt
Toner cartridge
Developer roller
Toner
Fig. 4-14
4-14
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Developer roller
(-CBV) + (-DBV)
Toner
(-CBV)
OPC belt
DBV
CBV
Fig. 4-15
Toner (M)
Y
Exposing
M
Developing
Fig. 4-16
4-15
C
K
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
4
First Transfer (Drum)
The first transfer process means that the toner image on the OPC belt is transferred onto the
transfer drum.
(1)
Structure of the Transfer Drum (Refer to Fig.4-8.)
i) The drum is located as shown in Fig.4-8.
ii) Material of the drum is aluminum.
iii) Semiconductor rubber is used to provide the drum surface as shown in Fig.4-17.
iv) The transfer drum rotates by contacting and synchronizing with the OPC belt.
Transfer Drum
Aluminum
Rubber
Fig. 4-17
4-16
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(2)
First Transfer Process (Refer to Fig.4-18.)
i) The OPC belt has been through the development process and contacts and
synchronizes with the transfer drum.
ii) The OPC belt has been biased to the potential of -CBV (V). The potential of the
transfer drum is nearly GND.
iii) Toner on the OPC belt is moved onto the transfer drum due to the difference of
potential between the OPC belt and the transfer drum.
iv) Toner that has been developed by each color in sequence is moved from the OPC
belt onto the transfer drum and the color toner images overlap on the transfer drum.
v) Upon completion of the drum transfer process, the complete toner image is
transferred onto paper in the paper transfer process.
Residual charge
OPC belt
Residual toner
Belt cleaning
(Blade)
Belt discharging
(Erase lamp)
Drum transferring
Fig. 4-18
4-17
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
5
Belt Discharging (Erase Lamp)
The belt discharging process means that upon completion of the drum transfer process, an
LED light is radiated onto the OPC belt prior to mechanically cleaning the belt to discharge
the residual charge.
(1)
Structure of Erase Lamp
i) The erase lamp is located as shown in Fig.4-8.
ii) The light source of the erase lamp is 24 light emitting diodes (LEDs).
(2)
Process of Discharging (Refer to Fig.4-19.)
i) Though the toner image was transferred to the transfer drum in the drum transfer
process, there is still a residual charge on the OPC belt.
ii) The residual charge (-VR) on the OPC belt is discharged by the radiation of the
erase lamp light prior to cleaning the belt.
Belt discharging
(Erase lamp)
Drum transferring
Fig. 4-19
4-18
Belt cleaning
(Blade)
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
6
Belt Cleaning
The belt cleaning process means that the residual toner adhering to the OPC belt surface is
mechanically scavenged.
(1)
Structure of Belt Cleaning
The blade for the belt cleaning is located relative to the OPC belt cartridge as shown in
Fig.4-8.
(2)
Process of Belt Cleaning (Refer to Fig.4-20.)
i) There is residual toner on the OPC belt as it has not been completely transferred in
the drum transfer process.
ii) Residual toner is mechanically scavenged by the blade edge.
iii) The scavenged residual toner is collected in the waste toner pack by the waste
toner feeder.
Belt cleaning
(Blade)
Belt discharging
(Erase lamp)
Drum transferring
Fig. 4-20
4-19
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
7
Second Transfer (Paper)
The second transfer process is where the toner image on the transfer drum is transferred
onto the transported paper.
(1)
Second Transfer Structure
i) The transfer roller for the paper transfer is located as shown in Fig.4-8.
ii) The transfer roller is normally kept out of contact with the transfer drum until the
second transfer process starts.
iii) The transfer roller is positively biased by the power supply THV.
iv) The transfer roller is in contact with the transfer drum only in the second transfer
process.
v) Transported paper passes between the transfer roller and transfer drum.
(2)
Second Transfer Process (Refer to Fig.4-21.)
i) Paper is transported and is synchronized with the transfer drum.
ii) The transfer roller operates and is synchronized with the transported paper and is
in contact with the transfer drum through the transported paper.
iii) The transported paper passes between the transfer roller and transfer drum.
At this time the positive high voltage (THV) is fed to the transfer roller.
iv) Negatively charged toner on the transfer drum is moved to the positively charged
paper.
v) The transported paper with the toner transferred to it is moved to the paper
discharging process.
Paper discharger
Transfer drum
Transfer roller
Toner image
VAC
THV
Paper
Fig. 4-21
4-20
VAC: Power supply for paper
discharging
THV: Power supply for transfer
roller bias
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
8
Paper Discharging
The paper discharging process is where the transported paper onto which the toner transfer
has been completed is separated from the transfer drum by applying an AC charge to the
paper.
(1)
Structure of Paper Discharger (Refer to Fig.4-22.)
i) The AC charger unit for discharge the paper is located as shown in Fig.4-8.
ii) The AC charger unit consists of the case and a charger wire.
iii) A high alternating voltage (VAC) is fed to the AC charger unit.
(2)
Process of Paper Discharging (Refer to Fig.4-22.)
i) The paper adheres to the transfer drum in the transfer process.
ii) The paper is neutralized (discharged) in terms of any electrical charge by the
alternate voltage generated by the discharger.
iii) Paper is separated from the transfer drum and subsequently transported to the
fusing (fixing) process.
Paper discharger
Transfer roller
Transfer drum
Toner
VAC
THV
Paper
Fig. 4-22
4-21
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
9
Drum Cleaning
The drum cleaning process is where the residual toner on the transfer drum is removed.
(1)
Structure of Drum Cleaning (Refer to Fig.4-23.)
i) The drum cleaning unit is located as shown in Fig.4-8.
ii) The drum cleaning brush is a semiconductor type so that the brush can clean the
surface of the rotating transfer drum. The Drum cleaning brush is kept out of
contact with the transfer drum when the print image on the transfer drum is being
created.
iii) The drum cleaning roller is positively biased by the positive voltage FCBV (V).
iv) FCBV (V) is fed to the cleaning brush in contact with the roller and the cleaning
brush is self-biased by the resistance of the brush.
v) The drum cleaning roller rotates in contact with the drum cleaning brush.
(2)
Process of Drum Cleaning (Refer to Fig.4-23.)
i) There is residual toner on the surface of the transfer drum after the paper transfer
process.
ii) The Drum cleaning brush is positively self-biased and so the negatively charged
residual toner is removed from the surface of the transfer drum onto the drum
cleaning brush.
iii) The Drum cleaning roller has been biased to the positive voltage FCBV (V). As the
cleaning brush rotates, the residual toner absorbed into the brush from the transfer
drum is attracted by the positive FCBV (V) voltage on the roller and adheres to the
surface of the drum cleaning roller.
iv) Waste toner adhering to the surface of the drum cleaning roller is scavenged by the
cleaning blade and collected into the waste toner pack by the waste toner feeder.
Cleaning brush
Drum cleaner
West toner feeder
Residual
Toner
FCBV
FCBV: Cleaning roller
Power supply for
fuser cleaner bias
Drum cleaning unit
Transfer drum
Fig. 4-23
4-22
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
1.5
Scanning System
This printer employs a semiconductor laser diode as a light source. This laser diode is
switched according to the transmitted image data (video signal).
The generated laser light scans over the OPC belt through a polygon mirror and lens, by
which method electrostatic latent images will be formed on the OPC belt.
(1)
Structure of the Scanning System (Refer to Fig.4-24.)
The scanner unit is located as shown in Fig.4-8.
The scanner unit consists of the following parts;
c
d
e
f
Scanner Unit:
Light emitting source incorporating a laser diode.
Cylinder lens:
Condenser for the laser beam.
Polygon mirror:
Hexahedral mirror for scanning the laser beam.
F-6 lens:
Focus lens for the laser beam.
g
h
i
j
k
Scanner motor:
Motor to rotate the polygon mirror.
Mirror:
Reflecting mirror for the laser beam path.
LDC:
Laser diode control circuit.
PD:
Beam detector.
BTD mirror:
Beam timing detector mirror to guide the laser beam
to the PD sensor.
Scanner Unit box
8
6
4
9
2
Dust proof glass
5
2
3
1
7
Developer belt
Fig. 4-24
4-23
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
(2)
Specification:
Specification of the scanner unit is as follows;
Item
Specifications
Rated output of laser diode
5 mW.
Wave length of laser beam
Approx.785nm.
Scanning density
600dpi
Scanning width
310mm
Scanner motor speed
24,072rpm
Number of polygon mirror faces
6
4-24
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
1.6
Paper Transportation System
1.6.1
Outline
This printer employs automatic paper feeding from the media cassette.
When toner images are formed on the transfer drum through the operations of the print
system and transfer system, paper is fed by the pick-up roller and transported to the
register roller. The transported paper is further transported to the transfer, fuser and
exit parts by the register roller synchronizing with the rotation of the transfer drum.
1.6.2
Structure of paper transportation system
The paper transportation system consists of the following parts;
c
Media cassette:
Case to accommodate paper to be fed automatically.
d
Paper pick-up roller:
Roller to feed sheets of paper one by one, preventing
multi-feed.
e
Register roller:
Roller to transport papers synchronized with the
transfer drum.
f
Transfer part:
Print processing part consisting of transfer drum and
transfer roller to transfer the toner image onto the
paper.
g
Paper discharger unit:
Corona generator to generate AC corona for
separating paper from the transfer drum.
h
Fusing unit:
Mechanical part to fuse the toner image with heat
rollers and fix it on the paper.
i
Paper exit unit:
Mechanical part to exit the fused paper from the
printer.
j
Paper exit roller:
Roller to feed paper from the printer.
j
i
h
K
Y
M
C
g
f
e
d
c
Fig. 4-25
4-25
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1.7
Fusing Unit
The fusing unit employs a thermal fusing system using heater lamps in the rollers. Paper
carrying the combined toner image passes between the heat rollers. Heat and pressure is
applied to the paper when passing between the heat rollers so that the toner image is melted
and fused onto the paper.
1.7.1
Structure
The fusing unit consists of the following component parts; (Refer to Fig.4-26.)
c
Fuser roller:
incorporates a heater lamp.
d
Back-up roller:
is a pressure roller and incorporates a heater
lamp.
e
Fusing heaters:
halogen lamps to heat the rollers.
f
Thermistor:
is a sensor to detect the temperature of the
fuser roller’s surface.
g
Thermal fuse:
prevent the fuser roller from being
excessively heated up.
h
Oil bottle:
contains silicone oil for fusing.
i
Fuser cleaner:
cleans the fuser roller.
7
4
1
6
2
5
3
Fig. 4-26
4-26
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
1.7.2
Fusing process
c
Silicone oil supplied from the oil bottle is applied to the surface of
fuser roller.
d
The toner image has been transferred onto the paper, but not yet
fused.
e
Transported paper passes between the heater roller and back-up
roller.
f
Each roller is heated up to approx.150qC, and receives
approximately 156N pressure from the opposite heat roller.
g
When the paper carrying the toner images passes between the
two heat rollers, the toner images are melted and fused on the
transported paper.
h
The paper carrying the fused image is separated from the heat
rollers, and ejected from the printer.
M: Magenta toner
Y: Yellow toner
C: Cyan toner
Toner Image
C
M
(a) Before Fusing
Y
M
Paper
Y
R: Red
M: Magenta
G: Green
Fixed toner
(b) After Fusing
R
M
Fig. 4-27
4-27
G
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
2.
2.1
STRUCTURE OF THE CONTROL SYSTEM
Basic Structure - Electrical System and Functions
Most of the main electrical parts of this printer are controlled by the MCTL (engine controller)
PWB.
<Structure of the sequence control>
The basic structure of the sequence control is shown in Fig.4-28.
c
Print Process Control:
To control the print process from the paper feed
through to the paper exit.
d
Laser Output Control:
To automatically control the laser output.
e
Fuser Temperature Control:
To control the fixer heater so that the
temperature of the fuser roller and back-up
roller will be correct.
f
Toner Sensing Control:
To control the sensing of the toner empty
status.
g
Interface Control:
(Video Signal)
To process the input and output signals to and
from the external controller (host).
h
Control Panel Indicator:
To display the printer operational status on the
control panel indicator.
i
Error Control:
To control the safety stop procedures when
errors occur in the printer.
4-28
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Control
Panel
Main
Motor
Cooling
Fan
Cooling
Fan
Scanner
Motor
DM
Host Computer
Belt
Sensor
Drum
Sensor
ATC (4 pcs.)
LDU
Y
M
C
PD
K
MCTL (Engine Controller)
I/F
Controller
I/F
Sequence Control
Control
Laser Control
Temperature Control
Video
Controller
Toner Connection Control
CPU
Control Panel Control
Error Clearance Program
Cleaning Roller
Sensor
High Voltage Unit
Oil Sensor
Fusing Unit
DC Power
Supply Unit
Interlock Switches
Fig. 4-28
4-29
Paper Empty Sensor
Drum Encoder
Paper Feed Sensor
Belt Sensor
Toner Empty Sensor
Oil Sensor
Paper Size Sensor
Paper Full Sensor
Paper Exit Sensor
Waste Toner Sensor
OHP Sensor
Toner Key Sensor
Drum Jam Sensor
Developer Sensor
Cleaning Roller Sensor
Temperature Sensor
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
<Layout & Function of the Electrical Parts>
(1)
Print PCB (Refer to Fig. 4-29.)
No.
Name
Function
1
Video controller PCB
To receive the print data from the host computer,
convert it into image data and then send the
printing image data to the MCTL PWB.
2
Engine controller PCB
(MCTL PWB)
To control the sequence of processes of the
printer: Fusing Temperature Control, Laser Output
Control, Control Panel Indications, Toner Empty
Sensing Control, Error Processing Control,
Interface Control.
3
Control panel PCB
(Panel PWB)
4
LDU PCB
To control the drive and output to the laser diode
in the scanner unit.
5
PDU PCB
To sense the emission of the laser diode and the
beam position in the scanner unit.
6
Erase lamp
To discharge the OPC belt with the LEDs.
7
IOD1 PWB
To send the signals from the sensors to the MCTL
PWB, and to drive the outputs from the MTCL
PWB to the motors, clutches and solenoids.
8
IOD2 PWB
- Ditto -
9
DC power supply
(LVPS) PCB
10
High-voltage power
supply (HVU) PCB
To display the printer’s operation status and
support the control panel switches.
To provide the printer with the power for printer
control.
To provide the printer with the high voltage power
supplies necessary for the printing process.
4-30
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Layout of PCBs
6. Erase lamp
3. Control panel PCB
(Panel PWB)
8. IOD2 PWB
10. High-voltage power
supply (HVU) PCB
7. IOD1 PWB
1. Video
controller PCB
2. Engine controller PCB
(MCTL PWB)
4. LDU PCB
9. Power supply (LVPS) PCB
5. PDU PCB
Fig. 4-29
4-31
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
(2)
Motors (Refer to Fig.4-30.)
No.
Name
Code
Function
1
Main motor
MM
To drive the OPC belt and the paper
transport system.
2
Developing motor
(Developer drive motor)
DM
To drive the toner cartridge and the
developing system.
3
Scanner motor
4
Ozone fan motor
(Cooling fan motor)
OZFAN
(OZ)
To exhaust the ozone from the
printer (charger unit).
5
Fuser fan motor
(Cooling fan motor)
HTFAN
(EX)
To exhaust the heat of the fusing
6
Controller fan motor
(Cooling fan motor)
CTLFAN
(PS)
To exhaust the heat of the power
supply unit and Interface Controller.
Interlock switch
Front cover switch
Top cover switch
Rear access cover
(TR unit cover) switch
DSW1
DSW2
DSW3
7
7-1
7-2
7-3
SCM
To scan the laser beam
These are the safety interlock
switches that operate when the
covers are opened.
Layout of Motors
4. Ozone fan motor
5. Fuser fan motor
1. Main Motor
7-2. Top cover switch
2. Developing motor
6. Controller fan motor
7-3. Rear access
cover switch
3. Scanner motor
7-1. Front cover switch
Fig. 4-30
4-32
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(3)
Clutches (Refer to Fig.4-31.)
No.
1
Name
Paper feeding clutch
2
Registration clutch
3
Fuser clutch
4
5a8
9
10
Cleaner clutch
Developer clutch
TR cam clutch
Cleaner cam clutch
Function
To feed paper by coupling the feed roller to the
main gear unit at the correct timing for paper
feeding.
To transport paper by coupling the register roller to
the main gear unit synchronized with the rotation of
the transfer drum.
To drive the fusing rollers by coupling the fusing
unit to the main gear unit.
To drive the brush of the drum cleaner by coupling
the cleaner clutch to the main gear unit at the
correct timing for drum cleaning.
To drive the magnetic roller of the desired color
toner cartridge by coupling that toner cartridge to
the developer gear unit during developing.
To make the transfer roller contact the transfer
drum surface at the time of the second transfer.
To make the drum cleaner contact the surface of
the transfer roller at the correct timing for drum
cleaning.
NOTE: The cleaner cam clutch is identical to the
TR cam clutch.
4-33
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Layout of Clutches
10
3
4
9
2
1
8
7
6
5
Fig. 4-31
4-34
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(4)
Sensors
No.
Name
Code
Function
1
Paper size sensor
PSU
Photo sensor to detect the paper size.
2
Paper feeding sensor
PS 1
Photo sensor to detect when paper is
fed from the media cassette.
3
Paper exit sensor
PS 2
Photo sensor to detect that paper is
exited from the paper exit unit.
4
Paper empty sensor
PS 3
Photo sensor to detect if paper is
loaded in the media cassette.
5
Oil sensor
OIL
Photo sensor to detect if the fusing
unit oil is empty.
6
OHP sensor
OHP
Photo sensor to detect if media in the
media cassette is an OHP.
7
Drum jam sensor
DPJ
Photo sensor to detect if paper is
wound around the transfer drum.
8
Drum encoder sensor
PS 4
Photo sensor to detect rotation of the
transfer drum.
9
Belt sensor
PBS
Photo sensor to detect the home
position of the OPC belt.
10
Toner sensor
11
Waste toner sensor
12
Home position sensor
GHP1/
GHP2
13
Cleaning roller sensor
PS 5
14
Temperature sensor
for fusing unit
15
Paper full sensor
PS 6
The sensor to detect when the paper
eject tray is full of paper.
16
Toner key sensor
TNK
The sensor to detect the key provided
in the toner cartridge.
TPD/TTR
WTS
TH
4-35
Photo sensor to detect if the toner is
empty for each toner cartridge.
Photo sensor to detect if the waste
toner bottle is full of toner.
Photo sensor to detect the position of
the toner cartridge.
Photo sensor to detect if the fuser
cleaner is fitted in the fixing unit.
Thermistor to detect the fuser
temperature.
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Layout of Sensors
14. Temperature sensor
(Thermistor to detect)
3. Paper exit sensor
13. Cleaning roller sensor
7. Drum jam sensor
15. Paper full sensor
10. Toner sensor
5. Oil sensor
9. Belt sensor
8. Drum encoder sensor
12. Home position sensor
6. OHP sensor
11. Waste toner sensor
2. Paper feeding sensor
4. Paper empty sensor
1. Paper size sensor
16. Toner key sensor
Fig. 4-32
4-36
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2.2
Control System - Control of the Print Process
A Micro CPU mounted on the MCTL PWB controls the print processes.
<Print Sequence Diagram>
Control
Panel
Main
Motor
Cooling
Fan
Cooling
Fan
Scanner
Motor
DM
Host Computer
Belt
Sensor
Drum
Sensor
ATC (4 pcs.)
LDU
Y
M
C
PD
K
MCTL (Engine Controller)
I/F
Controller
I/F
Sequence Control
Control
Laser Control
Temperature Control
Video
Controller
Toner Connection Control
CPU
Control Panel Control
Error Clearance Program
Cleaning Roller
Sensor
High Voltage Unit
Oil Sensor
Fusing Unit
DC Power
Supply Unit
Interlock Switches
Fig. 4-33
4-37
Paper Empty Sensor
Drum Encoder
Paper Feed Sensor
Belt Sensor
Toner Empty Sensor
Oil Sensor
Paper Size Sensor
Paper Full Sensor
Paper Exit Sensor
Waste Toner Sensor
OHP Sensor
Toner Key Sensor
Drum Jam Sensor
Developer Sensor
Cleaning Roller Sensor
Temperature Sensor
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
(1)
Control Block Diagram (Refer to Fig.4-33.)
No.
Name
Function
1
Sequence Control
To control the sequence of printer
operations.
2
Temperature Control
To control the temperature of the fixing
unit.
3
Toner Empty Sensing Control
To detect the toner empty status of each
toner cartridge.
4
Control Panel Control
To control the control panel indications
and the operational signals.
5
Error Processing Control
To sense errors occurring in the printer
and control the stop procedures.
6
Interface Control
To control the receipt and transmission of
the interface signals from the external
controller.
7
Laser Control
To control laser scanning and laser power.
4-38
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(2)
Laser Drive Control Circuit
Laser Drive Control Circuit (LDC) consists of the video signal input circuit, laser drive
circuit, laser diode, output sensing circuit and output control circuit, as shown in Fig.434.
<Operation>
(1) When the video signal is received, the laser drive control circuit switches the laser
diode according to the video signal data.
(2) The radiated laser beam is sensed by the photo detector (PD) and the signal is fed
back to the output control circuit.
(3) The output control circuit controls the laser output to make the level constant by
comparing the laser output with the feed-back value transmitted from the output
sensing circuit.
(4) The scanning laser beam is sensed by the beam detector (PD), then the beam
detecting timing (BDT) signal is output.
MCTL PWB
OPC Belt
PRINT Signal
Frequency Control
Circuit
Scanner Lens
PD
Scanner Motor
Laser
Beam Scanning
Control Circuit
Synchronizie
Control Circuit
BDT
LDC PCB
VIDEO Signal
Fig. 4-34
4-39
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
(3)
Control of the Fusing Temperature
Each roller of the fusing unit is controlled to maintain the appropriate temperature so
that toner will be fixed correctly onto the print paper.
<Basic Structure of Temperature Control (Fig.4-36)>
FLS:
Thyristor to switch the power supply to the heat lamp.
TFU1/TFU2:
Temperature fuse to shut down the circuit for safety when the
temperature becomes too hot within the fixing unit.
TH:
Temperature sensor to detect the surface temperature of the
heat roller (HR).
RY:
Relay to prevent further heating when it becomes hotter than
the set temperature within the fixing unit.
GA/CPU:
Process circuit to control the temperature signal (micro
computer).
CM1:
Sensor circuit for temperature signal (for ACOFF signal).
CM2:
Sensor circuit for temperature signal (for HON signal).
CM3:
Sensor circuit for temperature signal (for processing).
Q:
Sensor circuit for shut-down by the thermistor (for THERR
signal).
HR:
Heat lamp for the heat roller.
BR:
Heat lamp for the back-up roller.
< Signal Functions >
HON-N
To turn on/off the heater inside the fuser roller.
ACOFF
To turn off the relay RY1 if overheat occurs.
THERR
To detect the shut-down by the thermistor.
AD
To convert the temperature sensing signal to AD.
<Controlled Temperature and Safety>
TPS
TA
Temperature
( C)
150 C TS
Time
Fig. 4-35
4-40
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
<Basic Structure of Fuser Control>
RY-1
ACOFF-P
RY-1
AD
CM3
PC
FLS
HON-N
Fusing Unit
CM2
TFU1 TFU2
CM1
BR
Q
THERR ACOFF HON
GA/CPU
Fig. 4-36
4-41
HR
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
TS:
To maintain the temperature for fixing of the toner at 150qC by
turning the thyristor on and off.
TA:
Reference temperature ( approx. 185qC) to identify that it is
excessively hot inside the fusing unit. When it reaches this
point, the relay RY turns off, the power supply to the heat lamp
is shut down and the printer stops operating.
TPS:
Limit temperature when the thermal fuse will start to melt and
shut down the power supply to the heat lamp if the temperature
control circuit should break down. When the thermal fuse
melts, the printer will stop operating.
<Safety Control by Temperature Control Signal>
H0:
When the THERR signal is input, the control panel indicates
“H0”, and the printer will stop operating.
H2:
If the temperature of the fixing unit does not reach the required
point “T1” after a certain time, the control panel indicates “H2”
and the printer will stop operating.
H3:
If the “Heater On” signal still continues after a certain time, the
control panel indicates “H3”, and the printer will stop operating.
H4:
If the temperature within the fusing unit becomes unusually hot
and when ACOFF signal is input, the control panel indicates
“H4”, and the printer will stop operating.
4-42
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(4)
Interface Control
<General>
(a)
Interface Type
The video interface handles laser image data that corresponds to dots for printing but
does not store image data in a buffer. The video data signals of the input image data
switches the semiconductor laser diode to form a print image.
(b)
Interface Connection
Video Interface /
DC Power Supply Connector
Operator
Panel
Duplex unit
(Option)
Lower Tray(1)
Unit (Option)
Laser Printer
Controller
(LPC)
Printer
Engine
Controller
Host
System
[Customer design]
DC Power Supply
LowerTray(2)
Unit (Option)
Fig. 4-37
The interface connector of this laser printer is connected to the host system as shown
in Fig.4-37.
4-43
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
(c)
Interface Circuit (Printer side)
Table 4-1: Interface Circuit
No.
Interface Circuit
Signal Name
1
2
3
4
4-44
x
VIDEO-N
x
VIDEO-P
x
HSYNC-N
x
HSYNC-P
x
PRREQ-N
x
COMMAND-N
x
ID1-N
x
ID2-N
x
VSYNC-N
x
IREADY-N
x
STATUS-N
x
KEY-STATUS-N
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(d)
Connector Pin Assignment
The connector in the printer to connect to the controller board is type 128A-064S2BL14A(DDK) or the equivalent.
Table 4-2: Connector Pin Assignment
Pin No.
Signal Name
Pin No.
Signal Name
1A
PSGND
1B
+5V
2A
PSGND
2B
+5V
3A
PSGND
3B
+5V-D
4A
PSGND
4B
+5V-D
5
PSGND
5B
+5V-D
6A
PSGND
6B
+5V-D
7A
PSGND
7B
+5V-D
8A
PSGND
8B
+5V-D
9A
VIDEO-P
9B
VIDEO-N
10A
RET (GND)
10B
Reserve
11A
HSYNC-P
11B
HSYNC-N
12A
ID2-N
12B
Reserve
13A
RET (GND)
13B
VSYNC-N
14A
RET (GND)
14B
Reserve
15A
RET (GND)
15B
STATUS
16A
RET (GND)
16B
IREADY-N
17A
RET (GND)
17B
Reserve
18A
RET (GND)
18B
COMMAND
19A
RET (GND)
19B
PRREQ-N
20A
RET (GND)
20B
Reserve
21A
ID1-N
21B
Reserve
22A
RET (GND)
22B
KEY_STATUS-N
23A
Reserve
23B
Reserve
24A
Reserve
24B
Reserve
25A
RET (GND)
25B
Reserve
26A
RET (GND)
26B
Reserve
27A
RET (GND)
27B
Reserve
28A
RET (GND)
28B
Reserve
29A
RET (GND)
29B
Reserve
30A
RET (GND)
30B
Reserve
31A
RET (GND)
31B
Reserve
32A
RET (GND)
32B
Reserve
4-45
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
2.3
Main PCB (Video Controller PCB)
2.3.1
Outline
The main PCB consists of the circuits which perform the following functions;
x
Receive the printing data from the computer.
x
Convert the received data to the bitmap data such as characters or graphics.
x
Control the engine and send the generated bitmap data as a video signal.
The control panel is controlled by communicating with the engine CPU to display LCD
messages, light the LEDs and display the button status, etc.
The power for the Main PCB is supplied from the engine through the engine interface
connector.
4-46
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
<Main PCB Block Diagram>
+3.3v / +1.65v
+5v
Regurator
PQ30RV31
+3.3v
Regurator
PQ070XZ01Z
+3.3v
CPU
TMPR4955-266
(TX4955 266MHz)
+1.65v
+5v
+5v/+3.3v
Clock
Generator
C8750
66MHz(CPU,SDRAM)
33MHz(PCI)
48MHZ(GA)
+3.3v
SLOT2
SLOT1
SLOT0
CPU-Address/Data MultiBUS
CDCC I/F
DIMM
(100pin)
3slots
348MB MAX
+3.3v
RJ45
10/100Base-TX
CS,DQM
PCI-BUS
Network Board
NC-4100
RAS,CAS
WE,MA
USB
LCX16347
Data BUS
+5v/+3.3v
LCX16245
Local Data BUS
ASIC
MB87F4561
+3.3v
+5v
IDE Data BUS
IDE
HARD DISK
+5v
Compact Flash
HCT245
+3.3v
MASK
ROM
32M x2
(8MB)
Gate Array
SLAC099HF1A
Flash
ROM
32M x2
(8MB)
Address BUS
SN75C1168
CompactFlash Data BUS
HCT245
Hsync
Video
Command,PrReq
+5v
EEPROM
M24C64
64kbit
Vsync,Status,Iready,KeyStatus
Address BUS
+5v
GND
4-47
ENGINE I/F
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
2.3.2
Circuit
(1)
CPU block
x
Model name:
TMPR4955-266MHz
MiPS 64 bits RISC CPU manufactured by TOSHIBA
x
Clock speed:
66.7MHz (external) / 266MHz (internal)
x
Cache memory: 32KB (Command cache) / 32KB (Data cache)
x
Bus width:
32 bits (external) / 64 bits (internal),
Floating point unit (FPU) incorporated
x
Appearance:
160-pin QFP
(2)
ASIC block
x
Model name:
MF87F4561 manufactured by Fujitsu
x
Appearance:
420-pin BGA
x
Functions:
(3)
Controls CPU
Controls memory
Controls interrupts
Timer
External interfaces (Centronics, BR-NET, iDE, Compact Flash, USB)
Engine interface (Video signal control)
Supports Software
Gate array block
x Model name:
SLAC099H1A manufactured by Epson
x Appearance:
160-pin QFP
x Functions:
Engine control
(4)
ROM block
The ROM stores the CPU control program and font data. ROMs used are an 8Mbytes
masked ROM, and a 8 Mbytes flash ROM which can be rewritten on the board.
<Masked ROM>
x Access time:
less than 100nsec. (Page access less than 30nsec.)
x Appearance:
<Flash ROM>
48-pin TSOP
x Model name:
MBM29DL32BD-90 manufactured Fujitsu
x Access time:
less than 90nsec.
x Appearance:
48-pin TSOP
4-48
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(5)
DIMM block
DIMM (Dual-Inline-Memory-Module) allows memory extension by up to 128MB in each
socket. 3 DIMM sockets are available.
The following type of DIMM can be installed into each slot.
x
x
x
x
x
Appearance:
Memory type:
Access time:
Parity:
Memory capacity:
100-pin
SDRAM
66MHz or more, CL=2
either Parity or Non-parity can be used
16MB, 32MB, 64MB, 128MB
<Recommended DIMM type>
<US>
x 16 Megabytes
TECHWORKS
12456-0001
x 32 Megabytes
TECHWORKS
12457-0001
x 64 Megabytes
TECHWORKS
12458-0001
TECHWORKS
12459-0001
x 16 Megabytes
BUFFALO TECHNOLOGY
12323-0001
x 32 Megabytes
BUFFALO TECHNOLOGY
12324-0001
x 64 Megabytes
BUFFALO TECHNOLOGY
12325-0001
x 128 Megabytes
<Europe>
BUFFALO TECHNOLOGY
12326-0001
x 128 Megabytes
Any combination of DIMM size can be installed into any slot in any order.
(6)
External interface block
x Centronics Interface
x Universal Serial Bus (USB)
x Compact Flash
x Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX
x IDE Interface
(7)
Engine interface block
The engine interface consists of the following signals;
<IREADY>
The signal indicating the engine is ready
<PRREQ>
Signal requesting printing from the controller
<KEY_STATUS>
Signal indicating that a key switch status on the control panel has changed.
<VSYNC>
Vertical synchronization signal for printing
<HSYNC>
Horizontal synchronization signal for printing
<VIDEO>
Video data signal
<COMMAND>
Command signal sent from the controller to the engine
<STATUS>
Status signal sent from the engine to the controller
4-49
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Fig.4-38 shows the timing of each signal after the power switch is turned on.
Power On
210s MAX.
IREADY-N
PRREQ-N
1.0sec. MAX.
0.1sec. MIN.
15sec. MAX.
3.75s
3.0sec. MAX. for Continuous Printing
VSYNC-N
(K) data
VIDEO-P
VSYNC-N
15us MIN.
10ms MAX.
(M) data
(C) data
(Y) data
417.781us
HSYNC-N
56.296ns
1st line
VIDEO-P
2nd line
1dot
Last line
Fig. 4-38
The COMMAND signal and STATUS signal are the signals that are used to transfer the data
between the controller and the engine, which perform as a half-duplex asynchronous serial
communication. Refer to Fig.4-39.
6WRS ELW
3DULW\ ELW
6WDUW ELW
&200$1'
P
LSB
MSB
8ms (TYP)
67$786
30ms (MAX)
LSB
MSB
P
6WDUW ELW
3DULW\ ELW
6WRS ELW
Fig. 4-39
NOTE:
x Based on “Asynchronous Communication” method.
x Command/Status communication must keep the “Handshake Rule”.
x Baud rate is 9600 bps.
x Frame format: - one (1) start bit,
- eight (8) data bits
(Start bit side is LSB, Parity bit is MSB),
- one (1) odd parity bit,
- one (1) stop bit.
x The video controller has to send an “Initialize Command” to the engine controller after
power on in order to establish communication.
The power for the Main PCB is supplied through the engine interface connector.
4-50
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Main PCB Circuit Diagram (1/8)
4-51
CODE
LJ8907001
NAME
B512137CIR (1/8)
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Main PCB Circuit Diagram (2/8)
4-52
CODE
LJ8907001
NAME
B512137CIR (2/8)
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Main PCB Circuit Diagram (3/8)
4-53
CODE
LJ8907001
NAME
B512137CIR (3/8)
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Main PCB Circuit Diagram (4/8)
4-54
CODE
LJ8907001
NAME
B512137CIR (4/8)
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Main PCB Circuit Diagram (5/8)
4-55
CODE
LJ8907001
NAME
B512137CIR (5/8)
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Main PCB Circuit Diagram (6/8)
4-56
CODE
LJ8907001
NAME
B512137CIR (6/8)
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Main PCB Circuit Diagram (7/8)
4-57
CODE
LJ8907001
NAME
B512137CIR (7/8)
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Main PCB Circuit Diagram (8/8)
4-58
CODE
LJ8907001
NAME
B512137CIR (8/8)
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Network Board PCB Circuit Diagram
4-59
CODE
LJ8107001
NAME
B512058CIR
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
2.4
Low-voltage Power Supply Unit
(1)
Outputs and Use
Output Terminal
Rated Output
+5V-1
+5V-1R
For control of the printer
4.8 a 5.3V, 8.5A
For control of the laser
+5V-2
+24V-1
(2)
Use
For control of the interface (7A Max.)
+24V, 6.5A
For control of printer charging.
HP
120V, 8A
For connection of the fuser heater (HP).
HN
220V, 5A
For connection of the fuser heater (HN).
Layout of Connector Pin Assignment
See Fig.4-41 on the following page.
4-60
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
ACN1
TAB2
ACN3
ACN4
HP
TAB1
ACN2
ACN5
HN
Power Switch
Inlet
Black
White
Fig. 4-40
4-61
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
(3)
Connector Pin Assignment
ACN1
MoLex: 53313-2815
Pin # Signal Name
1
+5V-1
3
+5V-1
5
+5V-D
7
+5V-D
9
ACSYNC-N
11
+24V
13
+5V-1R
15
HON-N
17
+24V-1
19
+24V-1
21
+24V-1
23
+24V-1
25
PGND
27
PGND
ACN1
MoLex: 53324-0710
Pin # Signal Name
1
+5V-1
2
+5V-D
3
SGND
4
+24V-2
5
+24V-2
6
PGND
7
PGND
Interface
+5V-1 Output
+5V-1 Output
+5V-D Output
+5V-D Output
AC Zero-Cross Signal (Open Collector Output)
+24V Output Corresponding to Door Switch
+5V through the relay when +24V-1 is shut down.
Heater On Signal (Pull-up required)
+24V Output through Door Switch
+24V Output through Door Switch
+24V Output through Door Switch
+24V Output through Door Switch
Power Ground (+24V type ground)
Power Ground (+24V type ground)
Interface
+5V-1 Output
+5V-D Output
Signal Ground (+5V type ground)
+24V-2 Output
+24V-2 Output
Power Ground (+24V type ground)
Power Ground (+24V type ground)
Pin # Signal Name
2
DCOFF2-P
4
SGND
6
SGND
8
SGND
10
SGND
12
DCOFF1-P
14
ACOFF-P
16
TESTI2
18
TESTO2
20
TESTI1
22
TESTO1
24
PGND
26
PGND
28
PGND
ACN1
MoLex: 5277-02A
Pin # Signal Name
1
DSW-O
2
DSW-I
ACN3
MoLex: 5566-06A
Pin # Signal Name
1
+5V-2
2
+5V-2D
3
+5V-2D
4
SGND
5
SGND
6
SGND
4-62
Interface
+5V-2D OFF Signal
Signal Ground (+5V type ground)
Signal Ground (+5V type ground)
Signal Ground (+5V type ground)
Signal Ground (+5V type ground)
OFF Signal (Pull-up required)
AC Forced Shut-down Signal (Pull-up required)
Terminal for Dielectric Strength Test
Terminal for Dielectric Strength Test
Terminal for Dielectric Strength Test
Terminal for Dielectric Strength Test
Power Ground (+24V type ground)
Power Ground (+24V type ground)
Power Ground (+24V type ground)
Interface
+24V Output through Door switch
+24V Output through Door switch
Interface
+5V-2 Output
+5V-2D Output
+5V-2D Output
Signal Ground (+5V type ground)
Signal Ground (+5V type ground)
Signal Ground (+5V type ground)
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
High-voltage Power Supply Unit
(1)
Outputs and Function
No.
Function
P/S Name
Approx. Output Voltage
Charging
CHV (-)
(4.6KV) 600µA
2
First transfer
CBV (-)
200V a 900V
3
Developing
Y, M
DBV (-A)
200V a 400V
bias
C, K
DBV (-B)
200V a 400V
4
Second transfer
THV (+)
400V a 3,000V
5
Transfer roller cleaning
THV (-)
600V
6
Paper discharging
ACV (a)
4.9KV
DCV (+)
400V
FCBV
200V a 1,000V
7
(2)
Power Supply (P/S)
1
Drum cleaning
Layout of Connector Pin Assignment
See Fig.4-42 below;
CHV
D708
T701
DBV
(K)
FCBV
D301
17
D400
D405
2 BCN1
18
T401
Fig. 4-41
4-63
M
D805
BCN2
1
D701
E D401
T702
D805
HC801
D803
THVR
D404
D502 D201
IP101
1
D802
S
D803
D801
E
D707
ZD701
D703
THVT
HC101
IC001 D001
D401
D503
D802
3
N38
D204
HC201
D200
IC801
IC701
D208
N38
D801
VREF
IC801
D701
S
D802
D102
D403
VR701
VR001
D202
IP001
T201
IC101
D402
D302
VR301
DBVM/C
D203
VR201
D303
DBVK/Y
(Y)
IC201
T801
HC801
D204
CHV
D004
D101
3
IC102
DBV
C805
D803
D704
3
D305
D501
3
D103
(M)
AC
D703
VR101
HC401
DBV
D304
E
C101
D301
D502
E
D001
D705
VR802
T301
D504
T802
D804
3
T501
T801
D805
D308
D506
(C)
D508
ZD001
CBV ZD1
DBV
THV
T101
ZD002
ZD003
D201
2.5
ACV
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
(3)
Connector Pin Assignment
BCN1
MoLex: 53313-1815
Pin #
Signal Name
Interface
1
+24V-1
+24V-1
3
FUCHK
5
Pin #
Signal Name
Interface
2
PGND
PGND
Sensor Signal of Fuser Unit Installation
4
PGND
PGND
ACVON-N
AC Output ON Signal
6
PWMON-N
PCB Control ON Signal
7
CHVON-ON
CHV Output ON Signal
8
CHVERR
CHV ERROR Sensor Signal
9
CBVPWM-N
CBV PCB Control Signal
10
THVRON-N
THV ON Signal
11
DBVYMPWMN
DBV PCB Control Signal
12
THVPWM-N
THV PCB Control ON Signal
13
DBVCKPWMN
CBV PCB Control Signal
14
THV-I
Transfer Voltage Select Signal
15
FCBVPWM-N
FCBV PCB Control Signal
16
TH1
Thermistor Temperature Sensor Signal
17
NC
NC
18
TH2
Thermistor Temperature Sensor Signal
BCN2
MoLex: 53324-0410
Pin #
Signal Name
Interface
1
TH1
Thermistor1
2
TH2
Thermistor2
3
FUCHK
Fuser Check
4
FUCHKGND
GND
4-64
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2.6
Connection Diagram
IOD1 PWB
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
LOWER TRAY UNIT
To IOD2 ECN2
29
1
10
DCN10
26
DCN8
8
9
2
IC7
NJM2903D
IC8
LS151
1
11
DCN7
1
8
1
IC4
LS151
7
1
16
DCN6
1
8
9
7
1
DCN5
3
IC6
NJM2901N
Paper
PEL2 Empty Sensor
13
DCN4
9
8
2J84D9733A
F1
1
M54523P
4
IC5
DCN3
1
16
3
1
27
28
DHOZA5 5
C7
C2
DCN17
DCN2
Paper Feeding Clutch
PKCL
Paper Pick-up Clutch
CN DUP
37
1
2
DCN1
FDCL
Interlock Switch
50
49
2
1
DCN18
Paper
PSL2 Size Sensor
Paper
Empty Sensor
Paper
PS1 Feeding Sensor
Drum
PS4 Encoder Sensor
Duplex
Unit
1
S-Charger
Paper Discharger
1
10
CTFAN
3
Control Fan
DBV(C)
CBV
OHP2 OHP Sensor
1
14
1
16
8
IC3
LS151
18
2
HIGH VOLTAGE
CAUTION
ZDI
CHV
[LFU2]
IOD3(2)
8
9
IC2
LS151
1
16
17
1
2
CBV
CHV
THV
THV
Paper
PSU Size Sensor
Interlock Switch (Top)
Interlock Switch (Back)
8
9
IC1
LS151
16
1
OIL
Paper Pick-up Clutch
4
5
1
16
8
9
9
10
1 DCN13
3
9
PBS
DCN16
Belt Sensor
1
4
BUKMBA103H
A
Lot
Lot No.
No.
MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC
DBVM/C
C3
THVR
THVT
PKCL
7
C9
BCN2
1
DPJ
DBV(M)
6
4
PS3
C12
MODEL
13
Drum Jam
Sensor
Oil Sensor
Paper Feeding Clutch
OHP OHP Sensor
C28
HVPS
Paper
Size Sensor
Interlock Switch
12
DCN14
1
38
*
DCN15
TNK
1
Toner Key
Sensor
C14
PS2
DBV(Y)
AC
TTR Toner Sensor
1
TR2
C458
Paper Exit
Sensor
Paper
Empty Sensor
PSL
1
8
BCB
DBVK/Y
PS5
C17
34
PS6
PEL
FDCL
C32
DBV(K)
TPD Toner Sensor
2
C24
2
1
BON1
FCBV
9
BCB
18
17
FOBV
Erase Lamp
C10
TR
C458
Heater Fan
Paper Full
Sensor
Cleaning Roller
Sensor
1
CCN2 6
CCN5
CCN4
1
4
11
BCB
TR3
A673
2
12
OHP1 OHP Sensor
11
25
9
DCN9
HTFAN
CCN3 13
DM Developer
Motor
1
30
HIGH-VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
[LFU1]
IOD3(1)
CCN1
6
A B C D
E F G H
5
FUSING UNIT
36
DUP CN
34
35
30
Thermistor
50
FB3
DH5ZA51
3
24
BL
10
3
M54523P
1
7
1
8
14
8
08
9
16
9
1 IC3
BK
3
M54523P
EC
N1
23
3
1
8
18
9
21
22
1
PDU
PCB
ECN3
1
DCN5
(Back)
ECN4
11 1
DSW3
22
19
27
GHP
1
Fig. 4-42
4-65
3
DHOZA5 4
GHP
2
PSL
(MC)
PSL
(KY)
Home Home
Developer
Position Position Cam Clutch Unit
Sensor 1Sensor 2
LCD PCB
1
2J84D9735A
6
LDU PCB
Inter lock Switch
ECN5
3
10
To IOD1
DCN10
4
BK
N2
PANEL PWB
EC
LOW-VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
9
F2
1 IC2
2
SCM
Scanner
Motor
Font
DSW2
26
1
5
ECN8
4
4
1
8
14
(Top)
3
ECN9
F3
LASER UNIT
AC IN PUT
1
ECN10
C
1
PANEL PWB
DSW1
4
11
1
1
ECN15
Wast Toner
TBFL
Sensor (TR)
HN
35
3
ECN11
TRSOL T R C a m
Clutch
1
MCTL PWB
1
8
ECN6
ACN2
user
FUCL F
Clutch
9
1 IC11 M54523P
ECN7
11
B
32
33
1
K
10
3
2
K
NC C
C6
Wast Toner
Sensor (LED) TBLE
22
35V
1 4
S-93C56A
ACN3
1
FBSOL Cleaner Cam
Clutch
20
9
ECN13
Y
M
1
F1
15
A 10
5
1
C111
8
D5
F
G
C9
X2
4
1
MB3771 14.7456MHz
100A
D 16V
5
E
8
2.2
50V
J
1
32
3
1
9
H
10
11
4
3
IC18
1
ECN14
Developer DCLC
Clutch C
31
LCN
1B
1A
1C15
F244
6
IC19
3
3
1
20
1
25
ECN12
33
IC16
HD6473297P/HD6433297P
POCN
Cleaner
FBCL Clutch
16
1
8
2 20
2
64
Developer
Clutch M DCLM
To Duplex Unit
ECN16
I2CN 3
1 19
8
1
8
8
7
8
7
7
1C13
LS06
OSC1
54.7830MHz
1
36
21
17
Developer
Clutch Y DCLY
1
3
4
Developer
Clutch K DCLK
14
1
22
RA2
1
14
IC14
M5M34050
16
9
18
28
45
44
1
8
7
7
5
4
DPCN
14
18
6
8
2
100A
1C8
16V
LV05
1
1
7 C11211 17
6
RA7
5
8
14
22
A NC A NC A NC
35V
1C20
LV14
IC6 C5
K
K
1
4 D2K D3 D4 RA6 1
5 IC9
8
NJM
14
2904M
1C12
X1 19.71978
1
4
LV05
IC5 NJM2903M MHz
100
HA178
LISUATL
A NC
D1
K
C3
8
8
22
35V
7
8
7
2 2J84D9922A
FB1
1C2
LS06
1C3
LV05
RA1
8
1C11
LV14
176
E
B
MM
1
1
14
14
C
21
FB2
I3CN
C1
1
14
7
1
IFCN
8 14
7
RA5
ACN1
1
1C4
LV05
IC10
MBCG46533
1C7
LV14
ACN4
HP
IC1 NJM2903M
5
1
1
14
32
37
8
RA3
RA4
To Duplex Unit
132
133
1
9
49
TR1
C E
B
C E
B
TR2
1
2
1
Controller
PCB
1
HP
RA29
TFU 1
4
PACN
HN
TFU 2
HN
1
32B
32A
HP
Fuser Connector
C4
15
6
C2 16
100A
16V
BR.Heater
5
E
C B
TR5
100A
16V TR3
I1CN
HR.Heater
4 4
IOD2 PWB
2
1
100A
16V
HN
Main
Motor
10
2
4
TH
3
ECN17
1 1
2
1
HP
PCLU
OZFAN
1
Paper Ozone
Feeding Fan
Clutch
RECL R e g i s t r a t i o n
Clutch
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
(1)
Symbol and Parts Name
Symbol
Parts Name
Symbol
Parts Name
LVPS
Low-voltage power supply unit
IOD1
IOD1 PWB
DSW1
Interlock switch (Front)
OHP
OHP sensor
DSW2
Interlock switch (Top)
PEU (PS3)
Paper empty sensor
DSW3
Interlock switch (Back)
PT1 (PS1)
Paper feeding sensor
FUSER Unit
Fusing unit
EN (PS4)
Drum encoder sensor
TH
Thermistor
Erase Lamp
Erase lamp
HR
Heat roller
TDP / TTR
Toner sensor
BR
Back-up roller
TNK
Toner key sensor
TFU1 / TFU2
Thermal fuse
PSU
Paper size sensor
High-voltage power supply unit
PFUL (PS6)
Paper full sensor
MCTL
MCTL PWB
CSR (PS5)
Cleaning roller sensor
PANEL
Panel PWB
PT2 (PS2)
Paper exit sensor
LCD
LCD PWB
DPJ
Drum jam sensor
Scanner Unit (Optical unit)
OIL
Oil sensor
SCM
Scanner motor
BPS
Belt sensor
PDU
PDL PCB
TBLE / TBFL
LDU
LDU PCB
IOD2
IOD2 PWB
MM
Main motor
IOD3
IOD3 PWB
DM
Developer drive motor
FBCM
Cleaning cam clutch
FUFAN (EX)
fuser fan motor
TRCM
TR cam clutch
CTFAN (PS)
Control fan motor
LFU
Lower tray unit
OZFAN (OZ)
Ozone fan motor
PCLU
Paper feeding clutch
DVLK/DVLY/
DVLM/DVLC
Developer clutch (K.Y.M.C)
PSL(MC) /
PSL (KY)
Developer cam clutch
HVU
Scanner Unit
FUCL
Fuser clutch
FBCL
Cleaning clutch
RECL
4-66
Waste toner sensor
Registration clutch
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(2)
Connector Pin Assignment
1) DCN2: IOD1 PWB - Power Supply Unit ACN1 (28 pins)
Pin No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
Signal
+5v - 1
+5v - 1
+5v - D
+5v - D
ACSYNC - N
+24
+5v - 1R
HON - N
+24v - 1
+24v - 1
+24v - 1
+24v - 1
PGND
PGND
Pin No.
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
Signal
DCOFF2-P
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
DCOFF1 - P
ACOFF - P
TESTI2
TESTO2
TESTI1
TESTO1
PGND
PGND
PGND
2) DCN17: IOD1 PWB - High Voltage Unit (18 pins)
Pin No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
Signal
+24v - 1
FUTEMP
ACVON - N
CHVON - N
CBVPWM - N
DBV (MC) PWM - N
DBV (KY) PWM - N
FCBVPWM - N
AC_DCON-N
Pin No.
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
3) DCN3: For Factory Use Only (4 pins)
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Signal
TESTO1
TESTI1
TESTO2
TESTI1
4) DCN5: IOD1 PWB
Pin No.
1
2
3
Signal
REARDOPEN - P
NC
TOPDOPEN - P
4-67
Signal
PGND
PGND
PWMON - N
CHVERR
THVRON - N
THVPWM - N
THV - I
TH1
TH2
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
5) DCN1: MCTL PWB - IOD1 PWB (50 pins)
Pin No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
Signal
I/OAD2
I/OAD1
I/OAD0
I/ODATA3
I/ODATA2
I/ODATA1
I/ODATA0
LEDON-N
DMRDY-N
I/ODATA4 (REVI1)
PKCLL2ON-P
AC_DCON-N
PKCLL1ON-P
ELON-P
PBSEN-N
HPSEN-N
CTFANON-P
HTFANON-P
+5v-1R
SGND
SGND
SGND
+5v-1
+5v-1
+5v-1D
Pin No.
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
6) ECN2: IOD1 PWB - IOD2 PWB (10 pins)
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Signal
+24v-1
+24v-1
+24v-1
PGND
PGND
PGND
+5v-1
SGND
SGND
+5v-D
Signal
DMON-N
DCOFF1-P
DMCLK
ACVON-N
CHVON-N
PWMON-N
CBVPWM-N
DVB (MC) PWM-N
DBV (KY) PWM-N
FCBVPWM-N
THVRON-N
THVPWM-N
THV-I
TH2
TH1
OILLES-P
FUTEMP
HON-N
ACOFF-P
ACSYNC-N
+24
PGND
PGND
+24v-1
+24v-1
7) DCN4: IOD1 - Paper Empty Sensor
IOD1 - Paper Feeding Sensor
IOD1 - Drum Encoder Sensor
IOD1 - OHP Sensor
Pin No.
Signal
1 +5v-D
2 HPSEN - N
3 SGND
4 +5v-D
5 PT1 - N
6 SGND
7 +5v-D
8 PEU-P
9 SGND
10 +5v-D
11 OHPSENU
12 SGND
13 SGND
4-68
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
8) DCN6: IOD1 - Paper Size Sensor
Pin No.
Signal
1 +5v-D
2 PSU1
3 PSU2
4 PSU3
5 PSU4
6 PSU5
7 SGND
9) DCN7: IOD1 - Toner Sensor (Y, M, C, K)
Pin No.
Signal
1 TLES (K)-P
2 TLES (Y)-P
3 TLES (M)-P
4 TLES(C)-P
5 TLES-G
6 SGND
7 LEDON-P
8 TLESCHK
9 SGND
10 +24v-1
11 ELON-N
10) DCN18: IOD1 - Control Fan
Pin No.
Signal
1 CTFANON-P
2 PGND
3 CTFANERR
11) DCN8: IOD1 - Lower Tray Unit
Pin No.
Signal
1 +24v-1
2 PKCLLON-N
3 FDCLL1ON-N
4 PSL1
5 PSL2
6 PSL3
7 PSCST1
8 PEL1-P
9 OCST1-N
10 OHPSENL1
11 +5v-D
12 SGND
13 CASTDOPEN-N
14 +24v-1
15 KCLL2ON-N
16 FDCLL2ON-N
17 PSL4
18 PSL5
19 PSL6
20 PSCST2
21 PEL2-P
22 OCST2-N
23 PHPSENL2
24 +5v-D
25 SGND
26 NC
13) DCN14: IOD1 - Fuser Fan
IOD1 - Paper Exit Sensor
IOD1 - Cleaning Roller Sensor
IOD1 - Paper Full Sensor
Pin No.
Signal
1 +5v-D
2 PT2-N
3 SGND
4 +5v-D
5 CLROL-N
6 SGND
7 +5v-D
8 PEFULL-N
9 SGND
10 HTFANON-P
11 PGND
12 HTFANERR
4-69
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
14) ECN1: MCTL PWB - IOD1 (22 pins)
Pin No.
Signal
1 DCL(C) ON-P
2 DCL (M) ON-P
3 DCL (Y) ON-P
4 DCL (K) ON-P
5 PSL (KY) ON-P
6 PSL (MC) ON-P
7 MMCLK
8 MMON-N
9 MMREV-N
10 MMENC
11 RECLON-P
12 AHUMB
13 ISCK
14 IDATA
15 ILOAD
16 FBCLON-P
17 FBSLON-P
18 TRSLON-P
19 OZFANON-P
20 FUCLON-P
21 PKCLU1ON-P
22 PKCLU2ON-P
18) ECN13: IOD2 - Developer Clutch (K)
Pin No.
Signal
1 +24v-1
2 NC
3 DCL (K) ON-N
19) ECN3: IOD2 - Home Position Sensor1
- Home Position Sensor2
- Developer Cam Clutch (YM)
- Developer Cam Clutch (CK)
Pin No.
Signal
1 +5v-D
2 GHPSEN1-N (MC)
3 SGND
4 +5v-D
5 GHPSEN2-N (KY)
6 SGND
7 PSL (MC) ON-N
8 +24v-1
9 +24v-1
10 PSL (KY) ON-N
11 NC
20) ECN9: IOD2 - Fuser Clutch
Pin No.
Signal
1 +24v-1
2 NC
3 FUCLON-N
15) ECN16: IOD2 - Developer Clutch (C)
Pin No.
Signal
1 +24v-1
2 NC
3 DCL(C) ON-N
21) ECN11: IOD2 - Cleaner Clutch
Pin No.
Signal
1 +24v-1
1 NC
2 FBCLON-N
16) ECN15: IOD2 - Developer Clutch (M)
Pin No.
Signal
1 +24v-1
2 NC
3 DCL (M) ON-N
22) ECN5: IOD2 - Ozone Fan
Pin No.
Signal
1 OZFANON-P
2 PGND
3 OZFANERR
(17) ECN14: IOD2 - Developer Clutch (Y)
Pin No.
Signal
1 +24v-1
2 NC
3 DCL (Y) ON-N
23) ECN6: IOD2 - Registration Clutch
Pin No.
Signal
1 +24v-1
2 NC
3 RECLON-N
4-70
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
24) ECN17: IOD2 - Waste Toner Sensor
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Signal
TBFL1-N
SGND
WTLEDON
SGND
25) ECN10: IOD2 - Cleaner Cam Clutch
Pin No.
Signal
1 +24v-1
2 NC
3 NC
4 FBSLON-N
26) ECN8: IOD2 - TR Cam Clutch
Pin No.
Signal
1 +24v-1
2 NC
3 NC
4 TRSLON-N
27) ECN4: IOD2 - Paper Feeding Clutch
Pin No.
Signal
1 +24v-1
2 NC
3 PKCLU1ON-N
28) ECN12: IOD2 - Main Motor
Pin No.
Signal
1 MMRDY-N
2 MMON-N
3 MMCLK
4 PGND
5 +24v-1
6 SGND
7 +5v-1
8 MMENC
9 MMREV-N
4-71
29) DCN9: IOD1 - Developer Drive Motor
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Signal
DMRDY-N
DMON-N
DMCLK
PGND
PGND
+24v-1
+24v-1
SGND
+5v-1
30) I3CN: MCTL I3CN - IOC1 DCN13
Pin No.
Signal
1 TMLEDON-P
2 TMASEN1
3 TMSOLON-P
4 TMASEN2
5 SIN2 (REVI2)
6 TMSOLERR
7 SOUT2 (REVO1)
8 DCOFF2-N (REVO2)
9 FDCLL1ON-P (REVO3)
10 FDCLL2ON-P (REV04)
31) LCN: MCTL LCN - LDU (20 pins)
Pin No.
Signal
1 +5v-1R
2 LDREF2
3 LDREF3
4 +5v-1
5 LDREF1
6 LDREF0
7 LREADY
8 LCONT2
9 LCONT1
10 VIDEO-P
11 VIDEO-N
12 BDT-P
13 BDT-N
14 SGND
15 SGND
16 SCMCLK
17 SCMRDY-N
18 SCMON-N
19 PGND
20 +24v-1
CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS
32) ACN3: LVPS ACN3 - MCTL POCN
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Signal
+5v-2
+5v-2D
+5v-2D
SGND
SGND
SGND
33) ACN2: LVPS - Interlock Switch
Pin No.
Signal
1 DSW-O
2 DSW-I
34) BCN2: HVPS BCN2 - Fusing Unit
Pin No.
Signal
1 TH1
2 TH2
3 FUTEMP
4 FUCHKGND
35) PACN: MCTL PACN - Panel (16 pins)
Pin No.
Signal
1 PAI/ODATA0
2 PAI/ODATA1
3 PAI/ODATA2
4 PAI/ODATA3
5 PAI/ODATA4
6 PAI/ODATA5
7 PAI/ODATA6
8 PAI/ODATA7
9 LCDRS
10 LCDE
11 PASWRDN
12 PALEDWRN
13 SGND
14 +5v-1
15 LCDBLED
16 NC
4-72
36)37) CNDUP: Printer - Duplex Unit
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Signal
D-COMMAND
SGND
DUMBUSY2-N
SGND
D-STATUS
SGND
+24VOFF-P
DUPCHK-N
DUMBUSY1-N
PT-1
DUPRES-N
SGND
NC
NC
PGND
PGND
+24v-2
+24v-2
+5v-1D
SGND
+5v-1
NC
NC
NC
38) DCN15: IOD1 - Toner Key Sensor
Pin No.
Signal
1 TONEROK-N
2 NC
3 SGND
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 5
CONTROL PANEL
OPERATION
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION ................................... 5-3
1. PANEL LAYOUT............................................................................................... 5-3
2. VIDEO CONTROLLER MODE.......................................................................... 5-4
2.1 Configuration of Operational Mode .......................................................................................... 5-4
2.2 Line Test Mode ........................................................................................................................ 5-5
2.3 DRAM Test Mode .................................................................................................................... 5-9
2.4 Test Print Mode...................................................................................................................... 5-10
2.5 NVRAM Reset Mode.............................................................................................................. 5-10
3. ENGINE CONTROLLER MODE ..................................................................... 5-11
3.1 Configuration of Operational Mode ........................................................................................ 5-11
3.2 Operation of Normal Mode..................................................................................................... 5-13
3.3 Service Mode ......................................................................................................................... 5-20
3.4 Adjustment Work Procedures ................................................................................................ 5-44
3.4.1 Adjustment of top and left margin.................................................................................... 5-44
3.4.2 Setting of engine NVRAM data ....................................................................................... 5-45
3.4.3 Confirmation and setting of total number of printouts...................................................... 5-46
3.4.4 Setting of number of images for each color..................................................................... 5-46
3.4.5 Initial setting of engine NVRAM....................................................................................... 5-47
5-2
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 5
1.
CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
PANEL LAYOUT
1
K
C
M
Y
3
2
Power
Ready
Data
5
4
6
7
Alarm
Job
Cancel
Go
8
9
10
Secure
Print
12
Menu
13
11
Reprint
Back
Set
Fig. 5-1
No.
LED / Button Name
1
LCD: 16 character by 2 lines
2
Power LED
3
Ready LED
4
Data LED
5
Go button
6
Job Cancel button
7
Alarm LED
8
Secure Print button
9
- button
10
+ button
11
Reprint button
12
Back button
13
Set button
5-3
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
2.
VIDEO CONTROLLER MODE
This section describes the operation and maintenance functions in the Video Controller
Mode.
2.1
Configuration of Operational Mode
This printer has various functions as set out in Table 5-1 for users to easily perform general
test printing, general settings and some maintenance work.
(1) Normal Mode:
After turning on the printer, the printer goes into Normal Mode.
This mode provides normal printing for the end user. The following
section describes the toner save mode and the power save mode.
For other modes, refer to the user’s guide.
(2) Line Test Mode:
This mode provides a self-test for each function in the Video
Controller Mode mainly for use when replacing the main (video
controller) PCB.
Whenever the video controller is replaced, these checks should be
carried out.
This mode provides performance tests for the engine LCD, control
panel buttons and various sensors.
(3) DRAM Test Mode: This mode is provided to test installed DIMM(s) on the main (video
controller) PCB.
(4) Test Print Mode:
This mode allows you to print the selected test pattern in order to
check the engine.
(5) NVRAM Reset Mode:
This mode forces the NVRAM values of the video controller to be
reset to the factory settings.
When replacing the main PCB, the NVRAM value is automatically
reset to the factory setting. However, this mode is effective when the
video controller does not work due to errors.
Table 5-1
Power on
Normal Mode
+ button + - button + Power on
Line Test Mode
Go button + + button + Power on
DRAM Test Mode
Press the –, + and Set buttons in
this order while holding down the
Go button.
Test Print Mode
Set button + Power on
NVRAM Reset Mode
5-4
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2.2
Line Test Mode
This mode tests the following items;
Item
Self-test Description
LCD TEST
Displays the checker pattern
LED TEST
Checks that all LEDs are on / off.
SW TEST
Checks that all buttons work correctly.
SENSOR TEST
Checks that all sensors work correctly.
RAM SIZE TEST
Displays the NVRAM size
TRAY 1 CHECK
Displays the paper size of the upper cassette
(Tray 1).
TRAY 2 CHECK
Displays the paper size of the lower cassette
(Tray 2).
FLASH CARD-R/W TEST
Checks the compact flash card.
<Procedure>
NOTE:
1)
x
It is possible to skip the test and proceed with the next test by pressing the Go
button.
x
If any errors occur during the following procedures, an error message appears on
the LCD. By pressing the Go button, it is possible to proceed with the test.
Turn on the power while holding down the + and – buttons. The following message
appears.
LINE TEST
2)
Press the Go button to implement the LCD TEST.
All columns of the LCD are turned on as shown below and also the LEDs are all turned
on.
Check that the LCDs are all displayed correctly and none of the dots have dropped.
Also, check that the LEDs are all on.
All of the LCDs are displayed at a time.
5-5
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
3)
Press the Go button to implement the SW TEST.
The following display appears on the LCD and the LEDs are all turned off.
Check that the LEDs are turned on and the corresponding number appears as follows
when pressing the buttons on the control panel in order.
Corresponding button number on the panel
XXXXXXXX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12345678
4)
Press the Go button to implement the SENSOR TEST.
The following display appears on the LCD.
Check that the display of each sensor is changed to the corresponding character.
Corresponding sensor code
$
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRST
)URQW &RYHU
%
7RS &RYHU
&
5HDU &RYHU 7UDQVIHU 8QLW
'
7RQHU &DUWULGJH .
(
7RQHU &DUWULGJH &
)
7RQHU &DUWULGJH 0
*
7RQHU &DUWULGJH <
+
23& %HOW &DUWULGJH
,
)XVHU &OHDQHU
-
)XVLQJ 8QLW
.
:DVWH 7RQHU
/
8SSHU &DVVHWWH
0
/RZHU &DVVHWWH
1
8SSHU &DVVHWWH 3DSHU
2
/RZHU &DVVHWWH 3DSHU
3
8SSHU &DVVHWWH 0HGLD
4
/RZHU &DVVHWWH 0HGLD
5
3DSHU 6HQVRU 6
3DSHU 6HQVRU 7
3DSHU 6HQVRU NOTE:
x
For the sensor of ‘Q’ for HL-3450CN, the display is not changed to ‘Q’ and stays .
5-6
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
5)
Press the Go button to implement the RAM SIZE CHECK.
The RAM size installed into the printer is displayed.
Check that the RAM size is correct.
RAM CHECK START
RAM SIZE = 64MB
6)
Press the Go button to implement the TRAY1 CHECK.
The paper size of the installed cassette 1 is displayed.
Check that the paper size is correct.
TRAY 1 CHK START
TRAY 1 =
A4
TRAY 1 = A4: A4 size cassette is installed.
TRAY 1 = LETTER: Letter size cassette is installed.
TRAY 1 = NO: No cassette is installed.
TRAY 1 = SIZE ERR: The paper size is other than A4 or Letter size.
7)
Press the Go button to implement the TRAY2 CHECK.
The paper size of the installed cassette 2 is displayed.
Check that the paper size is correct.
TRAY 2 CHK START
TRAY 2 =
A4
TRAY 2 = A4: A4 size cassette is installed.
TRAY 2 = LETTER: Letter size cassette is installed.
TRAY 2 = NO: No cassette is installed.
TRAY 2 = SIZE ERR: The paper size is other than A4 or Letter size.
5-7
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
8)
Press the Go button to implement the COMPACT FLASH - R/W TEST.
The reading/writing test of the compact flash card is implemented.
Check that no error occurs.
CARD R/W START
CARD R/W OK
CARD R/W OK: The compact flash card works correctly.
CARD R/W ERROR: The compact flash card has a problem.
NO FLASH CARD: The compact flash card is not installed.
9)
Press the Go button to exit the LINE TEST mode and reset the printer.
RAM SIZE =
64M
Now initializing
WARMINGUP
READY
10) Turn off the power.
5-8
When this message appears, the
printer may be turned off.
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2.3
DRAM Test Mode
This mode tests DIMMs installed on the main (video controller) PCB.
<Procedure>
1) To start the test program:
While holding down the Go button and + button, turn on the power. “DRAM CHECK
START” will be displayed. Press the Job Cancel button to start the DRAM check.
2) The LCD will display “START DRAM TEST”, and the Data LED blinks.
3) On satisfactory completion of all the RAM tests, the LCD will display: “DRAM OK!!”,
and the Alarm LED is on.
4) If any DRAM error has occurred, the LCD will display a fail message as follows;
RAM Address
WRITE data
READ data
5) Enter the hidden menu mode as follows to confirm the current memory map;
i)
Press the -, + and Set buttons in this order while holding down the Go button.
ii) The LCD will display “HIDDEN PANEL”
iii) Select the “DRAM ADDRESS” menu using the scroll buttons.
iv) Whenever the Set button is pressed, the LCD will display the DRAM error address
on Slot 1, Slot 2, and Slot 3 in turn.
6) If a DIMM DRAM has an error, replace the DIMM corresponding to the above memory
map information.
Note:
x There may be a case where the above sequence does not work correctly due to complete
RAM failure, or in faulty assembly such as a solder bridge or ineffective soldering etc.
x “PRINT CHECK” may be displayed when exiting from the Test mode. It will disappear in
20 or 30 seconds, displaying “READY” on the LCD. It is not a fault.
5-9
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
2.4
Test Print Mode
This mode prints the specified pattern in order to check the engine.
<Procedure>
1) Press the -, + Set buttons in this order while holding down the Go button to enter the
test print mode.
2) The ‘PRINT MENU’ message is displayed on the LCD. Select ‘single test print’ or
‘repeat test print’ by pressing the – or + button, then press the Set button.
3) If selecting ‘single test print’, select one of the following items by pressing the – or +
button, then press the Set button.
Single test print
TEST PTN=A – H
Halftone Reproduction
TEST PTN=G – H
Line Reproduction
TEST PTN=K2
Color Reproduction, registration and jitter
TEST PTN=STRIPE
Fusing
TEST PTN=NORMAL
Prints the test print page normally.
TEST PTN=GRID
10mm grid pattern (to check the magnification and
paper skew.)
TEST PTN=LINE
Horizontal line with 2 dots and 3 spaces (to check the
pitch of paper feeding.)
TEST PTN=BLACK
Prints the all black page. (to check the damage on the
fusing unit.)
TEST PTN=WHITE
Prints the blank page. (to check the black spots or
dark printing.)
4) If selecting ‘repeat test print’, select one of the following items by pressing the – or +
button, then press the Set button.
Repeat test print (For the printed page, refer to ‘single test print’ described
above.)
TEST PTN=NORMAL
TEST PTN=GRID
TEST PTN=LINE
TEST PTN=BLACK
TEST PTN=WHITE
2.5
NVRAM Reset Mode
This mode forces the NVRAM value of the video controller to be reset to the factory settings.
<Procedure>
1) While holding down the Set button, turn on the power.
2) Hold down the Set button until “RAM SIZE” is displayed on the LCD panel and the
LEDs are all on momently.
3) The printer is reset to the factory setting.
5-10
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
3.
ENGINE CONTROLLER MODE
This section describes the operation and setting procedures for each engine test in the
Engine Controller Mode.
In order to go into the Engine Controller Mode, turn on the printer while holding down the
Secure Print, Back, Set buttons.
3.1
Configuration of Operational Mode
This printer has the various functions as set out in Table 5-2 for the user to easily understand
the operation status of the printer engine during maintenance work.
(1) Normal Mode: After removing the main PCB from the printer and pressing the Ready
button under the Engine Controller Mode, the printer goes into the
Engine Normal Mode.
This mode provides functions to indicate the operation status of the
printer and also messages relating to normal operations which the
operator is controlling.
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the main controller PCB before the printer goes into the Engine Normal
Mode. If you fail to do so, the printer goes into sleep mode.
(2) Service Mode: After turning on the printer in the off-line status, the printer goes into
Service Mode.
This mode is a unique mode for the serviceman only and provides
additional functions (codes 31 through 37) to confirm the operational
status during maintenance work and ‘39 FACTORY MODE’ to confirm
and set the operational status of the main components.
5-11
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
Table 5-2
Normal Mode
Ready LED ON
00
READY
Power LED OFF
01
WAIT
Power LED BLINKING
02
PRINT
Power LED OFF
11
Power LED ON
19
CHK MEDIA TYPE
CHK MEDIA FOR DUPLEX
NO MEDIA
CHK OUTER SELECTION
NO TRAY
STACKER FULL
REPLACE TONER
CHECK FUSER OIL
CHK CLEANING ROLLER
CHECK WASTE TONER PACK
MISPRINT
ALIGN TONER CG
ALIGN FU. UNIT
ALIGN FUSER CL ROLLER
ALIGN BELT CG
ALIGN LFU
ALIGN TR ROLLER
MEDIA JAM
CLOSE PANEL FRONT
CLOSE PANEL TOP
CLOSE PANEL REAR
CLOSE PANEL LFU
CLOSE PANEL DUPLEX
SLEEP MODE
20
SERVICE CALL
Power LED ON
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
TEST PRINT
NEXT CARE INFO.
CASSETTE TYPE
TOTAL PAGE
EACH IMAGE
CLEAR CARE
MEDIA MANAGE
39
FACTORY MODE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Service Mode
Ready LED OFF
5-12
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
DP CHECK
BD CHECK
FU CHECK
MARGIN ADJUST
LIFE PERIOD SET
NVRAM TUNE UP
NVRAM INITIAL
TOTAL PAGE SET
EACH IMAGE SET
NEXT LIFE SET
LP TUNE UP
THV TUNE UP
DBV TUNE UP
DVM TUNE UP
CBV TUNE UP
FBV TUNE UP
REG TUNE UP
VDO TUNE UP
ADC TUNE UP
AC1 TUNE UP
LF2 TUNE UP
AC2 TUNE UP
ADD TUNE UP
TH1 TUNE UP
PS1 TUNE UP
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
3.2
Operation of Normal Mode
Normal Mode displays on the control panel the operational status of the printer when in the
“ONLINE” state and the necessary information for the operator to implement ordinary
maintenance work.
Operation Procedures
(1) Press the power button to turn on the printer while holding down the Secure
Print, Back and Set buttons. Refer to Fig.5-1.
(2) Press the Ready button so that the printer is on-line and the Power LED starts
to flash.
(3) The Power LED lights approximately 210 seconds after power-on and the
printer is ready to print.
Normal Mode
See Table 5-2 for details of indications available in normal mode.
5-13
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
Code No.
00
01
02
LCD Message
00 READY
[*2
01 WAIT
[*2
Description of Message
x The Power LED is lit.
x The engine has completed the
[*1]
][*4]
warming-up process and is now ready
to print.
[*1]: Applicable paper feeder is indicated
as follows;
/UPP: Upper cassette
/LF1: Lower cassette (1)
/LF2: Lower cassette (2)
[*2]: Size of the paper loaded in the
upper or lower cassette is indicated
as follows;
Indication is displayed from the left
in the order of the upper cassette,
lower cassette (1) and lower
cassette (2).
LT: Letter size
DL: Envelope
EX: Executive size PC: Post card
LG: Legal size
CM: Envelope
Commercial #10
A4: A4 size
FR: Free size
B5: B5 size
LD: Ledger
L+: A3 Nobi
A3: A3 size
B4: B4 size
[*4]: The code numbers of consumables
or periodical replacement parts will
be indicated if they have reached
their life or should be replaced now.
If no periodical replacement is
required, there will be no indication
in the LCD.
For details of the periodical
replacement parts, see 36. CLEAR
CARE in the next section.
x The Power LED is lit.
x The engine is in the process of
[*1]
][*4]
warming-up.
x For messages [*1], [*2] and [*4] that
appear on the LCD, see the
description for code number 00
above.
x The Power LED lit.
x The engine is ready to print.
x For messages [*1], [*2], [*3] and [*4]
that appear on the LCD, see the
description for code number 00
above.
[*5]: Print color is indicated as follows;
Y: Yellow M: Magenta
C: Cyan K: Black
YM: Yellow & Magenta
YMCK
Full Color
02 PRINT [*5][*1]
[*2
][*4]
5-14
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Code No.
11-1
LCD Message
Description of Message
x The engine is idling.
x The Power LED is lit.
CHECK MEDIA
11 CHK MEDIA [*1]
TYPE
[*4]
NO MEDIA UPP/LOW
CHK MEDIA TYPE UPP/LOW
CHK OUTER SELECTION
CHK MEDIA FOR DUPLEX
11-2
NO MEDIA
11 NO MEDIA
11-3
[*1]
[*4]
CHECK MEDIA FOR DUPLEX
11 CHK MEDIA [*1]
FOR DUPLEX[*4]
11-4
CHECK OUTER SELECTION
11 CHK OUTER [*1]
SELECTION [*4]
12-1
NO TRAY UPP/LOW
12 NO TRAY
[*1]
[*4]
5-15
[*1]: Applicable paper feeder is indicated
as follows;
/UPP: Upper cassette
/LF1: Lower cassette (1)
/LF2: Lower cassette (2)
x Confirm whether the applicable paper
cassette is loaded with paper.
x Press the Job Cancel button if the
media needs to be changed.
x The engine is idling.
x The Power LED is lit.
[*1]: Applicable paper feeder paper empty
condition is indicated as follows;
/UPP: Upper cassette
/LF1: Lower cassette (1)
/LF2: Lower cassette (2)
x Replenish the empty cassette with
paper.
x The engine is idling.
x The Power LED is lit.
[*1]: Applicable paper feeder paper empty
condition is indicated as follows;
/UPP: Upper cassette
/LOW: Lower cassette
/DPL: Duplex unit inside
x Change media.
x Change the media selection.
x The engine is idling.
x The Power LED is lit.
[*1]: Media check is indicated with the
following messages for each feeder;
/UPP: Upper cassette
/LOW: Lower cassette
x Confirm the media cassette / paper exit
tray and reset the settings properly.
x The engine is idling.
x The Power LED is lit.
[*1]: Paper feeder without the paper
cassette is indicated as follows;
UPPER: Upper cassette
/LF1: Lower cassette (1)
/LF2: Lower cassette (2)
x Install the applicable media cassette to
the paper feeder indicated on the LCD.
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
Code No.
12-2
LCD Message
Description of Message
x The engine is ready to print.
x The Power LED is lit.
x Remove the paper on the stacker
STACKER FULL
(paper exit tray), then press the button.
12 STACKER FULL
[*4]
13
x The engine is ready to print.
x The Power LED is lit.
REPLACE TONER
13 REPLACE
TONER
[*5]: The toner empty condition is
indicated by the color code as
follows;
Y:
Yellow
M:
Magenta
C:
Cyan
K:
Black
x Replace the indicated toner cartridge
with a new one of the correct color.
[*5]
[*4]
Display of [4]:
C:YT Y toner cartridge
C:CT: C toner cartridge
C:MT M toner cartridge
C:KT K toner cartridge
14-1
x The engine is idling.
x The Power LED is lit.
x Replace the fuser oil bottle with a new
CHECK FUSER OIL
14 CHECK
FUSER OIL[*F0]
14-2
x
CHECK CLEANING ROLLER
14 CHECK CLEANING
ROLLER[*4][*FC]
14-3
CHECK WASTE TONER PACK
14 CHECK WASTE
TONER PACK[*4]
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
5-16
one.
This message will be automatically
cleared by opening & closing the
paper exit cover.
The engine is idling.
The Power LED is lit.
Replace the fuser cleaner with a new
one.
Execute the Clear Care Mode after
the replacement of the fuser cleaner
to clear the Care Code [FC].
The engine is idling.
The Power LED is lit.
Replace the waste toner pack with a
new one.
This message will be automatically
cleared by opening & closing the front
cover while replacing the waste toner
pack. The message can also be
cleared by pressing the - button.
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Code No.
15
LCD Message
Description of Message
x The engine is idling.
x The Power LED is lit.
MISPRINT
15 MISPRINT
[*6][*4]
16-1
ALIGN FU UNIT
16 ALIGN
FU.UNIT
16-2
[*4]
ALIGN FUSER CL ROLLER
16 ALIGN FUSER
CL ROLLER [*4]
16-3
ALIGN TONER CG
16 ALIGN
TONER CG
[*5]
[*4]
5-17
[*6] The type of misprint error is
indicated as follows;
NOPQR: No PRREQ-N signal is
available.
PAPER: No paper is available in
the feeder while
executing the print
operation after receipt of
the print command.
MEDIA:
While executing the print
process after receipt of
print command, the
media type of the feeder
is not consistent with the
specified media type.
Misprint occurred during
duplex printing.
x This message can be cleared by
pressing the - button.
x The engine is stopped.
x The Power LED is lit.
x The fusing unit is not installed.
Reconfirm the installation status of the
fusing unit.
x This message will be automatically
cleared by opening & closing the
paper exit cover. The message can
also be cleared by pressing the button.
x The engine is idling.
x The Power LED is lit.
x The fuser cleaner is not installed.
Reconfirm the installation status of the
fuser cleaner.
x This message will be automatically
cleared by opening & closing the
paper exit cover. The message can
also be cleared by pressing the button.
x The engine is ready to print.
x The Power LED is lit.
[*5]: The color of the incorrectly installed
toner cartridge will be indicated as
follows;
Y: Yellow M: Magenta
C: Cyan K: Black
x Reinstall the toner cartridge correctly.
x This message will be automatically
cleared by opening & closing the front
cover.
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
Code No.
16-4
LCD Message
Description of Message
x The engine is stopped.
x The Power LED is lit.
x The OPC belt cartridge is not
ALIGN BELT CG
16 ALIGN BELT CG
[*4]
16-5
ALIGN LFU
16 ALIGN LFU
[*4]
16-6
ALIGN TRANSFER ROLLER
16 ALIGN BELT CG
[*4]
17
MEDIA JAM
17 MEDIA JAM
[*7]
[*4]
18
CLOSE PANEL
18 CLOSE PANEL
[*8]
[*4]
5-18
installed. Reconfirm the installation
status of the OPC belt cartridge.
x This message will be automatically
cleared by opening & closing either
the paper exit cover or front cover.
x The engine is ready to print.
x Turn the power off and connect the
harness between the engine and
fusing unit.
x Turn the power on. If the warming-up
process starts, it means that proper
connection is now made.
x The engine is ready to print.
x The Power LED is lit.
x The transfer roller is not installed.
Reconfirm the installation status of the
transfer roller.
x This message will be automatically
cleared by opening & closing either
the paper exit cover or front cover.
x The engine is stopped.
x The Power LED is lit.
[*7]: The kind of jam (location of jam) is
indicated as follows;
FEED:
Paper feeder
INNER:
Inside of the printer
OUTER: Paper exit unit
DRUM:
Transfer drum
DPL:
Inside the duplex unit
x This message can be cleared by
pressing the - button after opening &
closing the front cover, back cover
and paper exit cover.
x The engine is ready to print.
x The Power LED is lit.
[*8]: The open cover is indicated as
follows;
FRONT: Front cover
TOP:
Paper exit cover
REAR:
Rear access cover
DPL:
Rear access cover
LFU:
Fusing unit cover
x This message can be cleared by
opening & closing the indicated cover.
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Code No.
19
LCD Message
Description of Message
x The engine is idling.
x The Power LED is lit.
x This mode is cleared by sending a
SLEEP MODE
WAKE-UP command (EC24) from the
video controller.
x The printer is ready to print after the
warming-up process of the engine.
x The engine is stopped.
x The Power LED is lit.
[*9]: Service Call error code is indicated
as follows;
For the details of error codes, refer
to Chapter 8 “Troubleshooting” in
this manual.
19 SLEEP MODE
[*4]
20
SERVICE CALL
20 SERVICE CALL
[*9]
5-19
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
3.3
Service Mode
Service Mode is a unique mode for the maintenance of the printer only, without the video
controller card. In this mode, you can check the operation status of the printer engine Off-line
and also carry out maintenance work for each of the printer components.
Procedure
(1) Hold down the Secure Print, Back and Set buttons and turn the printer Power
on.
(2) Using the -, Reprint, Back and Set buttons, select the mode necessary for the
maintenance work from the test list shown in Table 5-2.
How to designate the necessary mode
(1) Press the Back and Set button so
that service modes (a), (b) and (c)
show up in sequence to be selected.
(a)
SERVICE MODE
TEST PRINT
(2) After selecting the desired mode,
execute the selected mode by
pressing the Reprint button.
(3) Press the - button to exit the mode.
SERVICE MODE
(b)
(c)
NEXT CARE INFO
SERVICE MODE
FACTORY MODE
5-20
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
31
GRID PRINT
A single color or two color (R,G,B) Grid Pattern and a full color Stripe Pattern can be printed
as Test Prints.
Procedure
Description of Procedures
1) Press the Reprint button.
(a) o (b)
LCD Message
SERVICE MODE
a)
2) Using the Back or Set button, select the
desired pattern (ex. grid pattern), and then
press the Reprint button.
(b) o (c)
3) Using the Back or Set button, select the
desired color (ex. red color), and then, press
the Reprint button.
(c) o (d)
4) After completion of the warming-up process,
the desired pattern of the selected color will
be continuously printed.
(d)
b)
6) If it is desired to return to On-line mode,
press the Go button.
(f) o (g)
31 GRID PRINT
GRID PRINT
c)
31 GRID PRINT
Y/M/C/K/R/G/B
R:YM
G:YC
B:MC
5) Print operation is suspended by pressing the
- button.
(d) o (e)
If it is desired to return to the previous screen
(message), press the - button one more time.
(e) o (d)
TEST PRINT
31 GRID PRINT [YM]
d)
31 GRID PRINT
e)
Y/M/C/K/R/G/B
SERVICE MODE
TEST PRINT
f)
g)
5-21
01 WAIT
[
]
[
[
]
]
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
32
NEXT CARE INFORMATION
Information relating to the replacement timing of periodical replacement parts can be
obtained. This is the life for each of the components in images or pages.
Procedure
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “NEXT CARE INFO”.
(a) o (b)
2) Using the Back or Set button, select the care
code for which you need the information.
2: Fuser Cleaner (FC)
7: OPC Belt Cartridge (BL)
8: Fusing Unit (FU) *
9: Transfer Drum (TD)
10: Replacement Kit 240K (240K)
13: Replacement Paper Feeding Kit (PF1)
14: Replacement Paper Feeding Kit (PF2)
15: Replacement Paper Feeding Kit (PF3)
16: Replacement Kit 120K (120K)
3) After selecting the code, press the Reprint
button. Then, the number of images or
printouts corresponding to the selected code
is displayed.
(b) o (c) through (l)
SERVICE MODE
a)
b)
c)
* The Oil Pad change message can be
changed to ON or OFF as follows:
1. Enter the hidden menu mode as follows:
Press the Job Cancel, Secure Print and
Reprint buttons at the same time in the
off-line status.
2. Select the “OIL PAD SELECT” menu
using the scroll buttons.
NEXT FU UNIT
e)
f)
OIL PAD=ALLDISP
5-22
100000P
NEXT TR DRUM
600000P
g)
NEXT TR DRUM
599943P
NEXT 240K KIT
h)
24000P
NEXT PICK ROL
i)
j)
120000P
NEXT PICK LF1
120000P
k)
NEXT PICK LF2
120000P
l)
OIL PAD=LCD/WEB (default setting)
NEXT FC ROLL
018000P
12000P
3. The LCD will display as follows. Select
the mode you need.
OIL PAD=OFF
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
* 12 * * * 16
NEXT BL UNIT
Press the - button one more time at screen
(b) to return to the service mode.
(b) o (a)
32 NEXT CARE
d)
4) Screen (c) through (l) can be cleared by
pressing the - button.
(c) through (l) o (b)
NEXT CARE INFO
NEXT P. DSCHRG
120000P
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
33
CASSETTE TYPE
The type of paper feeding cassette can be selected.
Procedure
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “CASSETTE TYPE”.
(a) o (b)
2) Using the Back or Set button, select the
code of the desired cassette (A, B or C), and
then press the Reprint button.
SERVICE MODE
a)
b)
33 CASSETTE TYPE
TYPE=<A / B / C>
3) Press the - button to exit the mode from
screen (b).
(b) o (c)
SERVICE MODE
c)
5-23
CASSETTE TYPE
CASSETTE TYPE
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
34
TOTAL PAGE
The total number of printouts can be confirmed.
Procedure
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “TOTAL PAGE” mode.
(a) o (b)
2) Select one type of page from among TOTAL
PAGE, LFU PAGE and DPL PAGE.
SERVICE MODE
a)
b)
3) A 6 digit number is displayed.
This number represents the total number of
pages that have been printed out.
(c)
4) Press the - button to exit the mode from
screen (c)/(d)/(e).
(c)/(d)/(e)o (f)
TOTAL PAGE
SERVICE MODE
TOTAL/LFU/DPL
34 TOTAL PAGE
c)
P
d)
34 LFU PAGE
P
34 DPL PAGE
e)
P
SERVICE MODE
f)
5-24
TEST PRINT
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
35
EACH IMAGE
Number of created images for each color used in printing can be confirmed.
Procedure
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “EACH IMAGE” mode.
(a) o (b)
2) Using the Back or Set button, select the
required color and then press the Reprint
button.
(b) o (c)
SERVICE MODE
a)
b)
c)
4) Press the - button to exit this mode from
screen (c).
(c) o (d)
d)
e)
5-25
35 IMAGE OF Y
000098P
35 IMAGE OF
Y/M/C/K
5) Using the Back or Set button, select another
color and then press the Reprint button to
confirm the number of images created in that
color.
6) Press the - button to return to the Service
mode.
(d) o (e)
35 IMAGE OF
Y/M/C/K
3) The number of images created in the
selected color is displayed. (Ex. Yellow)
(c)
EACH IMAGE
SERVICE MODE
TEST PRINT
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
36
CLEAR CARE
Care Code counters displayed on the LCD can be cleared. Make sure that you clear the
relevant CLEAR CARE mode whenever replacing periodical replacement parts with new
ones. This mode should only be used to reset the counters after replacement of faulty
consumables before their life expectancy is reached. For normal life replacement use the
resets available in the Video controller mode
Procedure
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “CLEAR CARE” mode.
(a) o (b)
2) Using the Back or Set button, move the
cursor to select the applicable CARE code
and then press the Reprint button.
SERVICE MODE
CLEAR CARE
a)
b)
36 CLEAR CARE
No.=123456789101216
c)
CARED FC ROLL?
YES/NO
d)
36 CLEAR CARE
No.=123456789101216
(b) o (c)
3) When implementing CLEAR CARE, use the
Back or Set button to have the cursor meet
YES, then press the Reprint button. (Refer
to the table below.)
(c) o (d)
4) Press the - button to exit the CLEAR CARE
mode.
(d) o (e)
SERVICE MODE
e)
TEST PRINT
NO.
Periodical maintenance parts
Code
2
Fuser cleaner
FC
7
OPC belt cartridge
BC
8
Fusing unit
FU
9
Drum cleaner / Transfer roller
10
Transfer drum
TD
13
Paper feeding roller
PK
14
Paper feeding roller (for LFU1)
P1
15
Paper feeding roller (for LFU2)
P2
16
Paper discharger
PD
5-26
120K / OW
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
37
MEDIA MANAGE
The signal from the OHP sensor can be ignored when the media is selected to OHP.
However, this mode should not be used under normal circumstances.
Procedure
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “MEDIA MANAGE”.
SERVICE MODE
a)
(a) o (b)
2) Select DEFIANCE and then press the
Reprint button if the OHP sensor signal
should be ignored.
(b) o (c)
b)
MEDIA MANAGE
37 MEDIA MANAGE
MANAGE/DEFIANCE
In normal operation, the mode is preset to
MANAGE.
c)
5-27
SERVICE MODE
DP CHECK
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
39
FACTORY MODE
This mode consists of 9 (nine) modes for the confirmation of operation and the resetting
functions necessary for maintenance work.
CAUTION
Before using this mode, ensure that you have the information available to reset the Page and
Image counters to the correct values. See 34 TOTAL PAGES and 35 EACH IMAGE for
information on how to get the readings before starting working with these functions.
Basic Configuration
39
FACTORY MODE
5-28
40
DP CHECK
41
BD CHECK
42
FU CHECK
43
MARGIN ADJUST
44
LIFE PERIOD SET
45
NVRAM TUNE UP
46
NVRAM INITIAL
47
TOTAL PAGE SET
48
EACH IMAGE SET
49
NEXT LIFE SET
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
40
DP CHECK
Each individual color Toner cartridge can be driven.
Procedure
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “DP CHECK”.
(a) o (b)
39 FACTORY MODE
a)
2) Using the Back or Set button, select the
desired color and then press the Reprint
button.
(b) o (c)
b)
3) The selected color toner cartridge starts to
drive. If no error occurs in driving, the
message “GOOD” is displayed on the LCD,
otherwise “FAIL”.
(c)
c)
Toner cartridge drive will automatically stop
after 60 seconds.
(c) o (d)
DP CHECK
40 DP CHECK
Y/M/C/K
d)
40 DP CHECK Y
GOOD
40 DP CHECK
Y/M/C/K
4) Press the - button to stop the DP CHECK
mode.
(d)
Press the - button one more time to return to
screen (a).
(d) o (e)
5-29
e)
FACTORY MODE
DP CHECK
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
41
BD CHECK
Laser beam position and laser power can be checked.
Procedure
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
screen (a) “BD CHECK”.
(a) o (b)
2) The scanner motor scans the laser beam as
it is rotating. If the scanning position of the
laser beam is normal, “GOOD” is displayed
on the LCD, otherwise “FAIL”. (b) or (c)
39 FACTORY MODE
a)
b)
Scanner motor automatically stops rotating
after 60 seconds.
(d)
3) Press the - button to exit the BD CHECK
mode.
(b) o (d)
c)
BD CHECK
41 BD CHECK
GOOD
41 BD CHECK
FAIL
d)
39 FACTORY MODE
DP CHECK
42
FU CHECK
Availability of oil in the fusing unit can be checked.
Procedure
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
screen (a) “FU CHECK”.
(a)
2) The fusing unit starts the heat-up process,
and checks the availability of fuser oil. If oil is
available in the fusing unit, “GOOD” is
displayed in the LCD, otherwise, “FAIL”.
39 FACTORY MODE
a)
b)
(b)
3) Press the - button to exit the FU CHECK
mode.
(c)
c)
FU CHECK
43 FU CHECK
OIL:GOOD
39 FACTORY MODE
DP CHECK
5-30
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
43
MARGIN ADJUST
The position of the top margin and left margin can be confirmed and adjusted within the
range -3.5mm max. and +3.5mm max.
NOTE:
It is recommended to use the default value in normal use. Do not perform this mode
frequently.
Procedure
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “MARGIN ADJUST”.
39
a)
(a) o (b)
2) Using the Back or Set button, select one of
TOP, LEFT, LEFT1, LEFT2, LEFT3 and then
press the Reprint button.
(b) o (c)
LEFT: For adjustment of left edge of the
upper cassette.
LEFT1: For adjustment of left edge of the
lower cassette (1).
LEFT2: For adjustment of left edge of lower
cassette (2).
LEFT3: For adjustment of left edge from the
duplex unit.
3) The margins can be adjusted by up to 3.5mm
left and right in 0.5mm steps from the
reference value “0”.
Using the Back or Set button, select the
amount of adjustment by selecting a number
displayed in screen (c) or (d). The amount of
adjustment selected will be displayed at the
upper right corner of Screen (c) or (d).
After confirming the desired amount of
adjustment is displayed, press the Reprint
button to set the adjustment.
4) Press the - button to exit the MARGIN
ADJUST mode.
(d) o (e)
5) Press the - button one more time to return to
FACTORY MODE.
(e) o (f)
5-31
b)
FACTORY MODE
MARGIN ADJUST
43 MARGIN ADJUST
TOP/LEFT/LEFT1/LEFT2/LEFT3
c)
43 TOP -2.0mm
-<765432101>+
d)
43 TOP +2.5mm
-<101234567>+
e)
43 MARGIN ADJUST
TOP/LEFT/LEFT1/LEFT2/LEFT3
39 FACTORY MODE
f)
DP CHECK
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
44
LIFE PERIOD
Replacement life of the periodical replacement parts can be set.
NOTE:
It is recommended to use the default value in normal use. Do not adjust these settings
without authorization.
Procedure
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “LIFE PERIOD” mode.
39 FACTORY MODE
a)
(a) o (b)
2) Using the Back or Set button, select the
desired code to be set and then press the
Reprint button.
2: Fuser cleaner
(b) o (c)
7: OPC belt cartridge
(d)
8: Fusing unit
(e)
9: Transfer drum
(f)
10: 240K replacement kit
(g)
13: Paper Feeding Kit 1
(h)
14: Paper Feeding Kit 2
(i)
15: Paper Feeding Kit 3
(j)
16: 120K Replacement Kit
(k)
3) Use the Back or Set button to select the
desired digit.
b)
4) Press the - button to complete the setting
work.
(k)
5) Press the - button one more time to return to
FACTORY MODE.
(l) o (m)
44 LIFE PERIOD
12345678910*12***16
c)
PERIOD FC ROLL
018000 P SET
d)
PERIOD BC UNIT
120000 P SET
e)
PERIOD FU UNIT
100000 P SET
f)
PERIOD TR DRUM
600000 P SET
Use the Reprint button to input a new value
to the selected (blinking) digit.
Upon completion of inputting the values to be
set, use the Back or Set button to select
SET on the LCD and then press the Reprint
button to register the set value.
LIFE PERIOD SET
g)
PERIOD 240K UNIT
240000 P SET
h)
PERIOD PICK ROL
120000 P SET
i)
j)
k)
PERIOD PICK LF1
120000 P SET
PERIOD PICK LF2
120000 P SET
PERIOD P. DSCHRG
120000 P SET
l)
44 LIFE PERIOD
12345678910*12***16
m)
39 FACTORY MODE
DP CHECK
5-32
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
45
NVRAM TUNE UP
This mode is not used in normal operations, but is used when fine adjustment of the HVPSU
voltage values is required. Do not use this mode unless you are sure that you understand
the effects of making adjustments to the various charge voltages in the HVPSU.
This mode consists of the following 6 (six) subordinate modes from 45-1 to 45-6:
Configuration of NVRAM TUNE UP
<Factory Setting>
45
NVRAM TUNE UP
45-1
LP TUNE UP
+4
45-2
THV TUNE UP
45-3
DBV TUNE UP
0
*3
DVM TUNE UP
+1
45-4
CBV TUNE UP
0
45-5
FBV TUNE UP
*3
REG TUNE UP
0
*3
VDO TUNE UP
0
45-6
ADC TUNE UP
0
*3
AC1 TUNE UP
0
*3
LF2 TUNE UP
0
*3
AC2 TUNE UP
*3
ADD TUNE UP
-4
*3
TH1 TUNE UP
0
*3
PS1 TUNE UP
PPC/OHP: 0, LABEL: - 2
*1
+ 1 *2
A/B/D: 0, C: + 1
*1 ’0’ is applied for machines produced after June 2000. You need to set the CBV TUNE
UP value to ‘0’ for machines, which were produced before June 2000, to which ‘+1’, has been
applied. For setting procedures, see 45-4. CBV TUNE UP in this section.
*2 ‘+1’ is applied for machines produced after June 2000. You need to set the FBV TUNE
UP value to ‘+1’ for machines which were produced before June, 2000, to which ‘0’ has been
applied. For setting procedures, see 45-5. FBV TUNE UP in this section.
*3 Do not change settings of these modes.
NOTE:
After performing NVRAM INITIAL in the next section, be sure to set the LP TUNE UP value to
‘+ 4’
5-33
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
45-1
LP TUNE UP
This mode should be used when optical density, line thickness and/or color reproduction
needs to be adjusted. The adjustment is made by changing the laser power against the
reference value 0 (zero) in the range -4 to +4.
NOTE:
Do not perform this mode frequently.
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “NVM TUNE UP”. (a) o (b)
39 FACTORY MODE
a)
NVM TUNE UP
2) After selecting LP TUNE UP Code 1, press
the Reprint button.
(b) o (c)
3) After selecting the color to be adjusted, press
the Reprint button. (Ex. Yellow).
(c) o (d)
4) The adjustment value can be adjusted in 8
steps between the -4 and +4.
b)
No.=<123456789>
c)
45 LP TUNE UP
Y/M/C/K
After selecting the required number press the
Reprint button.
(d)
5) Press the - button to finish the adjustment for
yellow.
(d) o (e)
45 NVM TUNE UP
d)
45 YELLOW
[O]
-<432101234>+
Repeat steps 3 to 5 if adjustment work is
required for another color.
45 LP TUNE UP
e)
6) Press the - button to finish the adjustments.
Y/M/C/K
(e) o (f)
45 NVM TUNE UP
f)
5-34
No.=<123456789>
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
45-2
THV TUNE UP
This mode shall be used when the transfer voltage needs to be adjusted due to errors such
as transfer failure onto the media. The adjustment is used to change the transfer voltage,
subject to the media to be used, against the reference value 0 (zero) in the range -4 to +4.
NOTE:
Do not perform this mode frequently.
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “NVM TUNE UP”. (a) o (b)
39 FACTORY MODE
a)
NVM TUNE UP
2) After selecting THV TUNE UP Code 2, press
the Reprint button.
(b) o (c)
3) After selecting the media to be adjusted,
press the Reprint button. (Ex. PPC).
(c) o (d)
4) Adjustment can be made in 8 steps between
-4 and +4.
After selecting a given number, press the
Reprint button.
(d)
5) Press the - button to finish the adjustment for
PPC.
(d) o (e)
Repeat steps 3 to 5 for other media such as
OHP or Labels.
6) Press the - button to finish the adjustments.
(e) o (f)
b)
45 NVM TUNE UP
No.=<123456789>
c)
45 THV TUNE UP
PPC/OHP/LABEL
d)
45 THV PPC
[
-<432101234>+
45 THV TUNE UP
e)
PPC/OHP/LABEL
45 NVM TUNE UP
f)
5-35
No.=<123456789>
]
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
45-3
DBV TUNE UP
This mode shall be used when the image optical density needs to be adjusted. Adjustment of
the developer bias voltage against the reference value 0 (zero) in the range -4 and +4.
NOTE:
Do not perform this mode frequently.
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “NVM TUNE UP”. (a) o (b)
39 FACTORY MODE
a)
NVM TUNE UP
2) After selecting DBV TUNE UP Code 3, press
the Reprint button.
(b) o (c)
3) After selecting the color to be adjusted, press
the Reprint button. (Ex. Magenta).
(c) o (d)
4) The adjustment value can be adjusted in 8
steps between -4 and +4.
After selecting a given number, press the
Reprint button.
(d)
b)
45 NVM TUNE UP
No.=<123456789>
c)
45 DBV TUNE UP
Y/M/C/K
5) Press the - button to finish the adjustment
work for Magenta.
(d) o (e)
Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each color.
d)
6) Press the - button to finish the DBV
adjustment work.
(e) o (f)
e)
45 MAGENTA [
]
-<432101234>+
45 DBV TUNE UP
Y/M/C/K
45 NVM TUNE UP
f)
5-36
No.=<123456789>
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
45-4
CBV TUNE UP
This mode should be used when image defects attributed to the OPC belt need to be
improved. Adjustment is to alter the OPC belt bias voltage against the reference value 0
(zero) in the range -4 to +4.
NOTE:
Do not perform this mode frequently.
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “NVM TUNE UP”. (a) o (b)
39 FACTORY MODE
a)
NVM TUNE UP
2) After selecting CBV TUNE UP Code 5, press
the Reprint button.
(b) o (c)
3) The adjustment value can be adjusted in 8
steps between -4 and +4.
After selecting a given number, press the
Reprint button.
(c)
b)
4) Press the - button to finish the adjustment
work for CBV.
(c) o (d)
c)
45 NVM TUNE UP
No.=<123456789>
45 CBV TUNE UP
-<432101234>+
d)
45 NVM TUNE UP
No.=<123456789>
5-37
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
45-5
FBV TUNE UP
This mode should be used when image defects attributed to the transfer drum need to be
improved. Adjustment is to adjust the drum cleaner bias voltage against the reference value
0 (zero) in the range -4 and +4.
NOTE:
Do not perform this mode frequently.
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “NVM TUNE UP”. (a) o (b)
39 FACTORY MODE
a)
NVM TUNE UP
2) After selecting FBV TUNE UP Code 6, press
the Reprint button.
(b) o (c)
3) The adjustment value can be adjusted in 8
steps between -4 and +4.
After selecting a given number, press the
Reprint button.
(c)
b)
4) Press the - button to finish the adjustment
work for FBV.
(c) o (d)
c)
No.=<123456789>
45 FBV TUNE UP
-<432101234>+
d)
5-38
45 NVM TUNE UP
45 NVM TUNE UP
No.=<123456789>
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
45-6
ADC TUNE UP
This mode should be used to improve the problem when there is insufficient separation of
paper from the transfer drum (when the winding jam occurred around the drum). Using the
mode, you can adjust the bias voltage of paper discharging output from the high-voltage
power supply unit. Adjustment is to adjust the drum cleaner bias voltage against the
reference value 0 (zero) in the range -4 and +4.
NOTE:
Do not perform this mode frequently.
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “NVM TUNE UP”. (a) o (b)
39 FACTORY MODE
a)
NVM TUNE UP
2) After selecting ADC TUNE UP Code 9, press
the Reprint button.
(b) o (c)
3) The adjustment value can be adjusted in 8
steps between -4 and +4.
After selecting a given number, press the
Reprint button.
(c)
b)
4) Press the - button to finish the adjustment
work for ADC.
(c) o (d)
c)
No.=<123456789>
45 ADC TUNE UP
-<432101234>+
d)
5-39
45 NVM TUNE UP
45 NVM TUNE UP
No.=<123456789>
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
46
NVRAM INITIAL
This mode can initialize (data clear) all the data in the NVRAM on the MCTL PWB.
CAUTION
BEFORE USING THIS MODE, THE VALUES FROM ‘34 TOTAL PAGES’ AND ‘35 EACH
IMAGE’ MUST BE READ TO ENABLE THE CORRECT VALUES TO BE RESET USING
FUNCTIONS 47 AND 48.
NOTE:
x Do not perform this mode other than when replacing the MCTL PWB.
x After performing this mode, be sure to set the LP TUNE UP value to ‘- 3’.
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “NVRAM INITIAL”.
(a) o (b)
2) Select YES if NVRAM INITIAL should be
executed. If not select NO.
Press the Reprint button so that the RAM
INITIAL will be executed. (All the data will be
cleared.)
(b) o (c)
3) Following modes should be executed to set
the RAM data.
43: MARGIN ADJUST
44: LIFE PERIOD SET
45: NVRAM TUNE UP
47: TOTAL PAGE SET
48: EACH IMAGE SET
49: NEXT LIFE SET
When setting NVRAM TUNE UP, set LP
TUNE UP +4.
5-40
39 FACTORY MODE
a)
b)
NVRAM INITIAL
46 NVRAM INITIAL
YES / NO
c)
39 FACTORY MODE
DP CHECK
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
47
TOTAL PAGE SET
This mode can reset the number of total pages in the NVRAM whenever NVRAM INITIAL
has been executed or the MCTL PWB is replaced.
NOTE:
Do not perform this mode other than when replacing the MCTL PWB.
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “TOTAL PAGE SET”.
39 FACTORY MODE
a)
TOTAL PAGE SET
(a) o (b)
2) Select one type of page from among TOTAL
PAGE, LFU PAGE and DPL PAGE.
3) Use the Back or Set button to select the
desired digit.
(b) o (c)
Use the Reprint button to input values to the
selected (blinking) digit.
Upon completing the input of the values, use
the Back or Set button to select SET
displayed on the LCD and then press the
Reprint button to store the set value.
(c) o (d)
b)
47 TOTAL PAGE
TOTAL/LFU/DPL
c)
47 TOTAL PAGE
P
or
c)
47 LFU PAGE
P
or
c)
47 DPL PAGE
P
d)
39 FACTORY MODE
DP CHECK
5-41
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
48
EACH IMAGE SET
This mode can reset the number of total pages of each color in the NVRAM whenever
NVRAM INITIAL is executed or the MCTL PWB is replaced.
NOTE:
Do not perform this mode other than when replacing the MCTL PWB.
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “EACH IMAGE SET”.
39 FACTORY MODE
a)
(a) o (b)
2) Select the desired color to reset in EACH
IMAGE SET.
(b) o (c)
b)
EACH IMAGE SET
48 IMAGE OF
Y/M/C/K
3) Use the Back or Set button to select the
desired digit.
Use the Reprint button to input values to the
selected (blinking) digit.
Upon completing the input of the values, use
the Back or Set button to select SET on the
LCD and then press the Go button to store
the set value.
(c) o (d)
48 IMAGE OF
c)
d)
005432 P SET
48 IMAGE OF
Y/M/C/K
4) Press the - button to exit the EACH IMAGE
SET mode.
(d) o (e)
e)
39 FACTORY MODE
DP CHECK
5-42
C
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
49
NEXT LIFE SET
This mode can set the replacement timing (number of prints) of periodic replacement parts.
NOTE:
Do not perform this mode other than when replacing the MCTL PWB.
Description of Procedures
LCD Message
1) Press the Reprint button after selecting
Screen (a) “NEXT LIFE SET”.
39 FACTORY MODE
a)
(a) o (b)
2) After selecting the code to be set, press the
Reprint button.
(b)
2: Fuser cleaner
7: OPC belt cartridge
8: Fusing unit
9: Transfer drum
10: 240K kit
3) Designate or alter the figure with the Back or
Set button.
(b) o (c)
Use the Reprint button to input values to the
selected (blinking) digit.
Upon completing the input of the values, use
the Back or Set button to select SET on the
LCD and then press the Reprint button to
store the set value.
(c) o (d)
4) Press the - button to exit the NEXT LIFE SET
mode.
(d) o (e)
5-43
b)
NEXT LIFE SET
49 NEXT LIFE SET
NO.=<123456789>
PERIOD FC ROLL
c)
d)
007800 P SET
49 NEXT LIFE SET
NO.=<123456789>
e)
39 FACTORY MODE
DP CHECK
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
3.4
Adjustment Work Procedures
3.4.1
Adjustment of top and left margin
The top and left margins can be adjusted by button operation on the control panel.
<Purpose>
If there is no top margin or left margin set for the print guarantee area or when the MCTL
PWB is replaced, the adjustment of top and left margin will be required.
<Adjustment Method>
(1) Execute “GRID PRINT” in Service Mode.
(2) Measure the position ‘A’ and ‘B’ of top margin.
[Leading edge] (A + B) / 2 d Default Value 4.0 r 1.5mm
(3) Measure the position ‘C’ and ‘D’ of left margin.
[Left edge] (C + D) / 2 d Default Value 3.0 r 1.5mm
(4) If the specification value is not met, implement the adjustment.
Execute “43 MARGIN ADJUST” in the FACTORY MODE.
(5) After adjustment execute “GRID PRINT” and confirm the margins.
Left margin
C
Print
Guarantee
Area
D
Fig. 5-2
5-44
Paper feeding direction
B
A
Leading dedge
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
3.4.2
Setting of engine NVRAM data
As data in the NVRAM has been preset to the optimum value at the factory, it is not
necessary to change the preset values under normal conditions. However, fine adjustment
may be required subject to the media or operational conditions.
<Purpose>
Print quality can be improved by changing the preset value in the engine NVRAM.
<Procedures of Setting>
(1) Follow the procedures set out in Section 3.3 ‘Service Mode’ in this chapter.
(2) Select RAM TUNE UP mode.
(3) Select the desired TUNE UP mode.
(4) Adjust the preset value to the appropriate value (step).
(5) Carry out a test print to confirm the print quality.
<Subject TUNE UP Mode>
Mode
LP TUNE UP
Subject of Adjustment
Purpose
Adjustment of laser power
Optical density
THV TUNE UP
Adjustment of transfer voltage
Transfer efficiency
DBV TUNE UP
Adjustment of developer bias
Optical density
CBV TUNE UP
Adjustment of OPC belt bias
Optical density
FBV TUNE UP
Adjustment of cleaning roller bias
Drum cleaning efficiency
ADC TUNE UP
Adjustment of paper discharging output
bias
Reduction of winding
paper jam around the
drum.
5-45
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
3.4.3
Confirmation and setting of total number of printouts
The total number of printouts is stored in the RAM. Confirmation and setting of total number
of printouts can be carried out on the control panel.
<Purpose>
Total number of printouts will be reset when changing the MCTL PWB or executing an
NVRAM INITIAL.
<Procedures of Setting>
(1) Execute 47 TOTAL PAGE SET in Factory Mode.
(2) Reset the total number of printouts.
(3) After making the setting, execute 34 TOTAL PAGE to confirm that the desired
number of printouts in now set.
3.4.4
Setting of number of images for each color
The number of printouts for each color (4 colors) is stored in the RAM. Confirmation and
setting of the number of images for each color can be carried out on the control panel.
<Purpose>
Number of images for each color will be reset when changing the MCTL PWB or executing
NVRAM INITIAL.
<Procedures of Setting>
(1) Execute 48 EACH IMAGE SET in Factory Mode.
(2) Reset the number of printouts for each color.
(3) After making the setting, execute 35 EACH IMAGE to confirm that the desired
number of images is now set.
5-46
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
3.4.5
Initial setting of engine NVRAM
Implement the initial setting at the replacement of MCTL PWB after clearing the contents of
NVRAM.
<Purpose>
The number of images for each color will be reset when changing the MCTL PWB or
executing NVRAM INITIAL.
<Procedures of Setting>
(1) Before replacing the MCTL PWB, confirm the contents of the NVRAM for the
following items.
“Factory Mode”
Code
Subject
Confirmation Value
43
MARGIN ADJUST
Top margin set value
43
MARGIN ADJUST
Left margin set value
45
LP TUNE UP
Adjustment value (“+4” in ordinary case)
45
THV TUNE UP
Adjustment value (PPC/OHP “0”, LABEL “-2”)
45
DBV TUNE UP
Adjustment value (“0” in ordinary case)
45
CBV TUNE UP
Adjustment value (“0” in ordinary case) *1
45
FBV TUNE UP
Adjustment value (“+1” in ordinary case) *2
45
ADC TUNE UP
Adjustment value (“0” in ordinary case)
47
TOTAL PAGE SET
Total print count
47
LFU PAGE SET
Print count from LFU
47
DPL PAGE SET
Print count from Duplex
48
EACH IMAGE SET
Formed image count for 4 individual colors
49
NEXT LIFE SET
Print count for maintenance replacement parts
(2) Execute 46 NVRAM INITIAL in Factory Mode.
(3) After implementing the NVRAM INITIAL, input the values obtained in procedure
1) into the NVRAM to complete the settings.
*1 ’0’ is applied for machines produced after June 2000. You need to set the CBV TUNE UP
value to ‘0’ for machines which were produced before June 2000, to which ‘+1’ has been
applied. For setting procedures, see 45-4. CBV TUNE UP in this section.
*2 ‘+1’ is applied for machines produced after June 2000. You need to set the FBV TUNE
UP value to ‘+1’ for machines which were produced before June, 2000, to which ‘0’ has been
applied. For setting procedures, see 45-5. FBV TUNE UP in this section.
5-47
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 6
PERIODIC
MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ........................................... 6-3
1. GENERAL........................................................................................................... 6-3
1.1 Handling Precautions ................................................................................................................. 6-3
1.2 List of Maintenance Tools........................................................................................................... 6-4
1.3 List of Consumables for Maintenance ........................................................................................ 6-5
2. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CLEANING ............................................................ 6-6
2.1 Cleaning the Register Roller....................................................................................................... 6-9
2.2 Cleaning the Paper Guide ........................................................................................................ 6-10
2.3 Cleaning the Paper Exit Roller ................................................................................................. 6-11
2.4 Cleaning the Transfer Roller..................................................................................................... 6-12
2.5 Cleaning the Paper Discharger ................................................................................................ 6-13
2.6 Cleaning the OPC Belt Cartridge.............................................................................................. 6-14
2.7 Cleaning the Transfer Drum ..................................................................................................... 6-15
2.8 Cleaning the Dustproof Glass in the Laser Unit ....................................................................... 6-16
2.9 Cleaning the Printer Interior...................................................................................................... 6-17
2.10 Cleaning the Oil Pad............................................................................................................... 6-18
3. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PARTS................................................................. 6-19
4. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ................................................... 6-21
4.1 OPC Belt Cartridge Replacement............................................................................................. 6-21
4.2 Fusing Unit Replacement ......................................................................................................... 6-23
4.3 Transfer Roller Replacement.................................................................................................... 6-26
4.4 Paper Discharger Replacement ............................................................................................... 6-28
4.5 Drum Cleaner Replacement ..................................................................................................... 6-30
4.6 Ozone Filter Replacement........................................................................................................ 6-32
4.7 Paper Feeding Roller and Separator Pad Replacement .......................................................... 6-33
4.8 Transfer Drum Replacement .................................................................................................... 6-34
4.9 Oil Pad Replacement................................................................................................................ 6-35
6-2
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 6
1.
1.1
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
GENERAL
Handling Precautions
Since this high quality laser printer is a precision equipment, daily checking and periodic
maintenance is indispensable to maintain the expected high performance.
The following is the list of important precautions & action items for maintenance and periodic
replacement parts:
1) Refrain from any operation, disassembly or modification that is not set out in this
manual.
2) When assembling or disassembling the printer, turn off the power supply and unplug
the power cable from the power outlet before commencing any work.
3) Whenever any parts are replaced, confirm that all the removed and replaced parts are
re-installed correctly prior to testing the printer.
4) Read carefully and take note of any precaution or warning labels affixed to any parts.
5) Unless otherwise specified, follow exactly the reverse order of the disassembly
procedures for re-assembly. Do not get the types of removed screws mixed up and
check that the screw is the correct length.
6) Do no use any solvent for cleaning, both inside and outside the printer.
7) It is strictly forbidden to dump waste toner with flammable substances or throw it into a
fire. This is a very important caution to respect.
6-3
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
1.2
List of Maintenance Tools
Table 6-1 below lists the maintenance tools required for the printer.
Table 6-1
No.
Tool Name
Function
1
Phillips Screwdriver #1
For M3
2
Phillips Screwdriver #2
For M4
3
Phillips Screwdriver (short shank) #2
For M4
4
Slotted Screwdriver #1
For slotted head screw
5
Slotted Screwdriver #2
For slotted head screw
6
Long-Nose Pliers
For general use
7
Pincette
For general use
8
Precision Driver Set (#1 a #6)
For general use
9
Gap Gauge
For general use
10
Pliers for C Ring
C Ring
11
Ruler (150mm)
For general use
12
Slide Caliper
For general use
13
Digital Meter
For general use
14
Handy Type Cleaner unique for toner
For cleaning
15
Soft Fur Brush
For cleaning
6-4
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
1.3
List of Consumables for Maintenance
Table 6-2 below lists the consumables for maintenance.
Table 6-2
No.
Tool Name
Quantity
Function
1
Toner Cartridge (Y)
1 piece
Test Print
2
Toner Cartridge (M)
1 piece
Test Print
3
Toner Cartridge (C)
1 piece
Test Print
4
Toner Cartridge (K)
1 piece
Test Print
5
Fuser Cleaner / Oil Bottle
1 piece
Test Print
6
OPC Belt Cartridge
1 piece
Test Print
7
Recommended Paper
5 sheets
Test Print
2 sheets
Test Print
(A4 or letter)
8
Recommended Paper
(Transparency)
9
Cotton Cloth
10a15 pcs
Cleaning
10
Cotton Swab
10a15 pcs
Cleaning
11
Grease
10 grams
M.G** PS265
12
Vinyl Bag
2 bags
Disposal
** M.G stands for Molybdenum Grease.
6-5
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
2.
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CLEANING
See Table 6-3 for details of periodic maintenance cleaning for the following parts.
(1) Register Roller
(2) Paper Guide
(3) Paper Exit Roller
(4) Transfer Roller
(5) Paper Discharger
(6) OPC Belt Cartridge
(7) Transfer Drum
(8) Dustproof Glass of the Laser Unit
(9) Printer Interior
(10) Oil Pad
WARNING
x Before starting any maintenance work, make sure you have unplugged the power cable
from the power outlet
x There is a risk of electric shock working on the printer with the power connected.
6-6
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Periodic Maintenance Cleaning Work
Table 6-3
No.
Parts Name
Cleaning Work
Description
Section
1. Open the transfer unit.
1
2
Register Roller
Paper Guide
2. Clean roller and surrounding area using a
dry cloth.
1. Remove the media cassette from the
printer.
Cleaning Cycle *1
(Condition or Case)
2.1
x
Defective image
x
Smeared paper
x
20K prints
2.2
20K prints
2.3
20K prints
2. Clean the paper guide using a dry cloth.
3
Paper Exit
Roller
1. Open the top cover.
2. Clean the paper exit roller using a dry
cloth.
1. Open the transfer unit.
4
5
Transfer Roller
Paper
Discharging
Roller
2. Clean roller and surrounding area using a
dry cloth.
2.4
1. Open the transfer unit.
2. Remove the paper discharger.
2.5
3. Clean the corona wire and case, using a
cotton swab.
1. Remove the OPC belt cartridge.
6
OPC Belt
Cartridge
2. Clean up spilt toner around the OPC belt
cartridge and cleaning blade.
3. Clean the corona wire with a cotton swab.
6-7
2.6
x
Defective image
x
Smeared paper
x
Periodic maintenance
x
Defective image
x
Paper jam
x
Periodic maintenance
x
Defective image
x
Periodic maintenance
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Cleaning Work
Table 6-3
No.
Parts Name
Cleaning Work
Description
Section
1. Remove the transfer drum.
7
8
Transfer Drum
Dustproof
Glass of Laser
Unit
9
Printer Interior
10
Oil Pad
2. Clean the dirt from the transfer drum
surface using a cloth.
1. Remove the toner cartridges and the OPC
belt cartridge.
2. Remove the dust-proof glass.
2.7
2.8
x
Defective image
x
Periodic maintenance
x
Defective image
x
Periodic maintenance
x
Defective image
x
Periodic maintenance
x
Periodic maintenance
3. Using a dry cloth and swab, clean the dirt
from the dust-proof glass.
1. Remove the toner cartridges and OPC
belt cartridge.
2. Clean the printer’s base, using a toner
vacuum cleaner and dry cloth.
2.9
1. Remove the oil pan unit 3.
[Note]
Cleaning Cycle *1
(Condition or Case)
2. Using a slotted screwdriver, clean the
white felt surface of the oil pad and the oil
blade of the oil pan unit 3.
2.10
*1: If a periodic maintenance agreement has been made, checks will be made at every periodic maintenance
service to prevent any problems from occurring.
CAUTION
The register roller, paper guide, and paper exit roller should be cleaned every 20K prints. Failure to do so may cause paper jams inside or outside of
the printer.
6-8
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2.1
Cleaning the Register Roller
The register roller should be cleaned according to the periodic maintenance cleaning cycle
set out in Table 6-3.
Tools to Prepare
Cotton cloth (2 a 3 pieces)
Cleaning Procedure
(1) Turn off the power supply, and unplug the power cable.
(2) Open the rear access cover (transfer unit).
(3) Using a cotton cloth, clean the register roller incorporated in the transfer unit to remove
the paper dust.
Register roller
Transfer unit
Fig. 6-1
CAUTION
NEVER use alcohol or similar solvents for cleaning the register roller.
6-9
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
2.2
Cleaning the Paper Guide
The paper guide should be cleaned according to the periodic maintenance cleaning cycle set
out in Table 6-3.
Tools to Prepare
Cotton cloth (2 a 3 pieces)
Cleaning Procedure
(1) Remove the media cassette from the printer.
(2) Remove paper in the media cassette.
(3) Using a dry cotton cloth, clean the paper guide to remove paper dust.
Paper guide
Fig. 6-2
6-10
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2.3
Cleaning the Paper Exit Roller
The paper exit roller should be cleaned according to the periodic maintenance cleaning cycle
set out in Table 6-3.
Tools to Prepare
Cotton cloth (2 a 3 pieces)
Cleaning Procedure
(1) Turn off the power supply, and unplug the power cable.
(2) Open the top cover (paper exit unit).
(3) Using a dry cotton cloth, clean the paper exit roller to remove paper dust.
Paper exit roller
Fig. 6-3
6-11
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
2.4
Cleaning the Transfer Roller
The transfer roller should be cleaned according to the periodic maintenance cleaning cycle
set out in Table 6-3.
Tools to Prepare
Cotton cloth (2 a 3 pieces)
Cleaning Procedure
(1) Turn off the power supply, and unplug the power cable.
(2) Open the rear access cover (transfer unit).
(3) Using a cotton cloth, clean the transfer roller.
Transfer roller
Transfer unit
Fig. 6-4
CAUTION
NEVER use alcohol or similar solvents for cleaning the transfer roller.
6-12
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2.5
Cleaning the Paper Discharger
The paper discharger should be cleaned according to the periodic maintenance cleaning
cycle set out in Table 6-3.
Tools to Prepare
x Cotton cloth (2 a 3 pieces)
x Cotton swab (2 a 3 pieces)
Cleaning Procedure
(1) Turn off the power supply, and unplug the power cable.
(2) Open the transfer unit.
(3) Remove the paper discharger.
(Fig.6-5)
Paper discharger
Transfer unit
Fig. 6-5
(4) Clean the discharger case housing
with a cotton cloth.
Cotton swab
(5) Clean the corona wire and the inside
of the charger case with a cotton
swab. (Fig.6-6)
Corona wire
(6) Re-install the charger unit into the
transfer unit.
Vinyl string
Fig. 6-6
CAUTION
x Do not break the vinyl cord on top of the discharger unit case when cleaning the
discharger unit.
x Do not break the corona wire.
6-13
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
2.6
Cleaning the OPC Belt Cartridge
The OPC belt cartridge should be cleaned according to the periodic maintenance cleaning
cycle set out in Table 6-3.
PRECAUTION
x Do not directly touch the OPC belt surface with bare
hands or gloves.
x If the belt is exposed for more than two minutes to a light
source of 800 lux, the belt may be damaged.
Tools to Prepare
Cotton cloth (2 a 3 pieces)
Cleaning Procedure
(1) Turn off the power supply.
(2) Open the top cover and the front cover.
(3) Release the belt cartridge lock levers to pull out the OPC belt cartridge.
(4) Clean the OPC belt cartridge.
i) Clean the corona wire with the wire cleaner. Slide it backwards and forwards across
the corona wire several times and then return it to the home position. Failure to
return the cleaner correctly will result in vertical stripes down the printed page.
ii) Clean the OPC belt cartridge case with a cotton cloth.
OPC belt cartridge
Wire cleaner
Fig. 6-7
CAUTION
Do not damage the corona wire when cleaning the corona wire.
6-14
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2.7
Cleaning the Transfer Drum
The transfer drum should be cleaned according to the periodic maintenance cleaning cycle
set out in Table 6-3.
Tools to Prepare
Cotton cloth (2 a 3 pieces)
Cleaning Procedure
(1) Turn off the power supply.
(2) Open the rear access cover.
(3) Clean the surface of the transfer drum with a dry or damp cotton cloth.
Transfer drum
Fig. 6-8
CAUTION
x Be sure to dry the transfer drum completely after cleaning it with a damp cotton cloth.
x Do not clean the transfer drum by using solvent.
x Do not touch the transfer drum surface with bare hands, or scratch it.
6-15
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
2.8
Cleaning the Dustproof Glass in the Laser Unit
The dustproof glass in the laser unit should be cleaned according to the periodic
maintenance cleaning cycle set out in Table 6-3.
Tools to Prepare
x Cotton cloth (2 a 3 pieces)
x Cotton swab (2 a 3 pieces)
Cleaning Procedure
(1) Turn off the power supply.
(2) Open the top cover and the front cover.
(3) Remove the toner cartridges and the OPC belt cartridge.
(4) Open the dust-proof glass from the laser unit.
(5) Clean the surface of the dustproof glass with a cotton swab.
CAUTION
NEVER use alcohol or similar solvents for cleaning the dustproof glass, otherwise it will be a
cause of image failures.
Laser unit
Laser WARNING Label
Fig. 6-9
6-16
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2.9
Cleaning the Printer Interior
The printer interior (bottom) should be cleaned according to the periodic maintenance
cleaning cycle set out in Table 6-3.
Tools to Prepare
x Toner vacuum cleaner
x Cotton cloth (2 a 3 pieces)
Cleaning Procedure
(1) Open the top cover and the front cover.
(2) Remove the toner cartridges and the OPC belt cartridge.
(3) Vacuum up toner scattered on the bottom of printer interior with a vacuum cleaner
designed to handle toner particles.
(4) Clean the printer interior with a cotton cloth and swab.
(5) Replace the removed items.
CAUTION
x Ensure you do not to contact the nozzle of the vacuum cleaner with the terminals in the
printer. Failure to do so will cause damage to the electrical parts in the printer.
x Before cleaning the inside of the printer, protect the transfer drum with paper so that the
nozzle of the cleaner will not directly contact the transfer drum.
Printer interior
Toner vacuum cleaner
Fig. 6-10
6-17
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
2.10
Cleaning the Oil Pad
The oil pad should be cleaned according to the periodic maintenance cleaning cycle set out
in Table 6-3.
When time is due for replacement of the oil pad, the following message appears on the
control panel.*
REPLACE OIL PAD
* The message can be turned OFF to prevent it from appearing on the control panel. Refer
to 32 NEXT CARE INFORMATION, Section 3.3 of Chapter 5.
Tools to Prepare
x
Slotted screwdriver
Cleaning Procedure
(1) Turn off the power supply, and unplug the power cable.
(2) Open the top cover.
(3) Remove the fusing unit from the printer and then remove the oil bottle and the fuser
cleaner form the fusing unit.
(4) Remove the oil pan unit from the fusing unit.
(5) Scour off toner scattered on the white felt surface of the oil pad and on the surface of the
oil blade using the head edge of a slotted screwdriver.
CAUTION
x
Do not scrub the felt too hard, otherwise it may cause damage to it.
White felt
Oil blade
Fig. 6-11
6-18
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
PR2002127
3.
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PARTS
Maintenance Work should be implemented according to the “Periodic Maintenance Parts and Maintenance Cycle” set out in Table 6-4.
Table 6-4: Periodic Maintenance Parts and Maintenance Cycle
No.
Maintenance Parts
Parts Name
No.
Description
Function
Section
Replacement Cycle *1
(Condition or Case)
Consists of the OPC belt and forms an
electrostatic latent image.
4.1
120K images or 12 months
whichever comes first.
LJ2323001 (EC)
Fixes the toner image onto the transported
paper.
4.2
70K prints
Transfer Roller *3
LJ2211001
Transfers the toner image from the
transfer drum onto the transported paper.
4.3
240K prints
4
Paper Discharger
*4
LJ2212001
4.4
120K prints
5
Drum Cleaner *3
LJ2214001
Cleans residual toner from the transfer
drum.
4.5
240K prints
6
Ozone Filter E
LM0310001
Absorbs ozone.
4.6
Every 12 months
Paper Feeding Roller
UH3485001
Separator Pad *5
LJ2317001
Picks up sheets of paper one by one from
the media cassette.
4.7
120K prints
Transfer Drum
LJ2215001
Forms the toner image and transfers it
onto paper.
4.8
600K images
1
OPC Belt Cartridge
2
Fusing Unit *2
3
7
8
Accessory
LJ2322001 (US)
Separates paper from the transfer drum.
6-20
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
PR2002127
9
Oil Pad
LJ2329001
10
Fuser cleaner
Accessory
11
Toner cartridge
Accessory
12
Oil bottle
Accessory
13
Waste toner pack
Accessory
Cleans paper dust from the heat roller.
Cleans the fusing unit.
Supplies toner to the OPC Belt cartridge.
Supplies oil to the fuser unit.
Collects the waste toner.
6-21
4.9
35K prints
4.9
20,000 pages
4.9
K: 14,000 pages/ CMY: 8,500
pages
4.9
12,000 pages
4.9
18,000 pages
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
PR2002127
*1:
These figures are based on an average of 5% coverage of the printable area for one color using A4/Letter-size laser paper. The
frequency of replacement will vary, depending on the complexity of the prints, the percentage of coverage, the size of paper, pages/job,
and the type of media. Transparencies, glossy coated paper, and other specialty media will result in shortened consumable life.
*2:
You can order it as a 70K Kit. (LJ2322001 (US) / LJ2323001 (EC))
*3:
You can order these item as a 240K Kit (including the transfer roller and drum cleaner) (LJ2319001)
*4:
You can order it as a 120K Kit. (LJ2320001)
*5:
You can order them as a PF Kit (including the paper feeding roller and separator pad). (LJ2321001)
** After completing maintenance work, clear the message displayed on the control panel. (Refer to the list below.)
LCD Maintenance Message
(Toner nearly empty)
Consumables
LCD Operator Call Message
Consumables
Toner cartridge
Black
TONER EMPTY K
Toner cartridge
Black
Toner cartridge
Cyan, Magenta, or Yellow
TONER EMPTY CMY
K C M Y
FUSER OIL LOW
Toner cartridge
Cyan, Magenta, or Yellow
Oil bottle
WASTE TONER
Waste Toner Pack
REPLACE FCR
Fuser cleaner
OIL EMPTY
Oil Bottle
REPLACE OPC BELT
OPC belt cartridge
CHANGE FCR
Fuser Cleaner
REPLACE
REPLACE
REPLACE
REPLACE
Fusing unit
Paper discharger
Transfer roller / Drum cleaner
Paper feeding roller / Separator
pad
Paper feeding roller / Separator
pad
Paper feeding roller / Separator
pad
Oil pad
K C M Y
(Toner nearly empty)
FUSER
120K KIT
240K KIT
PF KIT 1
REPLACE PF KIT 2
REPLACE PF KIT 3
REPLACE OIL PAD
6-22
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The printer displays messages on the control panel screen to indicate replacement is due for
most of the periodic maintenance parts in both the Video Controller Mode and the Engine
Controller Mode.
However, the procedure to clear the message differs between the two modes. The following
sections describe the Video Controller Mode messages only and should be used when
replacing parts that have reached their life.
If replacement parts have to be replaced for Service reasons before their life cycle is
completed then the Engine Controller Mode should be used to reset the part life.
4.1
OPC Belt Cartridge Replacement
Criterion of Replacement
The OPC belt cartridge should be replaced with a new one at 120,000 images or 12 months
whichever comes first.
When time is due for replacement of the OPC belt cartridge, the following message appears
on the control panel.
REPLACE OPC BELT
PRECAUTION
x
Do not directly touch the OPC belt surface with bare
hands or gloves.
x
If the belt is exposed for more than two minutes to a light
source of 800 lux, the belt may be damaged.
Replacement Procedure
(1) Press the power button to turn off the printer.
(2) Open the front cover and the top cover.
CAUTION
When installing or removing the OPC belt, be sure to open the front cover first. Failure to do
so will cause the OPC belt to be damaged due to contact with the toner cartridges.
6-21
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
(3) Release the belt cartridge lock levers
at both sides (left & right). (Fig.6-11)
(4) Pull out the OPC belt cartridge.
Belt cartridge
lock lever (Left)
Belt cartridge
lock lever (Right)
Fig. 6-12
(5) Prepare a new belt cartridge.
Tension release pins
(6) Remove the protective sheet from a
new OPC belt cartridge, and then pull
and remove the tension release pins
from both sides (left & right). (Fig.6-12)
Tension
release pins
Protective sheet
Fig. 6-13
(7) Install the new OPC belt cartridge into
the guides at both sides in the printer.
(Fig.6-13)
Guide
Guide
Fig. 6-14
(8) Set the belt cartridge lock levers at both sides (left and right).
(9) Close the top cover and the front cover.
(10) Press the power button to turn on the printer.
(11) The printer starts the warming-up process.
(12) Press any of the Menu buttons (+, -, Set or Back) to take the printer Off Line.
(13) Press + or – until “RESET MENU” appears.
(14) Press Set to proceed to the next menu level, and then press + or – until “PARTS LIFE”
appears.
(15) Press Set, and then press + until “OPC BELT” appears.
(16) Press Set, and then press Go. The printer is now in the READY state.
6-22
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.2
Fusing Unit Replacement
Criterion of Replacement
The fusing unit should be replaced with a new one according to the periodical maintenance
cycle set out in Table 6-4.
When the time is due for replacement of the fusing unit, the following message appears on
the control panel.
REPLACE FUSER
Purpose of Replacement
To prevent the print quality from declining due to the deterioration of the fixing unit’s fuser
rollers.
WARNING
The fusing unit and its surrounding area are very hot. Make sure prior to starting the
replacement work that the fusing unit and its surrounding area are well cooled down,
otherwise you may get burned.
Necessary Tools and Replacement Materials
x
Two or three pieces of cotton cloth for cleaning
x
Fusing unit (one unit)
Work Procedure
Sequence of Disassembling
(1) After turning off the printer, unplug the power cable from the power outlet.
(2) Open the top cover.
(3) Remove the two screws securing the
fusing unit. (Fig.6-14)
Screw
Fig. 6-15
(4) Holding the handles at both ends of
the fusing unit and remove the fusing
unit from the printer. (Fig.6-15)
(5) Remove the oil bottle and the fuser
cleaner.
Fusing unit
Fig. 6-16
6-23
Screw
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
x
When removing the fusing unit, take care to keep the unit level so that no oil leakage or
spillage occurs.
x
When shipping the printer, remove the oil bottle and the fuser cleaner from the fusing unit.
After removing the oil bottle, be sure to remove the oil remaining in the fusing unit with the
supplied syringe. Failure to do so will cause severe damage to the printer.
Sequence of Replacement
(1) Prepare a new fusing unit before
starting the replacement work.
(2) Set the fusing unit pressure release
levers to the SET position. (Fig.6-16)
Pressure
release lever
(3) Install the oil bottle and fuser cleaner
to the new fusing unit.
Pressure release
lever
Fig. 6-17
Sequence of Assembling
(1) Install the new fusing unit onto the
printer. (Fig. 6-17)
i) After setting the fusing unit in place,
lightly press down the unit to firmly
connect to the connector on the
base.
ii) Tighten the two screws to secure the
fusing unit.
Fusing unit
iii) Close the top cover.
Fig. 6-18
PRECAUTION
When replacing the fusing unit, take time and great care to complete the job properly.
Application of strong force to the fusing unit may result in the failure of the fusing unit and
other parts.
6-24
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(2) Plug the power cable into the power outlet and turn on the printer.
(3) Upon completion of the warming-up process.
(4) Press any of the Menu buttons (+, -, Set or Back) to take the printer Off Line.
(5) Press + or – until “RESET MENU” appears.
(6) Press Set to proceed to the next menu level, and then press + or – until “PARTS LIFE”
appears.
(7) Press Set, and then press + until “FUSER UNIT” appears.
(8) Press Set, and then press Go. The printer is now in the READY state
NOTE:
When installing the new fusing unit into the printer, you have to wait approximately for 30
minutes after the unit is installed to allow the fusing oil to circulate in the unit.
6-25
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
4.3
Transfer Roller Replacement
Criterion of Replacement
The transfer roller should be replaced at the same time as a new discharger according to the
periodical maintenance cycle set out in Table 6-4.
When time is due for replacement of the transfer roller, the following message appears on the
control panel.
REPLACE 240K KIT
Purpose of Replacement
To prevent the transfer efficiency declining due to deterioration of the transfer roller.
Necessary Tools and Replacement Materials
1) Two or three pieces of cotton cloth for cleaning.
2) Transfer roller (one unit)
Work Procedures
Sequence of Disassembling
(1) After turning off the printer, unplug the
power cable from the power outlet.
(2) Open the rear access cover. (Fig.6-18)
Rear access cover
Fig. 6-19
Sequence of Replacement
(1) Lift the transfer roller lock levers to
release both ends of the roller. (Fig.619)
Transfer roller
Lock lever
Fig. 6-20
6-26
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(2) Pull up the transfer roller to remove it.
(Fig.6-20)
(3) Install a new transfer roller into the
printer.
(4) Fix the transfer roller with the lock
levers.
Transfer roller
Fig. 6-21
Sequence of Assembling
(1) Close the rear access cover.
(2) Plug the power cable into the power outlet and turn on the printer.
(3) Upon completion of the warming-up process.
(4) Press any of the Menu buttons (+, -, Set or Back) to take the printer Off Line.
(5) Press + or – until “RESET MENU” appears.
(6) Press Set to proceed to the next menu level, and then press + or – until “PARTS LIFE”
appears.
(7) Press Set, and then press + until “240K KIT” appears.
(8) Press Set, and then press Go. The printer is now in the READY state.
6-27
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
4.4
Paper Discharger Replacement
Criterion of Replacement
The paper discharger should be replaced with a new discharger at the same time as the
transfer roller according to the periodical maintenance cycle set out in Table 6-4.
When time is due for replacement of paper discharger, the following message appears on the
control panel.
REPLACE 120K KIT
Purpose of Replacement
To prevent the discharging efficiency from declining due to deterioration of the paper
discharger.
PRECAUTION
Do not touch the corona wire of the paper discharger.
Necessary Tools and Replacement Materials
1) Two or three pieces of cotton cloth for cleaning
2) Paper discharger (one unit)
Work Procedures
Sequence of Disassembling
(1) After turning off the printer, unplug the power cable from the power outlet.
(2) Open the rear access cover. (Fig.6-21)
Rear access cover
Fig. 6-22
6-28
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Sequence of Replacement
(1) Pull the right hand side of the paper
discharger slightly, then lift it out of the
transfer unit to remove the paper
discharger. (Fig.6-22)
Paper discharger
Fig. 6-23
(2) Clean the area where the paper
discharger is mounted. (Fig.6-23)
(3) Install the new paper discharger into
the transfer unit.
Fig. 6-24
Sequence of Assembling
(1) Close the rear access cover.
(2) Plug the power cable into the printer, and turn on the printer.
(3) Upon completion of the warming-up process.
(4) Press any of the Menu buttons (+, -, Set or Back) to take the printer Off Line.
(5) Press + or – until “RESET MENU” appears.
(6) Press Set to proceed to the next menu level, and then press + or – until “PARTS LIFE”
appears.
(7) Press Set, and then press + until “120K KIT” appears.
(8) Press Set, and then press Go. The printer is now in the READY state.
6-29
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
4.5
Drum Cleaner Replacement
Criterion of Replacement
The drum cleaner should be replaced with a new one according to the periodical
maintenance cycle set out in Table 6-4.
When time is due for replacement of the drum cleaner, the following message appears on the
control panel.
REPLACE 240K KIT
Purpose of Replacement
To prevent the cleaning efficiency from declining due to deterioration of the drum cleaner.
PRECAUTION
When installing the drum cleaner, firstly locate the bearing and the bias pole into the
contacts. Reconfirm this connection prior to testing the printer.
Necessary Tools and Replacement Materials
x
Two or three pieces of cotton cloth for cleaning.
x
Drum cleaner (one unit)
Work Procedure
Sequence of Disassembling
(1) Turn off the printer.
(2) Open the top cover.
Sequence of Replacement
(1) Remove the cleaner cover by releasing
the two hooks.(Fig.6-24)
(hook)
Cleaner cover
(hook)
Fig. 6-25
6-30
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Drum cleaner
(2) Holding the handle located on the top
of the drum cleaner, push it
backwards.
(3) Remove the drum cleaner by lifting it
out. (Fig.6-25)
Fig. 6-26
(4) Clean the area where the drum cleaner
is mounted. (Fig.6-26)
(5) Install a new drum cleaner into the
printer.
Fig. 6-27
CAUTION
When installing the drum cleaner, be sure to put it into the printer correctly, indicated by a
click.
Sequence of Assembling
(1) Install the cleaner cover.
(2) Close the top cover.
(3) Press the power button to turn on the printer.
(4) Upon completion of the warming-up process.
(5) Press any of the Menu buttons (+, -, Set or Back) to take the printer Off Line.
(6) Press + or – until “RESET MENU” appears.
(7) Press Set to proceed to the next menu level, and then press + or – until “PARTS LIFE”
appears.
(8) Press Set, and then press + until “240K KIT” appears.
(9) Press Set, and then press Go. The printer is now in the READY state.
6-31
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
4.6
Ozone Filter Replacement
Criterion of Replacement
Although the maintenance message indicating ozone filter replacement is not displayed on
the LCD, the ozone filter should be replaced with a new one according to the periodical
maintenance cycle set out in Table 6-4. This is to prevent ozone from being exhausted due
to the deterioration of the ozone filter.
PRECAUTION
Ozone filter should be replaced with a new filter every 12 months, otherwise it may cause an
offensive smell.
Necessary Tools and Replacement Materials
No special tools and equipment are necessary for the replacement of the ozone filter.
Work Procedure
(1) Remove the ozone filter case provided at the rear of the side cover (R).
(2) Remove the ozone filter from the ozone filter case.
(3) Install a new ozone filter to the filter case.
(4) Install the ozone filter case to the side cover (R).
Ozone filter
Filter case
Fig. 6-28
6-32
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.7
Paper Feeding Roller and Separator Pad Replacement
Criterion of Replacement
The paper feeding roller and separator pad should be replaced with new ones according to
the periodical maintenance cycle set out in Table 6-4.
When time is due for replacement of the paper feeding roller and separator pad, the following
message appears on the control panel.
REPLACE PF KIT1
NOTE:
The message above indicates that the paper feeding roller and separator pad in the original
media cassette should be replaced. When the ones in the optional lower tray 1 or 2 are
replaced, the message such as ‘REPLACE PF KIT2’ or ‘REPLACE PF KIT3’ are displayed.
They also should be replaced when paper feed jams occur.
Work Procedure
(1) Whenever paper feed jams occur, confirm the cause by following the information in
Section 3 of Chapter 8.
(2) If the paper jam still occurs, replace the paper feeding roller and separator pad referring
to Section 4.6.5 of Chapter 7.
Separator pad
Paper feeding roller
Fig. 6-29
CAUTION
x
This is one of the periodic replacement items, not customer service. It should be
implemented upon request of the customer or at periodic maintenance.
x
After replacement, confirm the improvement of paper jam problems by test printing.
6-33
CHAPTER 6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
4.8
Transfer Drum Replacement
Criterion of Replacement
The transfer drum should be replaced with a new one according to the periodical
maintenance cycle set out in the Table 6-4.
When time is due for replacement of the transfer drum, the following message appears on
the control panel.
REPLACE TRF DRUM
It should be also replaced when an image failure occurs due to transfer drum damage.
Work Procedure
(1) Whenever an image failure occurs, confirm the cause by following the information in
Section 5 of Chapter VIII.
(2) If the image failure still occurs, replace the transfer drum referring to Section 4.2.10 of
Chapter 7.
Transfer drum
Fig. 6-30
CAUTION
x
This is one of the periodic replacement items, not customer service. It should be
implemented upon request of the customer or at periodic maintenance.
x
After replacement, confirm the improvement of print quality failure by test printing.
6-34
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.9
Oil Pad Replacement
Criterion of Replacement
The oil pad should be replaced with a new one according to the periodical maintenance cycle
set out in the Table 6-4.
When time is due for replacement of the oil pad, the following message appears on the
control panel.*
REPLACE OIL PAD
* The message can be turned OFF to prevent it from appearing on the control panel. Refer
to 32 NEXT CARE INFORMATION, Section 3.3 of Chapter 5.
Work Procedure
Replace the oil pad referring to Section 4.7.1 of Chapter 7.
Oil pad
Oil pan unit 3
Fig. 6-31
6-35
CHAPTER 7
DISASSEMBLY &
RE-ASSEMBLY
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY................................ 7-4
1. BEFORE STARTING DISASSEMBLY.............................................................. 7-4
1.1 Precautions .............................................................................................................................. 7-4
1.2 Preparation of Disassembly ..................................................................................................... 7-4
2 PARTS NAME.................................................................................................... 7-6
2.1 Cover ....................................................................................................................................... 7-6
2.2 Circuit Boards (PWBs) ............................................................................................................. 7-7
2.3 Motor Units............................................................................................................................... 7-7
2.4 Clutches ................................................................................................................................... 7-8
2.5 Sensors.................................................................................................................................... 7-8
3. DISASSEMBLY FLOW ..................................................................................... 7-9
4. DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE....................................................................... 7-10
4.1 Right Side of the Printer......................................................................................................... 7-10
4.1.1 Side cover 3 (R) .............................................................................................................. 7-10
4.1.2 Base cover 3 (R) ............................................................................................................. 7-11
4.1.3 Main motor 3 (MM) .......................................................................................................... 7-12
4.1.4 Developer drive motor 3 (DM) ......................................................................................... 7-13
4.1.5 IOD2 PWB....................................................................................................................... 7-14
4.1.6 Registration clutch........................................................................................................... 7-15
4.1.7 TR cam clutch 3 .............................................................................................................. 7-15
4.1.8 Cleaner clutch 3 / Cleaner cam clutch 3 / Fuser clutch 3................................................ 7-16
4.1.9 Ozone fan (OZFAN) (Cooling fan (OZ)) .......................................................................... 7-17
4.1.10 BD3 gear assembly ....................................................................................................... 7-18
4.1.11 Main gear unit 3............................................................................................................. 7-18
4.1.12 Paper feeding clutch / EP3 gear assembly ................................................................... 7-19
4.1.13 WT holder assembly...................................................................................................... 7-19
4.1.14 Developer drive unit 3 ................................................................................................... 7-20
4.1.15 Developer clutch 3 (K, Y, M, C)..................................................................................... 7-21
4.1.16 Toner sensor (TPD) ...................................................................................................... 7-21
4.1.17 Waste toner feeder (L) .................................................................................................. 7-22
4.2 Top of the Printer ................................................................................................................... 7-23
4.2.1 Upper side cover (LU) (Upper side cover 3 (L)) .............................................................. 7-23
4.2.2 Panel PWB (including LCD) ............................................................................................ 7-24
4.2.3 Side cover 3 (L) ............................................................................................................... 7-24
4.2.4 Base cover 3 (L) .............................................................................................................. 7-25
4.2.5 Upper cover (Top cover 3) .............................................................................................. 7-26
4.2.6 Side cover (LF) (Side front cover 3 (L))........................................................................... 7-26
4.2.7 IOD1 PWB....................................................................................................................... 7-27
4.2.8 Control fan (CTFAN) (Cooling fan (PS))/ Interlock switch (Top) ..................................... 7-27
4.2.9 Belt sensor (PBS)............................................................................................................ 7-29
4.2.10 Transfer drum 3............................................................................................................. 7-29
4.2.11 Erase lamp 3 / Erase holder.......................................................................................... 7-30
4.2.12 Drum jam sensor (DPJ)................................................................................................. 7-31
4.2.13 Oil sensor (OIL) ............................................................................................................. 7-31
7-2
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.3 Left Side of the Printer ........................................................................................................... 7-32
4.3.1 Video Controller PCB ...................................................................................................... 7-32
4.3.2 MCTL PWB ..................................................................................................................... 7-34
4.3.3 High-voltage power supply unit (High voltage unit 3) ...................................................... 7-35
4.3.4 Interlock switch (Rear) .................................................................................................... 7-36
4.3.5 Drum encoder sensor (PS4) ........................................................................................... 7-37
4.3.6 Fuser connector 3 ........................................................................................................... 7-37
4.3.7 Rear cover 3 (R).............................................................................................................. 7-38
4.3.8 Low-voltage power-supply unit (Power supply unit 3 (EC)(US)) ..................................... 7-38
4.3.9 Interlock switch (Front) (for front cover) .......................................................................... 7-40
4.3.10 Toner key sensor (TNK)................................................................................................ 7-41
4.3.11 Toner sensor (TTR)....................................................................................................... 7-41
4.4 Paper Exit Unit ....................................................................................................................... 7-42
4.4.1 Rear cover 3 (U).............................................................................................................. 7-42
4.4.2 Top cover (Paper exit unit 3) / Fuser fan (FUFAN) (Cooling fan (EX)) ........................... 7-42
4.4.3 Cleaning roller sensor (PS5) ........................................................................................... 7-44
4.4.4 Paper full sensor (PS6) ................................................................................................... 7-44
4.4.5 Paper exit sensor (PS2) .................................................................................................. 7-45
4.4.6 Discharger brush (Discharging brush 3) ......................................................................... 7-45
4.4.7 Paper exit roller 3 ............................................................................................................ 7-46
4.5 Front of the Printer ................................................................................................................. 7-47
4.5.1 Front outer cover (Front cover 3) .................................................................................... 7-47
4.5.2 Front cover unit 3 ............................................................................................................ 7-47
4.5.3 Laser unit (scanner motor inclusive) (Optical Unit 3) ...................................................... 7-49
4.6 Rear of the Printer.................................................................................................................. 7-50
4.6.1 Rear access cover (TR unit cover 3) / Transfer unit 3 .................................................... 7-50
4.6.2 Transfer roller 3 ............................................................................................................... 7-51
4.6.3 Register roller .................................................................................................................. 7-51
4.6.4 Paper size sensor 3 (PSU).............................................................................................. 7-52
4.6.5 Paper feeding roller / Separator pad (2).......................................................................... 7-52
4.6.6 Paper empty sensor (PS3) / OHP sensor 3 (OHP) ......................................................... 7-53
4.6.7 Paper feeding sensor (PS1) ............................................................................................ 7-54
4.7 Fusing Unit............................................................................................................................. 7-54
4.7.1 Oil pan unit 3 ................................................................................................................... 7-55
4.7.2 Oil pad ............................................................................................................................. 7-55
4.7.3 Fusing heater lamp (Fusing heater 3 (US)(EC)) ............................................................. 7-56
NOTE:
Parts names printed in light blue color are the parts names used in the HL-3450CN Parts Reference
List.
7-3
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
CHAPTER 7
1.
1.1
DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
BEFORE STARTING DISASSEMBLY
Precautions
Follow the precautions described below during maintenance work.
(1) Do not implement any operation, disassembly or modification which is not set out in this
manual.
(2) This printer incorporates dangerous parts subject to warnings such as “High
Temperature”, “High Voltage” and “Laser Radiation”. Before starting any work on this
printer, make sure you have read and understand the warnings set out in this manual.
(3) Collect and dispose of any waste toner cartridges removed during maintenance correctly
in accordance with local regulations. Do not dispose of them with inflammable materials
or dispose of them into a fire.
(4) The grounding wire is disconnected when replacing or removing the DC power supply
unit. After completing the replacement work, confirm that the grounding wire is
reconnected correctly to the earth mark
.
(5) Ensure that the type and length of screws removed during replacement of maintenance
parts is noted and the correct screws are used during re-assembly. (See Table 7-1.)
(6) Do not use any solvent such as alcohol for the maintenance of this printer.
(7) Confirm that all the parts and covers are installed or assembled correctly before starting
the test run after replacement of maintenance parts.
(8) The re-assembly order is the reverse of the dis-assembly order. In all cases, follow the
flow chart in reverse to re-assemble the printer. Where there is any change to the order,
this is noted in the relevant section.
1.2
Preparation of Disassembly
Follow the procedure described below for preparation before commencing any work.
(1) Ensure that the power cable is disconnected from the power outlet.
(2) Remove all consumable parts (OPC belt cartridge, fuser cleaner, oil bottle, all toner
cartridges, ozone filter), the Main (Video controller) PCB, Fusing unit and Fuser
cleaner, and then store them correctly before starting disassembly.
PRECAUTION
x
Do not directly touch the OPC belt
surface with bare hands or gloves.
x
If the belt is exposed for more than two
minutes to a light source of 800 lux, the
belt may be damaged.
7-4
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Table 7-1: Table of Screw Sizes Used in the Printer
Class Code
Size and Shape of Screw
Name of Screw
Remarks
M-Thread
TS
Length
BT3x8
T3
8mm
BT3x12
T3
10mm
T4
6mm
BT4x8
T4
8mm
BT4x10
T4
10mm
ST
6mm
M4
6mm
Used for
frame.
Used for
GND.
Cross head tapping
screw
Sharp
Used for
plastic parts.
ST3x6
ST4x6
M4x6
S tight screw
Cross head tapping
screw (Pan head)
M4x6
Cross head screw
(Brass)
M4
6mm
SP3x10
Unique screw for
heater connector.
M3
10mm
F3x6
Cross head screw
with flange.
Used for steel
parts fitted to
steel plates.
4
10
6mm
M3
For laser unit
10mm
SP4x9
Unique screw for
panel case
Used for the
fusing unit
connector.
M4
9mm
4
Used for the
panel case.
9
M3x6
Cross head screw
with washer.
M3
6mm
Used for the
fusing unit.
FST3x10
Cross head S tight
screw with flange.
FST
10mm
Used for
fusing unit.
7-5
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
2.
2.1
PARTS NAME
Cover
Front View
Upper cover
4.2.5
Control panel
Top cover
(Paper exit unit cover)
4.4.2
Side cover (LF)
4.2.6
Power button
Side cover (R)
4.1.1
Front outer cover
4.5.1
Base cover (R)
4.1.2
Media cassette
Fig. 7-1
Rear View
Paper exit upper cover
4.4.2
Upper side cover (LU)
4.2.1
Side cover (L)
4.2.3
Rear cover (U)
4.4.1
Rear access cover
4.6.1
Rear cover (R)
4.3.7
Base cover (L)
4.2.4
Controller box
Fig. 7-2
7-6
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2.2
Circuit Boards (PWBs)
Erase lamp
4.2.11
IOD2 PWB
4.1.5
Panel PWB
4.2.2
High-voltage power
supply PCB
4.3.3
IOD1 PWB
4.2.7
MCTL PWB
4.3.2
Video controller
PCB
4.3.1
Low-voltage
power supply PCB
4.3.8
Fig. 7-3
2.3
Motor Units
Ozone fan
(Cooling fan (OZ))
4.1.9
Fuser fan
(Cooling fan (EX))
4.4.2
Main motor (MM)
4.1.3
Control fan
(Cooling fan (PS))
4.2.8
Developer drive motor (DM)
4.1.4
Scanner motor
4.5.3
Fig. 7-4
7-7
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
2.4
Clutches
Cleaner cam clutch
Fuser clutch
4.1.8
Cleaner clutch
TR cam clutch
4.1.7
Registration clutch
4.1.6
Paper feeding clutch
4.1.12
Developer clutch (K)
Developer clutch (Y)
4.1.15
Developer clutch (M)
Developer clutch (C)
Fig. 7-5
2.5
Sensors
Temperature sensor (TH)
(Thermistor)
Cleaning
Paper full sensor roller sensor
4.4.4
(PS6) 4.4.3 (PS5)
Paper exit sensor
4.4.5
(PS2)
Oil sensor 4.2.13
(OIL)
Drum jam sensor (DPJ)
4.2.12
Toner sensor
(TPD) 4.1.16
Toner sensor
(TTR) 4.3.11
Interlock switch (Top)
4.2.8
Toner sensor
assembly
Belt sensor (PBS)
4.2.9
Interlock switch (Front)
4.3.9
Interlock switch (Rear)
4.3.4
Drum encoder sensor
4.3.5
(PS4)
Home position sensor
(GHP1/GHP2)
OHP sensor
4.6.6 (OHP)
Waste toner sensor (WTS)
4.1.13
Paper feeding sensor
4.6.7
(PS1)
Paper empty sensor
4.6.6
(PS3)
Paper size sensor
4.6.4
(PSU)
Toner key sensor (TNK)
4.3.10
Fig. 7-6
7-8
3. DISASSEMBLY FLOW
6.REAR
(Transfer Unit)
4.PAPER EXIT
UNIT
1. RIGHT SIDE
Side Cover (R)
2.TOP
4.1.1
Panel PWB
(LCD inclusive)
4.2.2
Upper Side
Cover (LU)
Rear Cover (U)
3.LEFT SIDE
4.2.1
Video Controller PCB
4.4.1
Rear Access Cover
Transfer Unit
4.3.1
Top Cover
4.4.2
4.1.2
Base Cover (R)
Side Cover (L)
BD3
Gear Assembly
Main Motor
IOD2 PWB
MCTL PWB
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.2.4
High-voltage Power
Supply Unit
Upper Cover
4.1.5
Cleaning Roller
Sensor (PS)
4.4.3
Interlock Switch
(Rear)
Paper Full
Sensor (PS)
4.4.4
4.3.4
4.3.5
Paper Exit
Sensor (PS)
4.4.5
Drum Encoder
Sensor (PS)
Fuser Connector
4.3.6
4.1.11
4.1.4
Paper Feeding
Clutch
EP3
Gear Assembly
4.2.5
4.1.12
Side Cover (LF)
4.2.6
TR Cam Clutch
Cleaner Clutch
4.1.6
WT Holder
Assembly
4.1.13
Developer Drive
Unit
4.1.14
IOD1 PWB
4.1.8
Control Fan
Cleaner Cam Clutch
4.2.8
Interlock Switch
(Top)
Fuser Clutch
Developer Clutch
4.1.15
Low-voltage Power
Supply Unit
4.3.8
Interlock
Switch (Front)
Toner Key Sensor
(TNK)
4.3.9
Toner Sensor
(TTR)
Toner Sensor
(TPD)
Erase Lamp
Transfer Drum
Waste Toner
Feeder (L)
4.1.17
4.2.10
4.4.6
Paper Exit Roller
4.4.7
4.6.5
Separator Pad
Paper Empty
Sensor(PS)
OHP Sensor
(OHP)
Paper Feeding
Sensor (PS)
4.6.6
4.6.7
7. FUSING
UNIT
5. FRONT
4.1.16
4.6.4
4.3.11
Belt Sensor(PBS)
4.1.9
Paper Size
Sensor (PSU)
4.3.10
4.2.9
Ozone Fan
4.6.3
4.3.7
4.2.7
4.1.7
Discharger Brush
4.6.2
Register Roller
Paper Feed Roller
Rear Cover (R)
Registration Clutch
Transfer Roller
Fuser Fan
4.1.10
Base Cover (L)
Main Gear Unit
Developer
Drive Motor
4.2.3
4.1.3
4.6.1
4.2.11
Front Outer Cover
4.5.1
Oil Pan Unit
4.7.1
Oil Pad
4.7.2
Fusing Heater
Lamp
4.5.3
Erase Holder
Drum Jam
Sensor (DPJ)
Oil Sensor (OIL)
4.2.12
Front Cover Unit
4.5.2
4.2.13
Laser Unit
7-9
4.5.3
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.
DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
4.1
Right Side of the Printer
4.1.1
Side cover 3 (R)
(1) Remove the set screw BT4x10 (1 pc.) of side cover 3 (R) at the rear of the printer.
Side cover 3 (R)
Fig. 7-7
(2) Slide the side cover 3 (R) in the direction of the arrows as shown in Fig.7-8.
(3) Remove the side cover 3 (R) by releasing the two hooks.
?
@
(hook)
Front cover unit 3
Side cover 3 (R)
Fig. 7-8
7-10
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.1.2
Base cover 3 (R)
(1) Remove the set screws BT4x10 (2 pcs.) from the base cover 3 (R).
(2) Remove the base cover 3 (R) from the base.
Base cover 3 (R)
Fig. 7-9
PRECAUTION
x
When assembling the base cover, insert the leading edge of the base cover 3 (R) into the
two hooks provided at the bottom (left and right) of the base plate.
x
Ensure that the projecting part (
the base plate bottom.
) of the base cover 3 (R) goes into the three holes in
Base plate
Hole
(projecting part)
Base cover 3 (R)
(hook)
Fig. 7-10
7-11
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.1.3
Main motor 3 (MM)
CAUTION
Take care not to stress the motor drive PCB when removing the connector or handling the
motor / PCB assembly.
(1) Disconnect the cable (1 pc.) from the main motor 3 PCB.
(2) Remove the tapping screws ST3x6 (4 pcs.) holding the main motor assembly.
(3) Remove the main motor 3 with the mounting plate from the main frame.
Main motor 3
Fig. 7-11
7-12
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.1.4
Developer drive motor 3 (DM)
CAUTION
Take care not to stress the motor drive PCB when removing the connector or handling the
motor / PCB assembly.
(1) Disconnect the connector (1 pc.) from the developer drive motor PCB.
(2) Remove the fixing screws ST3x6 (4 pcs.) holding the developer drive motor 3 to the
developer drive unit 3.
(3) Remove the developer drive motor 3.
Developer drive motor 3
Fig. 7-12
7-13
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.1.5
IOD2 PWB
(1) Disconnect all the harness connectors (15 pcs.) connected to the IOD2 PWB.
(2) Remove the fixing screw ST3x6 (1 pc.) from the IOD2 PWB.
(3) Remove the IOD2 PWB from the main frame.
PRECAUTION
When handling the IOD2 PWB take care not to cause electrostatic damage to the PWB.
IOD2 PWB
Fig. 7-13
7-14
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.1.6
Registration clutch
(1) Remove the outer plastic C ring from the shaft.
(2) Pull out the registration clutch from the shaft.
Registration clutch
C ring
Fig. 7-14
4.1.7
TR cam clutch 3
(1) Remove the outer plastic C ring from the shaft.
(2) Pull out the TR cam clutch 3 from the shaft.
TR cam clutch 3
C ring
Fig. 7-15
7-15
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.1.8
Cleaner clutch 3 / Cleaner cam clutch 3 / Fuser clutch 3
(1) Remove the outer plastic C ring from the shaft of each of the clutches.
(2) Pull out the cleaner clutch 3, Cleaner cam clutch 3 and fuser clutch 3 from their shafts at
the same time.
Cleaner cam clutch 3
C ring
Fuser clutch 3
C ring
C ring
Cleaner clutch 3
Fig. 7-16
NOTE:
When re-assembling the clutches, identify each of them referring to the features below;
x
White gear (with no spring): Cleaner clutch 3
x
White gear (with a spring):
Cleaner cam clutch 3
x
Black gear:
Fuser clutch 3
The cleaner cam clutch is identical to the TR cam clutch.
7-16
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.1.9
Ozone fan (OZFAN) (Cooling fan (OZ))
(1) Remove the screws ST3x6 (3 pcs.) and BT4x8 (1 pc.) to remove the stay (R).
(2) Remove the set screw ST3x6 (1 pc.) to remove the ozone fan case with the duct from
the main frame.
Stay (R)
BT4x8 (Black)
Ozone fan case
Fig. 7-17
(3) Remove the tape to remove the ozone fan case from the fan duct.
(4) Remove the ozone fan from the fan case.
Ozone fan duct
Ozone fan case
Ozone fan duct
Fig. 7-18
7-17
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.1.10
BD3 gear assembly
(1) Remove the screws ST3x6 (3 pcs.) from the BD3 gear assembly.
(2) Remove the BD3 gear assembly from the frame.
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the set screws BT4x10 (2 pcs.) from the upper cover before removing the
screws ST3x6 (3 pcs.) from the BD3 gear assembly.
BD3 gear assembly
Fig. 7-19
4.1.11
Main gear unit 3
(1) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (4 pcs.) from the main gear unit 3.
(2) Remove the main gear unit 3 from the frame.
Main gear unit 3
Fig. 7-20
7-18
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.1.12
Paper feeding clutch / EP3 gear assembly
(1) Remove the set screw ST3x6 (1 pc.) to remove the metal retainer.
(2) Remove the outer plastic C ring from the shaft.
(3) Remove the paper feeding clutch from the shaft.
(4) Remove the set screw ST3x6 (2 pcs.) from the EP3 gear assembly.
Paper feeding clutch
C ring
Metal retainer
EP3 gear assembly
Fig. 7-21
4.1.13
WT holder assembly
(1) Open the front cover.
(2) Remove the set screw ST3x6 (1 pc.) from the frame.
(3) Remove the set screw ST3x6 (1 pc.) from the WT holder assembly and remove the
holder from the frame. Note that the waste toner sensor is assembled onto the WT
holder assembly.
WT holder assembly
Fig. 7-22
7-19
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.1.14
Developer drive unit 3
(1) Remove the set screw ST3x6 (1pc.) to remove the cover RF.
(2) Release the harnesses from the harness holder.
(3) Remove the developer drive gear for each color toner from the inside of the developer
driver unit 3.
(4) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (4 pcs.) to remove the developer drive unit 3 from the
main frame.
NOTE
The gears removed in (3) must be replaced with new gears every time, do not re-use the
removed gears.
Four gears are supplied with a replacement developer drive unit 3.
Developer drive gear
Developer drive unit 3
Cover RF
Metal retainer
Fig. 7-23
CAUTION
When disassembling the developer drive unit 3, be sure not to lose the metal retainer holding
the unit.
7-20
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.1.15
Developer clutch 3 (K, Y, M, C)
(1) Remove the inner E ring and washer of each developer clutch 3 from the shaft.
(2) Pull out the developer clutch 3 and shaft from the bearing.
NOTE:
One gear is included with each replacement developer clutch 3.
E ring
Washer
Developer clutch 3
Fig. 7-24
4.1.16
Toner sensor (TPD)
(1) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (2 pcs.) from the toner sensor PCB.
(2) Disconnect the connector to the toner sensor PCB.
(3) Remove the toner sensor PCB from the main frame.
Toner sensor (TPD)
Fig. 7-25
7-21
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.1.17
Waste toner feeder (L)
NOTE:
The waste toner feeder (L) is composed of the plastic tube and auger spring gear unit.
(1) Remove the screw ST3x6 (1 pc.) holding the metal plate of the waste toner feeder.
(2) Pull out the waste toner feeder (L) from the main frame.
Metal plate
Waste toner feeder (L)
Fig. 7-26
CAUTION
Be sure to vacuum up waste toner remaining inside the plastic tube with a vacuum cleaner
before removing the plastic tube.
7-22
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.2
Top of the Printer
4.2.1
Upper side cover (LU) (Upper side cover 3 (L))
(1) Open the top cover.
(2) Remove the set screw BT4x10 securing the upper side cover (LU).
(3) Press the exterior of the side cover 3 inwards and unlock the hooks (three locations)
from the upper side cover (LU). (Fig.7-28)
Upper side cover (LU)
Fig. 7-27
Upper side cover (LU)
(hook)
PUSH
Side cover 3 (L)
Fig. 7-28
7-23
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.2.2
Panel PWB (including LCD)
(1) Remove the shoulder screw SP4x9* (1 pc.) from the panel case assembly and
disconnect the connector.
(2) Remove the set screws BT3x8 (4 pcs.) from the panel PWB and remove the panel shield
plate, PWB, LCD and panel button from the panel case assembly.
* The screw securing the panel case assembly is unique.
Panel case
Panel case
assembly
LCD PCB
Panel button
Panel PWB
Panel shield plate
Fig. 7-29
NOTE:
When disassembling the panel PWB, be sure you do not to lose the earthing plate hooked
onto the panel shield plate. Ensure it is fitted correctly during re-assembly.
4.2.3
Side cover 3 (L)
(1) Remove the set screw BT4x10 (2 pcs.) of side cover 3 (L).
(2) Slowly pull up the side cover 3 (L) and release the hook from the front of the upper cover
(top cover 3).
(hook)
Side cover 3 (L)
Fig. 7-30
7-24
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.2.4
Base cover 3 (L)
(1) Remove the set screws BT4x10 (2 pcs.) from the base cover 3 (L).
(2) Remove the base cover 3 (L) from the base by releasing it from the front of the printer
first.
Base cover 3 (L)
Fig. 7-31
PRECAUTION
x
When re-assembling the base cover, insert the leading edge of the base cover 3 (L) into
the hook provided at the bottom (left and right) of the base plate.
x
Ensure that the projecting part (
plate bottom.
) of the base cover 3 (L) goes into the hole in the base
Base plate
Hole
(projecting part)
Base cover 3 (R)
(hook)
Fig. 7-32
7-25
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.2.5
Upper cover (Top cover 3)
(1) Open the front cover and release the belt cartridge lock levers.
(2) Remove the side cover 3 (R). (Refer to subsection 4.1.1 in this chapter.)
(3) Remove the set screws BT4x10 (2 pcs.) securing the upper cover. (Top x 1 and Right
hand side x 1)
(4) Slightly lift up the rear edge of the upper cover.
(5) Pull the upper cover toward you and unhook the hook at the front of the cover from the
frame.
Upper cover
(hook)
Fig. 7-33
4.2.6
Side cover (LF) (Side front cover 3 (L))
(1) Remove the set screw TS4x10 (1 pc.) of the side cover (LF).
(2) Release the hook from the frame while pulling the side cover (LF) upward, then remove
the side cover (LF).
Side cover (LF)
Fig. 7-34
7-26
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.2.7
IOD1 PWB
(1) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (4 pcs.) from the shield (upper).
(2) Disconnect all the harness connectors (16 pcs.) connected to the IOD1 PWB. Note that
the DCN3 connector is a link plug and need not be removed unless necessary. (Refer to
the figure below.)
(3) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (6 pcs.) from the IOD1 PWB.
(4) Remove the IOD1 PWB.
Shield cover (Upper)
IOD1 PWB
Fig. 7-35
PRECAUTION
When handling the IOD1 PWB, take care that no damage is caused due to electrostatic
charges.
4.2.8
Control fan (CTFAN) (Cooling fan (PS)) / Interlock switch (Top) (Paper exit unit)
(1) Remove the ozone filter.
(2) Remove the set screw ST3x6 (1 pc.) to remove the control fan case assembly.
Control fan assembly
Ozone filter
Fig. 7-36
7-27
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
(3) Remove the fan motor and interlock switch from the fan case after releasing the fan
cover plastic clips.
Control fan case
Fan motor
Control fan case
Fig. 7-37
(4) Remove the interlock switch and operating arm from the case.
CAUTION
Since the interlock switch is an important safety item, after installation confirm that the switch
operates correctly.
Operating arm
Control fan case
Interlock switch
Fig. 7-38
7-28
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.2.9
Belt sensor (PBS)
(1) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (1 pc.) to remove the belt sensor base from the main
frame.
(2) Disconnect the connector (1 pc.) to the belt sensor.
(3) Release the catches to remove the belt sensor from the base.
Sensor base
Belt sensor
Fig. 7-39
4.2.10
Transfer drum 3
(1) Remove the set screws ST4x6 (2 pcs.) and remove the stay ‘A’ by sliding it forwards and
then upwards in the plastic guide slots.
(2) Open the rear access cover (TR unit cover 3) and protect the surface of the transfer
drum 3 by covering it with paper. Then push the transfer drum 3 up and forwards from
the transfer unit side.
(3) Release the transfer drum 3 from the shaft supports, and pull up and remove the transfer
drum 3 from the top of the printer.
Stay ‘A’
Transfer drum 3
Fig. 7-40
7-29
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
x
For easier removal, push the drum upwards and diagonally forwards.
x
When re-assembling the transfer drum 3, slide the drum shaft between the metal plates
and ensure the drum is fully located into the correct retaining position.
PRECAUTION
Do not touch the transfer drum surface with your bare hands or scratch it. Protect the drum
surface during handling.
4.2.11
Erase lamp 3 / Erase holder
(1) Disconnect the harness (1 pc.) connected to the erase lamp 3.
(2) Remove the erase lamp 3 from the holder.
Holder
Erase holder
Erase lamp 3
Harness
Erase holder
Fig. 7-41
NOTE:
When re-assembling the erase lamp 3, check the correct direction referring to the figure
below. Failure to do so may cause transfer drum damage.
(Right Side)
(Left Side)
Fig. 7-42
7-30
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.2.12
Drum jam sensor (DPJ)
(1) Release the catches and remove the cover F.
(2) Disconnect the drum jam sensor connector.
(3) Remove the drum jam sensor.
NOTE:
The dram jam sensor (DPJ ) is identical to the belt sensor (PBS).
Cover F
Drum jam sensor
Drum jam sensor
harness
Fig. 7-43
4.2.13
Oil sensor (OIL)
(1) Remove the set screw ST3x6 (2 pcs.) from the oil sensor.
(2) Disconnect the oil sensor connector from the harness connector.
(3) Remove the oil sensor assembly.
Oil sensor assembly
Fig. 7-44
7-31
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.3
Left Side of the Printer
4.3.1
Video Controller PCB
CAUTION
x
Turn off the printer power switch and unplug the power cable from the outlet.
x
Remove the interface cable connector.
(1) Remove the two screws to remove the main controller board from the printer.
Main controller board
Fig. 7-45
(2) Remove the two screws securing the NC-4100h and remove the NC-4100h by pulling it
upwards.
NC-4100h
Fig. 7-46
7-32
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(3) Remove the DIMM.
(4) Remove the screw at the center of the main PCB base plate.
(5) Remove the CPU heatspred.
(6) Remove the sheet (GP1-2.0-025025Y).
(7) Remove the two screws on the CDCC IF.
(8) Remove the two screws to remove the main PCB base plate.
CPU heatspred
Main PCB base plate
GP1-2.0-025025Y
DIMM
CDCC IF
Fig. 7-47
7-33
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.3.2
MCTL PWB
CAUTION
Remove the Main (Video Controller) PWB before starting this disassembly.
(1) Remove the set screw ST3x6 (1 pc.) from shield cover ‘B’. Slide the cover upwards and
remove it.
(2) Disconnect all the harness connectors (7 pcs.) connected to the MCTL PWB.
(3) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (4 pcs.) from the MCTL PWB.
(4) Remove the MCTL PWB.
PRECAUTION
x
Read the internal RAM counter information from the MCTL PWB prior to replacing the
MCTL PWB.
x
When handling the MCTL PWB, ensure that no damage is caused due to electrostatic
charges.
Shield cover ‘B’
MCTL PWB
Fig. 7-48
7-34
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.3.3
High-voltage power supply unit (High voltage unit 3)
(1) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (2 pcs.) to remove the shield cover ‘A’.
(2) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (4 pcs.) to remove the shield case ‘A’ assembly.
Shield case ‘A’
Shield cover ‘A’
Fig. 7-49
(4) Disconnect the harnesses (2 pcs.) and high-voltage connectors (2 pcs.) connected to the
high-voltage power supply unit.
(5) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (1 pc.) and BT3x8 (8 pcs.) from the high-voltage power
supply unit.
(6) Remove the high-voltage power supply unit.
High-voltage
power supply unit
Fig. 7-50
7-35
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
CAUTION
When disconnecting the connector from the CBV terminal, push both sides of the connector.
Pulling it hard may cause connector damage.
WARNING
The high voltage power supply unit generates high voltages of up to 5KV. You can get an
electric shock if you touch the unit while it is powered on.
Turn on the power to the unit only after having refitted and secured side cover (L).
4.3.4
Interlock switch (Rear)
(1) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (2 pcs.) to remove the transfer electrode base from the
frame.
(2) Disconnect the harness (1 pc.) connected to the interlock switch.
(3) Remove the interlock switch from the transfer electrode base.
Interlock Switch (Rear)
Transfer electrode base
Fig. 7-51
CAUTION
Since the interlock switch is an important safety item, after installation confirm that the switch
operates correctly.
7-36
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.3.5
Drum encoder sensor (PS4)
(1) Remove the sensor case assembly from the frame (L) by releasing the two catches.
(2) Disconnect the connector (1 pc.) to the encoder sensor.
(3) Remove the drum encoder sensor from the sensor case.
Drum encoder sensor
(Sensor case assembly)
Fig. 7-52
4.3.6
Fuser connector 3
(1) Remove the shoulder screws SP3x10* (2 pcs.) from the fuser connector 3.
(2) Disconnect the connectors (2 pcs.) from the Low-voltage power supply unit (power
supply unit 3).
(3) Remove the fuser connector 3.
Fuser connector 3
Fig. 7-53
7-37
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.3.7
Rear cover 3 (R)
(1) Remove the set screw BT4x10 (1 pc.) of rear cover 3 (R).
(2) Remove the rear cover 3 (R).
Rear cover 3 (R)
Fig. 7-54
4.3.8
Low-voltage power supply unit (Power supply unit 3 (EC)(US))
(1) Remove the power switch key by pulling it forwards.
(2) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (3 pcs.) to remove the front shield.
(3) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (2 pcs.) to remove the bottom shield plate.
Front shield
Spring
Power switch key
Bottom shield plate
Fig. 7-55
7-38
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(4) Remove the set screw ST3x6 (2 pcs.) holding the power inlet base.
(5) Remove the set screw M4x6 complete with the shakeproof washer to release the ground
wire.
Power inlet base
Ground wire
Fig. 7-56
(6) Disconnect the connectors (4 pcs.) from the low-voltage power supply PCB.
(7) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (3 pcs.) from the low-voltage power supply unit frame.
(8) Remove the low-voltage power supply unit complete with the frame.
Low-voltage power
supply unit
Fig. 7-57
WARNING
The ground wire is very important for the safety of users.
Upon replacement of the low-voltage power supply unit, confirm that the ground wire (green
and yellow color) is securely connected to the
connector, the shakeproof washer is fitted
and the screw is tightly fastened.
7-39
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.3.9
Interlock switch (Front) (for front cover)
(1) Remove the set screw (1 pc.) to remove the switch holder assembly from the frame.
(2) Release the two hooks to remove the interlock switch.
(3) Disconnect the switch connector.
(4) Remove the interlock switch from the switch case.
Frame
Switch case
Interlock switch
Fig. 7-58
CAUTION
Since the interlock switch is an important safety item, after installation confirm that the switch
operates correctly.
7-40
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.3.10
Toner key sensor (TNK)
(1) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (4 pcs.) from the toner key sensor PCB.
(2) Disconnect the connector (1 pc.) connected to the IOD1 PWB.
(3) Remove the toner key sensor PCB.
Toner key sensor
Fig. 7-59
4.3.11
Toner sensor (TTR)
(1) Remove the set screw ST3x6 (2 pcs.) to remove the metal plate.
(2) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (2 pcs.) from the toner sensor PCB.
(3) Disconnect the connector and remove the toner sensor PCB.
NOTE:
There are two sets of tapped holes for the metal plate. Be sure to attach the metal plate onto
the one closest to the toner sensor.
Toner sensor (TTR)
Metal plate
Fig. 7-60
7-41
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.4
Paper Exit Unit
4.4.1
Rear cover 3 (U)
(1) Remove the rear cover 3 (R). (Refer to subsection 4.3.6 in this chapter.)
(2) Release the two hooks to remove the rear cover 3 (U).
(3) Remove the rear cover (U) caps (2 pcs.) from the rear cover 3 (U) if necessary.
Rear cover 3 (U)
Rear cover (U) cap
Fig. 7-61
4.4.2
Top cover (Paper exit unit 3) / Fuser fan (FUFAN) (Cooling fan EX)
(1) Disconnect the connector in the cover assembly.
(2) Remove the support pins SP4x3 (2 pcs.) at the left and right sides that act as the paper
exit unit hinges.
(3) Remove the paper exit unit from the printer.
(4) Remove the side cover assembly from the paper exit unit 3.
Paper exit unit 3
Side cover assembly
Fig. 7-62
7-42
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(5) Press the top cover back plate backwards to release the fan motor assembly from the
paper exit guide unit.
(6) Remove the fuser fan motor and filter from the case.
Filter
Fan case
Fuser fan motor
Top cover
(Paper exit unit 3 )
Paper exit guide unit
Fig. 7-63
(7) Remove the set screw BT3x8 (2 pcs.) and ST3x6 (2 pcs.) to remove the paper exit front
cover 3.
(8) Remove the set screws BT3x12 (4 pcs.) to remove the top cover (paper exit unit 3) from
the paper exit guide unit.
(9) Remove the paper exit upper cover 3 from the paper exit unit 3 if necessary.
ST3x8
Paper exit front
cover
ST3x6
Paper exit guide unit
Paper exit unit3
Paper exit unit cover 3
Paper exit
upper cover
Fig. 7-64
7-43
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.4.3
Cleaning roller sensor (PS5)
(1) Remove the set screw ST3x6 (1 pc.) of the sensor base holding the cleaning roller
sensor.
(2) Disconnect the harness connected to the cleaning roller sensor.
(3) Remove the cleaning roller sensor from the sensor base.
Cleaning roller sensor
Sensor base
Paper exit guide
Fig. 7-65
4.4.4
Paper full sensor (PS6)
(1) Disconnect the harness connected to the paper full sensor.
(2) Release the catch to remove the sensor unit from the paper exit guide.
Paper exit guide
Paper full sensor
Fig. 7-66
7-44
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.4.5
Paper exit sensor (PS2)
(1) Disconnect the harness connected to the paper exit sensor.
(2) Remove the paper exit sensor from the sensor base.
Paper exit sensor
Sensor base
Fig. 7-67
NOTE:
When re-assembling the cleaning roller sensor and paper exit sensor, be sure to connect the
correct harness to either sensors as below;
Brown
x Cleaning roller sensor harness:
Yellow
x Paper exit sensor harness:
4.4.6
Discharger brush (Discharging brush 3)
(1) Remove the fixing screws BT4x8 (2 pcs.) from the discharger brush.
(2) Remove the discharger brush.
PRECAUTION
Do not deform the discharger brush.
Paper exit guide
Discharger brush
Fig. 7-68
7-45
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.4.7
Paper exit roller 3
(1) Remove the set screw ST3x6 (1 pc.) to remove the plastic retainer from the paper exit
guide.
(2) Remove the C ring and washer from the left and right hand sides of the roller.
(3) Remove the plastic bush at both sides.
(4) Remove the paper exit roller 3 from the paper exit guide.
Paper exit guide
Plastic retainer
Plastic bush
C ring
Paper exit roller 3
Fig. 7-69
7-46
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.5
Front of the Printer
4.5.1
Front outer cover (Front cover 3)
(1) Open the front cover unit 3.
(2) Remove the set screws BT4x10 (2 pcs.) from the front cover unit 3.
(3) Unhook the five hooks and remove the front outer cover.
Hook
Front outer cover
Fig. 7-70
4.5.2
Front cover unit 3
(1) Close the front cover.
(2) Remove the set screw ST4x6 (6 pcs.) to remove the front cover supports at left and right
sides from the frame.
(3) Remove the set screw ST3x6 (1 pc.) from the front hinge (L) to remove the front hinge
support from the frame.
Front hinge support
Front cover
Fig. 7-71
7-47
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
(4) Remove the screws BT4x8 (4 pcs.) from the front inner cover.
(5) Unhook the two hooks by slightly lifting up the front inner cover and remove the hinge
from the front cover unit 3.
(6) Disconnect the connectors (4 pcs.) from the front cover unit 3.
Hinge
Front cover hinge plate
Front inner cover
Unhook the hook from
the shaft.
Fig. 7-72
(7) Remove the C rings (2 pcs.) to remove the shafts from the front cover hinge plates at left
and right sides of the frame.
(8) Gently lower the front cover to release the hinge spring tension.
Shaft
Eccentric cam
Cam
C ring
Fig. 7-73
7-48
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.5.3
Laser unit (Scanner motor inclusive) (Optical unit 3)
(1) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (2 pcs.) to remove the scanner cover.
(2) Remove the fixing screws with flanges FST3x10 (3 pcs.) from the laser unit.
(3) Disconnect the harness connector (1 pc.) from the laser unit.
(4) Remove the laser unit from the printer.
Laser unit
Fig. 7-74
WARNING
x
There is a class IIIb laser within the laser unit. Do not attempt to disassemble the laser.
x
The laser unit is replaced as a complete unit. No adjustment is required to the
replacement laser unit.
x
Confirm that all the covers have been correctly installed prior to any test run or operation
in order to prevent any laser radiation escaping from the printer.
7-49
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.6
Rear of the Printer
4.6.1
Rear access cover (TR unit cover 3) / Transfer unit 3
(1) Open the rear access cover.
(2) Remove the fixing screw BT4x10 (1 pc.) of the retaining strap supporting the transfer unit
3 to the printer body.
(3) Take the transfer unit 3 out by holding the unit horizontally to remove the transfer unit 3.
Retaining strap
Transfer unit 3
Fig. 7-75
(4) Remove the set screws BT3x8 (4 pcs.) from the transfer unit 3.
(5) Remove the transfer unit 3 from the rear access cover.
Transfer unit 3
Rear access cover
Fig. 7-76
NOTE:
When reassembling the transfer unit, install the support shaft into the right hand hole first.
7-50
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.6.2
Transfer roller 3
(1) Lift the transfer roller 3 lock levers to release both ends of the roller.
(2) Pull up and remove the transfer roller 3.
Transfer roller 3
Lock lever
Fig. 7-77
4.6.3
Register roller
(1) Remove the roller fixing C rings from both ends of the roller.
(2) Remove the gear from the shaft (left hand side).
(3) Remove the plastic bushes at both ends.
(4) Remove the plastic bush from the frame while pressing down on the pressure roller to
release the pressure from the register roller.
(5) Remove the register roller.
Gear
C ring
Plastic bush
Register roller
Plastic bush
C ring
Pressure roller
Fig. 7-78
7-51
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.6.4
Paper size sensor 3 (PSU)
(1) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (2 pcs.) to remove the lower paper guide.
(2) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (2 pcs.) holding the paper size sensor PCB.
(3) Disconnect the paper size sensor connector, and remove the paper size sensor.
Lower paper guide
Paper size sensor
Fig. 7-79
4.6.5
Paper feeding roller / Separator pad (2)
(1) Remove the set screws ST3x6 (2 pcs.) from the paper guide (UL).
(2) Remove the paper guide (UL).
(3) Disconnect the harnesses (2 pcs.) connected to the OHP sensor and paper empty
sensor.
(4) Remove the paper feeding roller from the rear of the printer.
Paper guide (UL)
Paper feeding roller
Fig. 7-80
7-52
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(5) Pull up and remove the separator pad (2).
Separator pad (2)
Fig. 7-81
PRECAUTION
Do not touch the surface of the paper feeding roller and separator pad (2).
4.6.6
Paper empty sensor (PS3) / OHP sensor (OHP)
(1) Disconnect the sensor connectors.
(2) Remove the set screws BT3x8 (2 pcs.) from the OHP sensor and remove the OHP
sensor from the paper guide assembly (UL).
(3) Remove the paper empty sensor (PS3) from the paper guide assembly (UL)
Paper empty sensor
Paper guide assembly (UL)
OHP sensor
Fig. 7-82
7-53
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.6.7
Paper feeding sensor (PS1)
(1) Remove the paper feeding sensor from the rear frame.
(2) Disconnect the connector on the paper feeding sensor.
Paper feeding sensor
Fig. 7-83
4.7
Fusing Unit
DANGER
Note in Parts Replacement
x
The fusing unit consists of important safety parts.
Therefore, replacement of parts or disassembly and maintenance work should only be done
at an appropriate service facility by skilled service personnel acquainted with electrical
safety. After re-assembly the product safety should be reconfirmed.
x
Since the fuser unit is very hot, make sure that the fuser unit and surrounding area are
well cooled down prior to starting the replacement of parts. You may get burned when
touching hot areas.
x
The fusing unit contains silicone oil. Take care not to spill the silicone oil, especially on
the floor, as the floor will become very slippery and dangerous.
7-54
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.7.1
Oil pan unit 3
(1) Remove the fixing screw ST3x6 (1 pc.) to remove the F cover (L).
(2) Remove the fixing screw ST3x6 (1 pc.) to remove the F cover (R).
(3) Remove the fixing screws ST3x6 (2 pcs.) to remove the oil pan unit 3 from the fusing
unit.
F cover (L)
F cover (R)
Oil pan unit 3
Fig. 7-84
4.7.2
Oil pad
Remove the fixing screws ST3x6 (2pcs.) to remove the oil pad from the oil pan unit 3.
Oil pad
Oil pan unit 3
Fig. 7-85
7-55
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLY & RE-ASSEMBLY
4.7.3
Fusing heater lamp (Fusing heater 3 (US)(EC))
(1) Remove the fixing screw ST3x6 (2 pcs.) and slide the F cover (B) to the right to remove
it.
(2) Remove the fixing screws with washer M3x6 (2 pc.) from securing the two heater
harnesses. (1st and 3rd harnesses from the left hand side.)
(3) Remove the fixing screws ST3x6 (4 pcs.) to remove the heater support (HR/BR) at the
right hand side.
(4) Remove the screw with washer M3x6 from the heater electrode plate of each lamp.
(5) Pull out the fusing heater lamps from the inside of the back-up roller and fuser roller.
Heater support (BR)
Terminal (L)
Fusing heater lamp
Heater
support (HR)
Heater electrode
plate
F cover (B)
Heater harness
Fig. 7-86
PRECAUTION
x
Do not touch the surface of the heater lamp with your hands, the small traces of oil you
leave on the lamp will affect the life of the lamp.
x
The wattage of the heater lamp is different between the fuser roller and the back-up roller.
The wattage is marked on the insulator of the lamp electrode.
Fuser roller:
560W
Back-up roller : 420W
NOTE:
When installing the new fusing unit into the printer, you have to wait approximately for 30
minutes after the unit is installed to allow the fusing oil to circulate in the unit.
7-56
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 8
TROUBLESHOOTING
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................8-3
1. OUTLINE OF TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................ 8-4
2. OPERATOR CALL......................................................................................... 8-5
2.1 Video Controller Mode..........................................................................................................8-5
2.2 Engine Controller Mode........................................................................................................8-8
3. PAPER TRANSPORT ERROR.................................................................... 8-10
3.1 Feed Jam............................................................................................................................8-10
3.2 Inner Jam............................................................................................................................8-11
3.2.1 Paper guide D .............................................................................................................................8-11
3.3 Outer Jam...........................................................................................................................8-13
3.4 Others.................................................................................................................................8-13
4. SERVICE CALL ........................................................................................... 8-14
4.1 Video Controller Mode........................................................................................................8-15
4.2 Engine Controller Mode......................................................................................................8-18
5. IMAGE FAILURE ......................................................................................... 8-47
8-2
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 8
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter contains troubleshooting information for both the Video Controller Mode and the
Engine Controller Mode.
If any problem occurs during the normal usage of the printer, which means the printer is
being used in the Video Controller Mode, clear the problem by referring to the troubleshooting
information in the following sections for the Video Controller Mode or the user’s guide.
However, if a problem occurs in the video controller itself, use the Engine Controller Mode
information as it may be easier to understand the cause of the problem because the Engine
Controller mode can separate the problem in the video controller from the printing operations.
The error messages used in the Video Controller Mode basically contain the same ones that
are used in the Engine Controller Mode. All error status messages are displayed in the Video
Controller Mode other than when an error occurs in the video controller itself or in the
communication between the video controller and the engine controller.
NOTE:
The operation of the control panel and the display on the LCD vary depending on the mode
selected.
8-3
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
1.
OUTLINE OF TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer Problem
Paper Transport
Error
Operator Call
[Section 2.1]
Service Call
Image Failure
[Section 2 & 3]
[Section 5]
Enter the Engine Controller Mode
Turn off the power, hold down the
Secure Print, Back and Set
buttons and then turn the main
switch on again.
Turn off the power
then turn it back on
again.
[Problem Repeat]
[Section 2.2]
Is power supply operating normally?
<HV
No
Check power cable.
Engine Controller
Mode
[Section 4.2]
8-4
<HV
Video Controller
Mode
[Section 4.1]
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
2.
2.1
OPERATOR CALL
Video Controller Mode
The Power LED is lit and an applicable message appears on the liquid crystal display (LCD)
in the following cases;
1) Consumables require to be replenished.
2) Waste toner pack is full of waste toner.
3) Paper jam.
4) Periodic maintenance.
5) Maintenance work incomplete.
The above cases are not regarded as a breakdown, and should be treated in accordance
with Table 8-1;
Table 8-1
Display Message
Remarks
TONER EMPTY X
X = C, M, Y, K
Replace the X toner cartridge.
NO TONER X
X = C, M, Y, K
Install the X toner cartridge.
COVER OPEN
Close the Front Cover.
COVER OPEN
Close the Top Cover.
COVER OPEN
Close the Rear Access Cover.
COVER OPEN
Close the Lower Feeder Unit Cover.
COVER OPEN
Close the Duplex Unit Cover.
JAM X
Refer to the diagram, and check the location. Remove the
jammed paper.
NO PAPER T1/2/3
Load paper into Tray 1/2/3.
WASTE TONER
Replace the waste toner pack.
OIL EMPTY
Replace the oil bottle.
CHANGE FCR
Replace the cleaning roller.
8-5
X = A1, A2, A3, B, C, D,
E1 ,E2
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Display Message
Remarks
NO OPC BELT
Install the OPC belt.
NO FC ROLLER
Install the cleaning roller.
NO LFU
Install the lower tray unit.
NO TR ROLLER
Install the transfer roller 2.
ILLEGAL TONER
Use only Brother genuine toner cartridges.
NO TRAY 1/2/3
The indicated paper Tray was not detected, install it, or
ensure it is inserted correctly.
SIZE ERROR T1/2/3
Specify the correct paper size for the indicated tray.
SIZE ERROR DX
The duplex unit can only print in the sizes specified.
Specify the correct paper size.
STACKER FULL
Remove the paper from the output tray.
MEDIA MISMATCH
Media mismatch between the Printer and the Printer
Driver setting. Load XX into Tray <1/2/3>.
XX = Plain Paper,
Transparencies, Thick
Paper
SIZE MISMATCH
Paper mismatch between the Printer and the Printer
Driver setting. Load Paper <size> size into Tray <1/2>.
MANUAL FEED
Load paper <size> into tray1 and press GO.
MEDIATYPE ERROR
XX = T1, T2, T3, DX
Specify the correct media type : XX.
NO FUSING UNIT
A fusing Unit was not detected, please install one.
CARD ERROR
An error when accessing the Flash card, check the drive
is formatted and not in Write Protect mode.
HDD ERROR
An error occurred accessing the HDD, power cycle the
printer and check that it is formatted.
8-6
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Display Message
Remarks
DIMM ERROR
Ensure that the DIMM is installed correctly.
CARD REMOVAL
The Flash card was removed while the printer was
powered on. Power cycle the printer.
BUFFER ERROR
Check the cable connection between the computer and
printer.
STORAGE FULL
There is no space on the Hard Disk.
STORAGE FULL
The RAMDISK SIZE is set to 0MB there is no more space
to store jobs.
STORAGE FULL
There is no space in the Compact Flash.
STORAGE FULL
There is no space on the Flash Memory.
DOWNLOAD FULL
The download buffer of the printer is full. Add more
memory to the printer.
FONT FULL
The font memory area is full. Delete fonts or add more
memory to the printer.
MEMORY FULL
The printer memory is full and the printer is unable to print
the page. Add more memory.
PRINT OVERRUN
Select a lower resolution or set the page protect option in
the driver to the correct size.
IGNORE DATA
Check that the correct driver is being used and/or try
adding more printer memory.
MEMORY SHORTAGE
Install additional DIMM
memory so that the total
memory size is 32MB or
less.
Add memory.
8-7
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
2.2
Engine Controller Mode
The Power LED is lit, and applicable messages appear on the liquid crystal display (LCD) in
the following cases;
1) Consumables require to be replenished.
2) Waste toner pack is full of waste toner.
3) Paper jam.
4) Periodic maintenance.
5) Maintenance work being incomplete.
6) Paper exit tray is full of ejected paper.
The above cases are not regarded as a breakdown, and should be treated in accordance
with Table 8-2;
Table 8-2
Display Message
Meaning
Countermeasure
11 NO MEDIA
UPP/LF1/LF2
No paper in the upper
cassette / lower cassette
Replenish paper.
11 CHK MEDIA TYPE
UPP/LF1/LF2
Inconsistency of media
Change media.
11 CHK MEDIA FOR
DUPLEX
No duplex printing is
possible for the designated
media.
Change the media or selection.
11 CHK OUTER
SELECTION
Designation of paper feed
and exit is wrong for duplex
printing.
Check the paper feed and exit
selected, and change it
accordingly.
12 NO TRAY
UPP/LF1/LF2
No upper / lower media
cassette
Install cassette(s).
12 STACKER FULL
Output paper tray is full.
Remove the paper.
13 REPLACE TONER
Y/M/C/K
Toner (Y, M, C, K) empty
Replace with new toner
cartridge(s).
14 CHECK WASTE
TONER
Waste toner pack full of
toner
Replace with a new waste toner
pack.
14 CHECK FUSING OIL Change the oil bottle
Replace with a new oil bottle.
14 CHK CLEANING
ROLLER
Change the fuser cleaner
Replace with a new fuser
cleaner
15 MISPRINT
PAPER/NOPRQ/MEDIA/
DUPLEX
Misprinting occurred
x
16 ALIGN TONER CG
Y/M/C/K
Toner cartridge not installed
Confirm the installation of the
toner cartridge(s).
8-8
Confirm status of media
cassette.
x Confirm correct paper size.
x Confirm consistency of
media.
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Display Message
Meaning
Countermeasure
16 ALIGN FU UNIT
Fusing unit not installed
x
16 ALIGN BELT CG
OPC belt cartridge not
installed
Confirm the installation of the
OPC belt cartridge.
16 ALIGN FUSER CL
ROLLER
Fuser cleaner not installed.
Install the fuser cleaner.
16 ALIGN LFU
Incorrect connection
between the engine and
fusing unit.
Connect the cable between the
engine and fusing unit correctly.
17 MEDIA JAM FEED
Paper jam at feeding area
Remove the media cassette,
and remove paper jammed at
feeding entrance.
17 MEDIA JAM INNER
Paper jam inside printer
Open the transfer unit, and
remove paper jammed inside.
17 MEDIA JAM OUTER
Paper jam at paper exit area
Open the transfer unit / paper
exit unit and remove paper
jammed inside.
17 MEDIA JAM DRUM
Paper jam wound around
the transfer drum
Open the transfer unit and
remove the OPC belt cartridge.
Remove the paper jam by
unwinding the paper from the
transfer drum.
17 MEDIA JAM DUPLEX Duplex paper transportation
jam.
Remove the fusing unit and
refit it.
x Confirm it is correctly
installed.
x
Open the duplex top cover
and remove the jammed
paper from the inside of the
printer.
x Open the duplex center cover
and remove the jammed
paper from the inside of the
printer.
x Open the duplex bottom
cover (M) and remove the
jammed paper.
18 CLOSE PANEL
FRONT/TOP/REAR/LFU
Covers open
Confirm that the covers are
firmly closed.
18 CLOSE TR PANEL
DPL
Duplex unit cover is open.
Confirm that the cover is firmly
closed.
19 SLEEP MODE
Printer under idling
condition
Printer automatically returns to
the operating condition when a
PRINT signal is sent.
01 WAIT
Printer warming-up
00 READY
Printer ready to print in
standby status
02 PRINT
Printing in progress
8-9
These are normal operation
modes.
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
3.
PAPER TRANSPORT ERROR
Paper is transported through the path shown in Fig.8-1. Paper jams at the following locations
are easily cleared.
x
Paper Feeding Roller
x
Fusing Unit
x
Transfer Unit
x
Paper Exit Unit
Paper exit roller
Drum cleaner
Fusing unit Oil bottle
OPC belt cartridge
Top cover
Toner cartridge
Paper exit unit
Media cassette
Transfer unit
Paper discharger unit
Transfer roller
Transfer drum
Register roller
Paper feeding roller
3.1
Fig. 8-1
Feed Jam
Table 8-3
Problem Item
Print Paper
Media
Cassette
Step
Result
Action
1
Is the print paper a
recommended paper?
NO
Use a recommended
paper.
2
Is the print paper damp?
YES
Replace the existing paper
with new.
3
Was the paper fanned before
loading in the media cassette?
NO
Fan the paper before
loading.
4
Is the print paper set in place?
NO
Set the paper in the correct
place.
5
Is the end plate properly set up?
NO
Set the end plate to meet
the paper size.
6
Is the paper stacked above the
line on the paper guide?
YES
Stack the paper below the
line.
7
Is there paper dust around the
paper guide?
YES
Clean the paper guide with
a cotton cloth.
8
Is the print paper caught in the
paper feeding part?
YES
Remove the paper.
YES
Service call required to
replace the damaged pickup roller.
Pick-up Roller
/ Separator
Pad
Check Item
Is the pick-up roller damaged?
9
8-10
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
3.2
Inner Jam
Table 8-4
Problem Item
Step
1
2
Transfer Unit
3
4
5
6
Fusing Unit
7
8
3.2.1
Check Item
Result
Open the transfer unit and
check.
Is there any paper inside the
unit?
Is the transfer roller firmly
locked by the lock lever?
Is the paper discharger unit
installed in place?
Is there paper dust around the
registration roller?
Is the wire of the paper
discharger unit damaged?
Is the fusing unit installed in
place?
Is there any paper trapped
between the rollers?
Is there fuser oil still in the oil
bottle?
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
Action
Remove the paper inside.
Fix the transfer roller with
the lock lever.
Install the paper discharger
unit firmly in place.
Clean the registration roller
with a cotton cloth.
Replace the existing paper
discharger unit with a new
one.
Install the fusing unit firmly
in place.
Remove the trapped paper.
Replace the existing oil
bottle with a new one.
Paper guide D
CAUTION
Fusing unit and its peripheral parts are very hot. Before starting the replacement work, make
it sure that the unit and parts is well cooled down.
(1)
Turn the power switch off and unplug the power cord from the outlet.
(2)
Confirm that the temperature of the unit and parts is well cooled down.
(3)
Open the paper exit unit.
(4)
Turn the set screws (2pcs.) of fusing unit.
(5)
Holding the handle of both sides, remove the fusing unit.
NOTE:
When removing the fusing unit, maintain the unit horizontally so that no oil leakage.
Fusing unit
Paper exit unit
Fig. 8-2
8-11
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
(6)
Remove the oil sensor cover.
Oil sensor cover
Fig. 8-3
(7)
Pushing up the installation claw toward the engine, remove the paper guide.
Paper guide
Paper guide
Fig. 8-4
8-12
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(8)
Install a new paper guide D (with a pawl for separating paper). Attend the orientation
of installation.
(9)
Install the each parts (the oil sensor cover and so on) in accordance with the reverse
order of remove procedures.
NOTE:
This printer will be unable to print on A3+ size if these parts are used.
Paper guide D
Paper guide D
Fig. 8-5
3.3
Outer Jam
Table 8-5
Problem Item
Print Paper
Paper Exit Unit
Step
1
1
2
3.4
Check Item
Result
Is the print paper a
recommended paper?
Is the paper exit unit firmly
locked by the lock lever?
Is there paper dust around the
exit roller?
NO
NO
YES
Action
Use a recommended
paper.
Open and close the
paper exit unit again.
Clean the exit roller
with a cotton cloth.
Others
Table 8-6
Problem Item
The edge of
print paper is
creased.
Cause
Result
Action
Is the curled paper edge creased when
the paper is loaded through the pick-up
roller?
YES
Turn over the paper in
the media cassette.
8-13
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.
SERVICE CALL
If errors or failures occurred inside the printer, the applicable error message will be displayed
on the control panel, and the printer stops. If errors or failures repeat even after resetting the
power button, confirm the error code and then refer to the appropriate section below.
Error occurs.
Confirm the error message
Reset the power button.
Error occurs
again
NO
YES
Since this is a temporary error,
you may use the printer
without corrective action.
Call the maintenance
company for service.
8-14
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4.1
Video Controller Mode
Table 8-7
Service Call Message
Meaning
Countermeasure
FATAL ERROR EX
Update with a new Firmware.
ADRL ERROR EX
Update with a new Firmware.
ADRS ERROR EX
Update with a new Firmware.
ERROR S04
BUS ERROR EX
Update with a new Firmware.
SERVICE CALL
(INSTRUCT)
ERROR S05
BUS ERROR EX
SERVICE CALL
(DATA L/S)
ERROR S06
SYSCALL EX
Update with a new Firmware.
BREAKPOINT EX
Update with a new Firmware.
RESERVED INSTRUCT
EX
Update with a new Firmware.
COPROCESSOR
UNUSAB EX
Update with a new Firmware.
ARITHMETIC
OVERFLOW EX
Update with a new Firmware.
UNDEFINED
INTERRUPT
Update with a new Firmware.
SOFTWARE 1
INTERRUPT
Update with a new Firmware.
SOFTWARE 2
INTERRUPT
Update with a new Firmware.
Engine interface error
Update with a new Firmware.
Bus error
Replace with a new main
(video controller) PCB.
ERROR S01
SERVICE CALL
ERROR S02
SERVICE CALL
ERROR S03
SERVICE CALL
Update with a new Firmware.
SERVICE CALL
ERROR S07
SERVICE CALL
ERROR S08
SERVICE CALL
ERROR S09
SERVICE CALL
ERROR S10
SERVICE CALL
ERROR S11
SERVICE CALL
ERROR S12
SERVICE CALL
ERROR S13
SERVICE CALL
ERROR E41
PRINT CHECK
ERROR H60
BUS ERROR
ERROR H61
PROG ERROR
ERROR H63
Program ROM checksum
error
Replace with a new main
(video controller) PCB.
Replace with a new DIMM.
DIMM error
D-RAM ERROR
8-15
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Call Message
ERROR H66
Meaning
Countermeasure
NVRAM write error
Replace with a new main
(video controller) PCB.
NVRAM read error
Replace with a new main
(video controller) PCB.
NVRAM read/ write error
Replace with a new main
(video controller) PCB.
FLASH ROM read error
Replace with a new main
(video controller) PCB.
FLASH ROM write error
Replace with a new main
(video controller) PCB.
NV_W ERROR
ERROR H67
NV_R ERROR
ERROR H68
NV_B ERROR
ERROR H73
FLASH_R ERROR
ERROR H74
FLASH_W ERROR
PCI BUS ERROR
Replace with a new NC-4100h.
PCI BUS error
Table 8-8
Status Display
ERROR EC3
Description
NVRAM error
WARNING
ERROR EC4
Engine controller hardware error
WARNING
ERROR EC7
Process timing clock error
WARNING
ERROR ED1
Yellow Switching clutch error
WARNING
ERROR ED2
Magenta Switching clutch error
WARNING
ERROR ED3
Cyan Switching clutch error
WARNING
ERROR ED4
Black Switching clutch error
WARNING
ERROR ED5
YK Switching solenoid error
WARNING
* The error occurs when the front cover is opened during
printing.
ERROR ED6
MC Switching solenoid error
WARNING
* The error occurs when the front cover is opened during
printing.
8-16
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Status Display
ERROR EE1
Description
Developing motor error
WARNING
ERROR EE2
Main motor error
WARNING
ERROR EE3
Drum error
WARNING
ERROR EE4
Toner empty sensor error
WARNING
ERROR EE5
Transfer roller 2 solenoid error
WARNING
ERROR EE6
Drum cleaning solenoid error
WARNING
ERROR EE7
Drum cleaning clutch error
WARNING
ERROR EE8
Fuser unit clutch error
WARNING
ERROR EE9
Belt marker sensor error
WARNING
ERROR EEL
Erase LED error
WARNING
ERROR EF0
Cooling fan error
WARNING
ERROR EF2
Ozone fan error
WARNING
ERROR EF4
Fuser fan error
WARNING
ERROR EF5
Charger HV unit error
WARNING
ERROR EH0
Fuser thermistor error
WARNING
ERROR EH2
Fuser temperature 2 error
WARNING
ERROR EH3
Fuser temperature 3 error
WARNING
8-17
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Status Display
ERROR EH4
Description
Fuser temperature 4 error
WARNING
ERROR EL1
Beam detector error
WARNING
ERROR EL2
Scanner motor error
WARNING
ERROR ELL
Laser power error
WARNING
ERROR EP1
Duplex controller hardware error
WARNING
ERROR EP3
Feeder pass select solenoid error
WARNING
ERROR EP4
Duplex motor error
WARNING
ERROR EP5
Outer pass select solenoid error
WARNING
ERROR EP6
Optional fan error
WARNING
NOTE:
For further actions for the error messages described in Table 8-8, refer to the flow charts
later in this section.
4.2
Engine Controller Mode
Table 8-9
Code
Description
C3
NVRAM error (MCTL PWB)
C4
Engine controller MCTL PWB hardware error
EC7
Process timing clock error (Main motor clock error)
D1
Clutch error of the yellow developing unit
D2
Clutch error of the magenta developing unit
D3
Clutch error of the cyan developing unit
D4
Clutch error of the black developing unit
D5
HPSI signal error (Retract error of black and yellow toner cartridge)
D6
HPSI signal error (Retract error of cyan and magenta toner cartridge)
8-18
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Code
Description
E1
Developing motor error
E2
Main motor error
E3
Transfer drum rotational error
E4
Toner sensor error
E5
TR cam clutch error
E6
Cleaner cam clutch error
E7
Cleaner clutch error
E8
Fuser clutch error
E9
Belt sensor error
EL
Erase lamp error
F0
Control fan error
F2
Ozone fan error
F4
Fuser fan error
F5
Charging HV (DC High Voltage) error
H0
Fuser thermistor error
H2
Fusing temperature error (Warming-up tme error)
H3
Fusing temperature (3) error (Heater continuous ON time error)
H4
Fusing temperature (4) error (Heater continuous ON time error)
L1
Beam sensor error
L2
Scanner motor error
LL
Laser power error
(P1)
DCTL error
(P3)
Solenoid (L) error
(P4)
Duplex drive motor error (DPM1, DPM2)
(P5)
Solenoid (U) error
(P6)
Duplex fan error
NOTE:
• For further actions for the error messages described in Table 8-4, refer to the flow charts
later in this section.
• The code in the bracket is the error when the duplex unit is installed. For troubleshooting
for those codes, refer to the DX-3400 duplex unit service manual.
8-19
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Code
C3
Description of Error
NVRAM Error
Cause of Error
1. Failure of MCTL PWB
CPU
EEPROM
Clearance Method
1. Turn on and off the power switch.
2. Above method 1 does not work, implement "C3 Error Clearance Procedure".
3. Replace the failed MCTL PWB with a new one.
C3
Does the error repeat despite of implementing "On/Off of Power Switch" ?
NO
Continue to drive the engine.
YES
NO
Does the error repeat despite of implementing "NVRAM INITIAL" ?
Continue to drive the engine.
YES
Replace the failed MCTL PWB with a new one.
Code
C4
Description of Error
Hard Error of MCTL
Control Circuit.
Cause of Error
1. Failure of MCTL PWB.
Clearance Method
1. Turn on and off the power switch.
2. Replace the failed MCTL PWB with a new one.
C4
Does the error repeat despite of implementing "On/Off of Power Switch" ?
YES
Replace the failed MCTL PWB with a new one.
8-20
NO
Continue to drive the engine.
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Code
EC7
Cause of Error
Description of Error
1. Power Feeding Failure
Process Timing Error. 2. MM Failure
3. MM Input Circuit Failure
Clearance Method
1. Implement the same clearance procedures employed for E2 error.
[Note]: MM stands for OPC Belt Drive Main Motor.
EC7
Implement the same clearance procedures employed for E2 error.
8-21
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Code
D1
Name of Part
Developer Clutch (DCLY)
Confirm the connection of Connector.
NO
Is the connection proper between ECN14 of IOD2 and Clutch (DCLY) ?
Is the harness of Clutch (DCLY) broken ?
Connect the harness.
Connect the connector properly.
YES
Is D1 Error cleared ?
YES
Complete
NO
Check the voltage at DCLY ON-N.
Does the voltage drop (
+24V )
between ECN14-3 and ECN2-6?
YES
Replace the clutch (DCLY) with a new clutch.
NO
Does the voltage jump (
) between ECN1-3 and ECN2-8 ?
YES
Replace IOD2 PWB with a new one.
NO
Is D1 Error cleared ?
Complete
NO
Replace current MCTL PWB with a new one.
Is D1 Error cleared ?
YES
NO
YES
Re-check
IOD2
14
ECN1 ECN14
17
Developer Clutch(Y)
DCL(Y)ON-P
+24V-1
3
1
3
DCLY
3 DCL(Y)ON-N
MCTL
12CN
Complete
ECN2
+24V-1 3
PGND 6
SGND 8
8-22
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Error Code
D2
Name of Part
Developer Clutch (DCLM)
Confirm the connection of Connector.
NO
Is the connection proper between ECN15 of IOD2 and Clutch (DCLM) ?
Connect the harness.
Connect the connector properly.
Is the harness of Clutch (DCLM) broken ?
YES
YES
Is D2 Error cleared ?
Check the voltage at DCLM ON-N.
Does the voltage drop(
+24V )between
ECN15-3 and ECN2-6?
Complete
NO
YES
Replace the clutch (DCLM) with a new clutch.
NO
Does the voltage jump(
)between ECN1-2 and ECN2-8 ?
YES
Replace IOD2 PWB with a new one.
NO
YES
Is D2 Error cleared ?
NO
Replace current MCTL PWB with a new one.
Is D2 Error cleared ?
NO
Re-check
YES
IOD2
MCTL
14
12CN
ECN1 ECN15
DCL(M)ON-P
2
2
1
Complete
3
ECN2
+24V-1 3
PGND 6
SGND 8
8-23
16
+24V-1
DCL(M)ON-N DCLM
Complete
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Code
D3
Name of Part
Developer Clutch (DCLC)
Confirm the connection of Connector.
NO
Is the connection proper between ECN16 of IOD2 and Clutch (DCLC) ?
Connect the harness.
Connect the connector properly.
Is the harness of Clutch (DCLC) broken ?
YES
YES
Is D3 Error cleared ?
Complete
NO
Check the voltage at DCLC ON-N.
Does the voltage drop (
+24V )
between ECN16-3 and ECN2-6?
YES
Replace the clutch (DCLC) with a new clutch.
NO
Does the voltage jump (
) between ECN1-1 and ECN2-8 ?
YES
Replace IOD2 PWB with a new one.
NO
YES
Is D3 Error cleared ?
Replace current MCTL PWB with a new one.
Is D3 Error cleared ?
Complete
NO
NO
YES
IOD2
14
15
ECN1 ECN16
DCL(C)ON-P
+24V-1
1
1
1
DCL(C)ON-P
3
MCTL
12CN
Re-check
Complete
ECN2
+24V-1 3
PGND 6
SGND 8
8-24
DCLC
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Error Code
D4
Name of Part
Developer Clutch (DCLK)
Confirm the connection of Connector.
NO
Is the connection proper between ECN13 of IOD2 and Clutch (DCLK) ?
Is the harness of Clutch (DCLK) broken ?
Connect the harness.
Connect the connector properly.
YES
YES
Is D4 Error cleared ?
Complete
NO
Check the voltage at DCLK ON-N.
Does the voltage drop (
+24V
) between ECN13-4 and ECN2-6?
YES
Replace the clutch (DCLK) with a new clutch.
NO
Does the voltage jump (
) between ECN1-4 and ECN2-12 ?
YES
Replace IOD2 PWB with a new one.
NO
YES
Is D4 Error cleared ?
Replace current MCTL PWB with a new one.
Is D4 Error cleared ?
Complete
NO
NO
YES
Complete
Re-check
IOD2
14
18
ECN1 ECN13
DCL(K)ON-P
+24V-1
4
1
4
DCL(K)ON-P
3
MCTL
12CN
ECN2
+24V-1 3
PGND 6
SGND 8
8-25
DCLK
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Code
D5
Name of Part
Developer Solenoid (PSL KY)
Confirm the connection of Connector.
NO
Is the connection proper between ECN3 of IOD2 and Solenoid (PSL YM) ?
Connect the harness.
Connect the connector properly
Is the harness of Solenoid (PSL KY) broken ?
YES
Is D5 Error cleared ?
+24V )
between ECN3-10 and ECN2-6?
Complete
NO
Check the voltage at (PSL YM) ON-N.
Does the voltage drop (
YES
YES
Replace the front cover unit with a new unit.
NO
Does the voltage jump (
) between ECN1-5and ECN2-8 ?
YES
Replace IOD2 PWB with a new one.
NO
Is D5 Error cleared ?
Complete
NO
Replace current MCTL PWB with a new one.
Is D5 Error cleared
YES
NO
Re-check
YES
MCTC
12CN
IOD2
14
19
ECN1 ECN3
PSL(KY)ON-P
+24V-1
5
5
9
PSL(KY)ON-N
10
Complete
ECN2
+24V-1 3
PGND 6
SGND 8
8-26
PSL KY
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
D6
Error Code
Name of Part
Developer Solenoid (PSL MC)
Confirm the connection of Connector.
NO
Is the connection proper between ECN3 of IOD2 and Solenoid (PSL KC) ?
Connect the harness.
Connect the connector properly.
Is the harness of Solenoid (PSL KC) broken ?
YES
Is D6 Error cleared ?
+24V
) between ECN3-7and ECN2-6?
Complete
NO
Check the voltage at (PSL KC) ON-N.
Does the voltage drop (
YES
YES
Replace the front cover unit with a new unit.
NO
Does the voltage jump (
) between ECN1-6and ECN2-8 ?
YES
Replace IOD2 PWB with a new one.
NO
Is D6 Error cleared ?
Complete
NO
Replace current MCTL PWB with a new one.
Is D6 Error cleared ?
YES
NO
Re-check
YES
Complete
IOD2
MCTC
14
19
ECN1 ECN3
12CN
PSL(MC)ON-P
+24V-1
6
8
6
PSL(MC)ON-N
7
ECN2
+24V-1 3
PGND 6
SGND 8
8-27
PSL MC
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Code
E1
Concerned Part Developer Motor(DM)
Is there any unusual rotation noise while printing ?
YES
Replace the toner cartridge.
NO
Confirm the connection of connector.
YES
Is the noise cleared ?
Job is complete.
NO
Is DCN9 of IOD1 properly connected with connector of DM1?
NO
Replace developer gear unit and motor.
YES
Is DCN1 of IOD1 properly connected with 11CN of MCTL?
NO
Check the voltage: +24V-1 and +5V-1.
Connect the connectors properly.
YES
Is E1 error cleared ?
Job is complete.
NO
+24V-1: Is the voltage +24V between DM1-4 and 6,DCN9-4 and 6, DCN10-3 and 4 ?
YES
Replace the developer motor.
+5V-1: Is the voltage +5V between DM1-5 and 9,DCN9-5 and 9, DCN10-7 and 9 ?
NO
Replace the IOD2.
Is E1 error cleared ?
MCTL
11CN
YES
Job is complete.
NO
Replace the IOD1.
Is E1 error cleared ?
NO
YES
Job is complete.
Replace the MCTL PWB.
DCN9
DCN1
29
IOD1
DMRDY-N
DMCLK
1
6
6
2 DMON-N
2 DMON-N 2
3 DMCLK
4 PGND
PGND
5
+24V-1
6
+24V-1 3
7 +24V-1
PGND 4
SGND
8
+5V-1
7
9 +5V-1
SGND
9
5
DCN10
8-28
DM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DM
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Error Code
E2
Concerned Part Main Motor(MM)
Does a belt cartridge rotate lightly ?
YES
Does a fuser unit rotate lightly ?
NO
Replace the belt cartridge.
NO
Replace the fuser unit.
YES
Confirm the connection of connector.
YES
Is E2 error cleared ?
Job is complete.
NO
Is ECN12 of IOD2 properly connected with connector of DM1 ?
NO
Replace developer gear unit and motor.
Is ECN2 of IOD2 properly connected with DCN10 of IOD1 ?
YES
Is E2 error cleared ?
NO
Is ECN1 of IOD2 properly connected with 12CN of MCTL ?
YES
Job is complete.
Check the voltage:+24V-1 and +5V-1.
+24V-1: Is the voltage +24V between MM1-4 and 5, ECN12-4 and 5, ECN2-5 and 1 ?
YES
Replace the main motor.
+5V-1: Is the voltage +5V between MM1-6 and 7, ECN12-6 and 7, ECN2-7 and 1 ?
Is E2 error cleared ?
NO
YES
Job is complete.
Replace the IOD2.
Is E2 error cleared ?
NO
YES
Job is complete.
Replace the IOD1.
Is E2 error cleared ?
YES
NO
Replace the MCTL PWB.
Job is complete.
8-29
MCTL
12CN
14
IOD2
MMCLK
7 MMON-N 7 ECN1 1
8
8
2
7 MMREV-N 9
3
MMENC
10
10
ECN12 4
6
ECN2
5
IOD1
+24V-1 1
6
DCN10 1
PGND 5
7
5
+5V-1 7
8
7
9
9 SGND 9
28
MMRDY-N
MMON-N
MMCLK
PGND
+24V-1
SGND
+5V-1
MMENC
MMREV-N
MM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MM
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Code
Concerned Part
E3
Drum HP Sensor
Is a belt cartridge properly installed ?
NO
Re-install or replace the belt cartridge.
YES
Does a transfer drum rotate lightly ?
NO
YES
Is an encoder plate deformed ?
Replace the transfer drum.
Is a rotation torque excessive ?
YES
Confirm the connection of connector.
NO
Is DCN4 of IOD1 properly connected with a connector of drum HP sensor ?
NO
Is E3 error cleared ?
Connect them properly
YES
NO
Check the voltage: +5V-1
Is the voltage +5V between DCN4-1 and 3 ?
YES
YES
Is E3 error cleared ?
Job is complete.
Replace the drum HP sensor.
NO
Is the voltage +5V between DCN2-1 and 2 ?
YES
Replace the IOD1 PWB.
NO
Replace a low voltage power supply (LVPS).
Is E3 error cleared ?
NO
NO
Is E3 error cleared ?
Replace the MCTL PWB.
YES
MCTL
1LCN
5
31
Job is complete.
LVPS
ACN1
HPSEN-N
31
DCN1
DCN2
1
1 +5V-1 1
2 SGND 2
8-30
IOD1
DCN4
7
Drum Encoder Sensor
(EN)
Relay connector
1 +5V-1
2 HPSEN-N
3 SGND
1
2
3
1
2
3
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Error Code
E4
Concerned Part Toner Sensor PCB.(LED side)
Confirm the connection of a toner sensor PCB.(LED side) connector.
Is DCN7 of IOD1 properly connected with a connector of the toner sensor ?
NO
Connect them properly.
YES
NO
Check the voltage(LEDON-N/P)
Is a signal voltage between DCN7-7 and 9 to be a rising edge(+24V) ?
YES
YES
Is E4 error cleared ?
Job is complete.
Replace the toner sensor PCB.
NO
Is a signal voltage between DCN1-15 and 41 to be a trailing edge ?
NO
Replace the IOD1 PWB.
YES
Is E4 error cleared ?
NO
Replace the MCTL PWB.
YES
Job is complete.
Toner Empty PCB.
IOD1
MCTL
1ICN
DCN1 DCN7
5
41 SGND 41
15 LEDON-N 15
8-31
9
LEDON-P
7
7
8 TLSCHK 8
9 SGND 9
7
8
9
1
2
3
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
E5
Error Code
Concerned Part
Transfer Cam Clutch (TRCM)
Confirm the connection of a transfer solenoid connector.
YES
Is ECN8 of IOD2 properly connected with a connector of the solenoid ?
NO
Connect them properly.
Is ECN1 of IOD2 properly connected with 12CN of MCTL PWB ?
YES
YES
Is E5 error cleared ?
NO
Job is complete.
Check the voltage(TRSLON-N/P)
Is a single voltage between ECN8-4 and ECN2-5 of IOD2 to be a trailing edge ?
YES
Replace the transfer solenoid.
NO
Is a single voltage between 5 of ECN2 and 18 of IOD2 to be a rising edge ?
YES
Replace the IOD2 PWB.
NO
Is E5 error cleared ?
NO
Replace the MCTL PWB.
YES
Job is complete.
IOD2
ECN1
14
ECN8
26
Transfer Cam Clutch
TRSLON-P
18
+24V-1
18
1
4 TRSLON-N TRCM
ECN2
MCTL
12CN
+24V-1
PGND
8-32
1
5
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
E6
Error Code
Concerned Part
Cleaning Brush Solenoid (FBCM)
Confirm the connection of a cleaning brush solenoid connector.
YES
Is ECN10 of IOD2 properly connected with a connector of the solenoid ?
NO
Connect them properly.
Is ECN1 of IOD2 properly connected with 11CN of MCTL PWB ?
YES
YES
Is E6 error cleared ?
NO
Job is complete.
Check the voltage (FBSLON-N/P)
Is a single voltage between ECN10-4 and ECN2-5 of IOD2 to be a trailing edge ?
Is a single voltage between ECN1-17 and ECN2-5 of IOD2 to be a rising edge ?
YES
Replace the transfer solenoid.
YES
Replace the IOD2 PWB.
NO
Is E6 error cleared ?
NO
Replace the MCTL PWB.
YES
Job is complete.
MCTL
11CN
IOD2
ECN1
14
Drum Cleaner
ECN10
25
Solenoid
FBSLON-P
17
+24V-1
17
1
4 FBSLON-N FBCM
ECN2
+24V-1 1
PGND 5
8-33
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Code
E7
Concerned Part
Cleaner Clutch
Confirm the connection of a cleaner clutch connector.
Is ECN11 of IOD2 properly connected with a connector of the clutch ?
NO
Connect them properly.
Is ECN2 of IOD2 properly connected with DCN10 of IOD1 ?
Is ECN1 of IOD1 properly connected with 11CN of MCTL PWB ?
YES
Is E7 error cleared ?
Job is complete.
NO
YES
Check the voltage (FBCLON-N/P)
Is a single voltage between ECN11-3 and ECN2-5 of IOD2 to be a trailing edge?
Is a single voltage between ECN2-5 and 16 of ECN1 to be a rising edge ?
YES
Replace the cleaner clutch.
YES
Replace the IOD2 PWB.
NO
Is E7 error cleared ?
NO
Replace the MCTL PWB.
YES
Job is complete.
IOD2
ECN1
14
ECN11
21
Cleaner Clutch
16 FBCLON-P 16
1 +24V-1
3 FBCLON-N FBCL
MCTL
11CN
+24V-1
PGND
8-34
ECN2
1
5
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Error Code
Concerned Part
E8
Fuser Clutch(FUCL)
Confirm the connection of a fuser clutch connector.
Is ECN9 of IOD2 properly connected with a connector of the clutch ?
NO
Connect them properly.
Is ECN1 of IOD2 properly connected with 12CN of MCTL PWB ?
Job is complete.
NO
Check the voltage (FUCLON-N/P)
Is a single voltage between ECN9-3 and ECN2-8 of IOD2 to be a trailing edge ?
YES
Is E8 error cleared ?
YES
YES
Replace the cleaner clutch(FUCL).
NO
Is a single voltage between ECN1-20 and ECN2-12 of IOD2 to be a rising edge ?
YES
Replace the IOD2 PWB.
NO
Is E8 error cleared ?
NO
Replace the MCTL PWB.
YES
Job is complete.
MCTL
12CN
IOD2
ECN1 ECN9
14
FUCLON-P
20
20
ECN2
+24V-1 5
PGND 8
SGND 12
8-35
1
3
20
Fuser Clutch
+24V-1
FUCLON-N FUCL
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Code
E9
Concerned Part
Belt Sensor (PBS)
Is a belt cartridge leaned to one side ?
YES
NO
Is a belt sensor stained ?
Replace the belt cartridge.
Install the printer to be leveled out.
YES
Clean the belt.
NO
Is E9 error cleared ?
Confirm the connection of connector.
NO
Is DCN16 of IOD1 properly connected with a connector of the sensor ?
NO
Connect them properly.
Is DCN1 of IOD1 properly connected with 11CN of MCTL PWB ?
Job is complete.
NO
Check the voltage (+5V-1)
Is the voltage +5V between DCN16-2 and 3 of IOD1?
YES
Is E9 error cleared ?
YES
YES
Replace the belt sensor (PBS).
YES
Replace the IOD1 PWB.
NO
Is the voltage +5V between DCN2-1 and 4 of IOD1?
Is E9 error cleared ?
NO
Replace the MCTL PWB.
YES
Job is complete.
IOD1
DCN1 DCN16
MCTL
11CN
5
29 PBSEN-N 29
DCN2
+5V-1
8-36
1
4
1
2
3
13
PBSEN-N
+5V-1
SGND
Belt Sensor
PBS
Sensor
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Error Code
Concerned Part
EL
Erase Lamp (EL)
Confirm the connection of a erase lamp connector.
Is DCN7 of IOD1 properly connected with a connector of the erase lamp ?
NO
Connect them properly.
Is DCN1 of IOD1 properly connected with 11CN of MCTL PWB ?
Job is complete.
NO
Check the voltage (ELON-N/P)
Is a single voltage between DCN7-11 and DCN2-25 to be a trailing edge ?
YES
Is EL error cleared ?
YES
YES
Replace the LED PCB.
NO
Is a single voltage between DCN1-27 and 44 of IOD2 to be a rising edge ?
YES
Replace the IOD1 PWB.
NO
Is EL error cleared ?
NO
Replace the MCTL PWB.
YES
Job is complete.
Relay Connector
IOD1
DCN1 DCN7
5
10
44 PGND 44
11
27 ELON-P 27
9
MCTL
11CN
DCN2
PGND
8-37
25
9
+24V-1
1
ELON-N 2
Erase Lamp
+24V-1
1
ELON-N
2
EL
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Code
F0
Concerned Part
Fan Motor (Control Cooling)
Confirm the connection of a fan motor connector.
Is DCN18 of IOD1 properly connected with a connector of the fan motor ?
NO
Connect them properly.
Is DCN1 of IOD1 properly connected with 11CN of MCTL PWB ?
Is F0 error cleared ?
YES
Job is complete.
NO
Check the voltage (CTFANON-P)
Is the voltage between DCN18-1 and 2 to be a trailing edge ?
YES
YES
Replace the fan motor.
NO
Is the voltage between DCN1-33 and 44 to be a trailing edge ?
YES
Replace the IOD1 PWB.
NO
Is F0 error cleared ?
NO
Replace the MCTL PWB.
YES
Job is complete.
IOD1
10
DCN1 DCN18
5
CTFANON-P
PGND
1
44
44
PGND
2
33 CTFANON-P 33
CTFANERR
3
DCN2
+24V-1
17
PGND 25
MCTL
11CN
8-38
Control Fan
CTL
FAN
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Error Code
F2
Concerned Part
Fan Motor (OZFAN)
Confirm the connection of a fan motor connector.
Is ECN5 of IOD2 properly connected with a connector of the fan motor ?
NO
Connect them properly.
Is ECN1 of IOD2 properly connected with 12CN of MCTL PWB ?
Job is complete.
NO
Check the voltage (OZFANON-P)
Is the voltage between ECN5-1 and 2 to be a trailing edge ?
YES
Is F2 error cleared ?
YES
YES
Replace the fan motor (OZFAN).
NO
Is the voltage between ECN1-19 and ECN2-8 to be a trailing edge ?
YES
Replace the IOD2 PWB.
NO
Is F2 error cleared ?
NO
Replace the MCTL PWB.
YES
Job is complete.
IOD2
ECN1 ECN5
MCTL
12CN
22
OZFANON-P
1
PGND
2
OZFANERR
3
14
OZFANON-P
19
19
+5v-1
PGND
8-39
1
8
ECN2
Ozone Fan
OZ
FAN
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Code
F4
Concerned Part
Heater Fan (HTFAN)
Confirm the connection of a heater fan connector.
Is DCN14 of IOD1 properly connected with a connector of the heater fan ?
NO
Connect them properly.
Is DCN1 of IOD1 properly connected with 11CN of MCTL PWB ?
Is F4 error cleared ?
NO
Job is complete.
NO
Check the voltage (HTFANON-P).
Is the voltage between DCN14-10 and 11 to be a rising edge ?
YES
YES
Replace the heater fan.
NO
Is the voltage between DCN1-35 and 44 to be a rising edge ?
YES
Replace the IOD1 PWB.
NO
Is F4 error cleared ?
NO
Replace the MCTL PWB.
YES
Job is complete.
IOD1
12
DCN1 DCN14
5
HTFANON-P
PGND
10
44
44
PGND
11
35 HTFANON-P 35
12 HTFANERR
DCN1
+24V-1
17
PGND 25
MCTL
11CN
8-40
Heater Fan
HTFAN
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
F5
Error Code
Concerned Part High-voltage power supply unit (HVU)
Confirm the status of a charger unit.
Is the charger unit properly installed ?
NO
Re-install the charger unit.
YES
Is a corona wire cut or shorted ?
YES
Replace the charger unit or belt cartridge.
NO
Confirm the connection of high voltage wiring.
YES
Is F5 error cleared ?
Job is complete.
NO
Is there any contract failure of the high voltage (CHV) output terminal ?
YES
Have the electric pole properly contact.
NO
Is there any contract failure or short of CHV socket part ?
YES
Clean the socket part.
NO
YES
Is F5 error cleared ?
Replace the high voltage (HVU)
Job is complete.
NO
Is F5 error cleared ?
NO
Replace the IOD1 or MCTL PWB.
YES
Job is complete.
MCTL
11CN
10
8-41
IOD1
DCN17
5
CHV ON
10
HVU
2
BCN1 CHV
1 +24V-1 1
HV
CHV ON-N
7
7
8 CHVERR 8
Charger Unit
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Code
Concerned Part
H0 (wire cut/ short error of thermistor)
Fusing Unit
Confirm the connection of a fusing unit connector.
Is the fusing unit properly installed ?
Is there any contact failure due to damaged connector of fusing unit ?
Are the connectors properly connected between the fusing unit
and BCN2 of the high voltage unit (HVU) ?
NO
Re-install the fusing unit.
YES
Replace the charger unit or belt cartridge.
NO
Connect them properly.
NO
YES
Is H0 error cleared ?
Job is complete.
Replace the fusing unit.
Is H0 error cleared ?
NO
Replace the IOD1 or MCTL PWB.
YES
Job is complete.
Fuser Connector
MCTL
11CN
30
28
8-42
5
TH1
TH2
IOD1
DCN1 DCN14
30
28
16
18
2
TH1
TH2
HVU
BCN1 BCN2
16
18
1
2
Fusing Unit
34
TH1
TH2
3
4
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
H2,H3,H4
Error Code
Concerned Part
Fusing Unit and Others
Confirm that a fusing heater is lit.
Is the fusing heater controlled for On/Off.
NO
Confirm the wiring and connector of the heater.
YES
Is the line voltage to be the default value ?
NO
Confirm the input voltage.
Is the connector HP/HN connected ?
YES
Is the rating of fusing heater correct ?
NO
NO
Connect them properly.
YES
Confirm the rating and replace
the fusing heater.
Is the fusing unit properly installed ?
NO
Install it properly.
YES
Are H2,H3 and H4 errors cleared ?
YES
Is the fuser connector damaged ?
YES
Replace the connector.
NO
NO
Is there any contract failure of the lamp holder ?
YES
Replace the lamp and lamp holder.
NO
Is the heater wiring cut or damaged ?
Replace the fusing unit.
YES
Are H2,H3 and H4 errors cleared ?
NO
Are H2,H3 and H4 errors cleared ?
NO
NO
YES
Replace the power supply unit (LVPS).
YES
Are H2,H3 and H4 errors cleared ?
NO
Replace the MCTL PWB.
Job is complete.
8-43
YES
Replace the heater.
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Code
Concerned Part
L1 (Beam Detecting Error)
Laser Unit
Confirm the connection of an laser unit connector.
Is the connector PDCN properly connected ?
NO
Connect the connector properly.
Are the connector LCN1 and LCN of MCTL properly connected ?
YES
Is L1 error cleared ?
NO
YES
Replace the laser unit.
Is L1 error cleared ?
YES
NO
Replace the MCTL PWB.
Job is complete.
MCTL
PD
LCN
SGND
+5V-1R
BDT
LDU
PDCN
LCN1
31
SM
SM
20
8-44
Laser Unit
LCN3
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
Error Code
L2
Concerned Part
Laser Unit
Is the connector LCN3 properly connected ?
NO
Connect the connector properly.
YES
Is L2 error cleared ?
NO
YES
Replace the laser unit.
Is L2 error cleared ?
YES
NO
Replace the MCTL PWB.
Job is complete.
MCTL
LCN
PD
LDU
SCMCLK
SCMRDY
SCMON
GND
+24V-1
31
20
8-45
LCN3
1
2
3
4 SM
5
Laser Unit
SM
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
LL
Error Code
Concerned Part
Laser Unit
Confirm the connection of an laser unit connector.
Is the connector LCN3 properly connected ?
NO
Connect the connector properly.
Is the connector PDCN properly connected ?
Are the connector LCN1 and LCN properly connected ?
YES
Is LL error cleared ?
NO
YES
Replace the laser unit.
Is LL error cleared ?
YES
NO
Job is complete.
Replace the MCTL PWB. or
DC power supply (LVPS).
MCTL
PD
3
LCN
LDU
PDCN
LCN3
31
5
SM
20
8-46
Laser Unit
LCN1
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
5.
IMAGE FAILURE
(1)
(4)
(7)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(5)
(9)-a
(8)
(9)-b
(10)
(12)
(13)
(11)
(14)
8-47
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
(15)-a
(15)-b
(17)
(16)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
244m/m
8-48
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
I-1
Background
Phenomenon
Background is smeared due to toner spread as shown in print sample (1) of Page 8-45.
Main Causes
(1) Too small toner mass and charging level in the developing process.
(2) Poor contact of the developer roller’s bias pole.
(3) Life expired or failure of the OPC belt cartridge.
(4) Failure of the high-voltage power supply unit.
Countermeasures
(1) Replace the toner cartridge.
(2) Confirm if the developer bias pole is deformed or not.
(3) Replace the OPC belt cartridge.
(4) Replace the high-voltage power supply unit.
I-2
Missing Image at Edge
Phenomenon
There is missing or peeling toner found in the image at the edge as shown in the print sample
(2) of Page 8-45.
Main Causes
(1) Too small toner mass and charging level in the developing process.
(2) The OPC belt is deformed (waving).
Countermeasures
(1) Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
(2) Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one.
8-49
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
I-3
Jitter
Phenomenon
Uneven optical density appears periodically in the horizontal direction on the printed image as
shown in print sample (3) of Page 8-45.
Main Causes
(1) Failure of main motor.
i) Irregular rotation of the drive motor.
ii) Failure of the gears.
iii) Variation of OPC belt running speed due to above reasons.
(2) Failure of the OPC belt.
Countermeasures
(1) Replace the main motor with a new one.
(2) Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one.
NOTE:
If the print mode is set to CAPT (Color Advanced Photoscale Technology) in the driver, this
problem might occur. Change the mode setting to normal mode.
I-4
Ribbing
Phenomenon
Light print occurs on the right or left hand side of the image as shown in print sample (4) of
Page 8-45.
Main Causes
(1) Slight tilt on the surface of printer
installation table.
(Tilt should be less than 1°.)
(2) Toner amount in the toner cartridge
is insufficient.
(3) Toner concentrates to one side in
the toner cartridge since the toner
cartridge is not level.
(4) The spring at the back of the
developer unit is deformed.
1
Fig. 8-6
(5) The front cover unit is not firmly closed.
Countermeasures
(1) Confirm that the printer installation table is flat and level.
(2) Shake the toner cartridge horizontally several times to remedy the concentration.
(3) Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
(4) Confirm the open/close position of the front cover to be firmly closed.
8-50
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
I-5
Wrinkle / Image Migration
Phenomenon
Banding shadows of different optical density appear due to wrinkle, image migration and
color misregistration occurring on the print paper as shown in print sample (5) of Page 8-45.
Main Causes
(1) Print paper other than the recommended paper is being used.
(2) The paper discharger unit of the transfer unit is not functioning.
(3) The transfer unit is not locked properly.
(4) Fuser roller is deformed or is reaching the end of life.
(5) One side of the fusing unit is lifted up slightly.
Countermeasures
(1) Use a recommended paper.
(2) Confirm if the transfer unit is properly installed to the paper discharger unit and functioning
normally.
2-1) Push the transfer unit and ensure it is locked at right and left sides.
(3) Refit the fusing unit correctly and lock it in position.
(4) Replace the fusing unit with a new one.
8-51
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
I-6
White Line (1)
Phenomenon
Vertical white line appears in the specific color area when test-printed in the four color mode
(Stripe Mode), as shown in print sample (6) of Page 8-45.
Main Causes
(1) Foreign particles adhering to the following places around the developer roller. (Refer to
Fig.8-12.)
x
Between the cartridge cover and developer roller (a)
x
On the surface of the developer roller (b)
x
Between the blade fixing plate and the developer roller (c)
x
Between the blade and the developer roller (d)
(2) Foreign particles adhering to the toner cartridge’s main blade of the color in question.
Developer roller
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Blade fixing plate
Developer blade
Fig. 8-7
Countermeasures
(1) Implement the test print.
(2) Confirm the color of the toner cartridge in question that has caused the white line.
(3) Remove the foreign particles adhering to the developer roller.
If foreign particles adhere to (d) of Fig.8-12, remove them referring to one of the figures
below.
Approx. 1 cm
Fig. 8-9
Piece of OHP
sheet
Fig. 8-8
8-52
Developer roller
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
I-7
White Line (2)
Phenomenon
Vertical white line appears from the leading edge to the trailing edge of the printed image as
shown in print sample (7) of Page 8-45.
Main Causes
The dustproof glass of the laser unit is smeared with toner or foreign particles.
Countermeasures
Clean the dustproof glass. (See Section 2.8 of Chapter 6.)
(1) Remove the OPC belt cartridge and toner cartridges.
(2) Remove the dustproof glass from the laser unit.
(3) Clean the dustproof glass.
I-8
Vertical White Band
Phenomenon
White band appears in the vertical direction of printed image as shown in print sample (8) of
Page 8-45.
Main Causes
Silicone oil adhering to the transfer drum.
Transfer drum
Transfer unit
Adhered silicon oil
Transfer drum
Fig. 8-10
Countermeasures
(1) Wipe off the oil adhering to the transfer unit and its perimeter.
(2) Replace the transfer drum with a new one. (See Section 4.8 of Chapter 6.)
(3) If the oil adhesion is excessive, replace the OPC belt cartridge and drum cleaner with new
ones. (See Section 4.1 and 4.5 of Chapter 6.)
8-53
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
I-9
Black Line / Blur in the Image
Phenomenon
Fine black line or blur appears in the printed image as shown in print sample (9) of Page 845.
Main Causes
(1) The corona wire of the paper discharger unit is dirty.
(2) OPC belt surface is damaged.
(3) Foreign particles (paper dust, etc.) are stuck between the cleaning blade and OPC belt.
(4) Debris adhering to the base of the toner cartridge’s developer roller where it contacts with
the OPC belt.
Countermeasures
(1) Remove the OPC belt cartridge.
1-1) Clean the discharger unit (corona wire). (See Section 2.6 of Chapter 6.)
1-2) Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one. (See Section 4.1 of Chapter 6.)
(2) Clean the surface of the developer roller.
I-10
Vertical Line
Phenomenon
Vertical line appears in the printed image as shown in print sample (10) of Page 8-45.
Main Causes
(1) Foreign particles (dust, etc.) adhering to the parts located around the transfer drum, and
consequently in contact with the toner image on the transfer drum.
(2) Damage of the OPC belt due to foreign particles adhering to the blade of the OPC belt
cleaner.
Countermeasures
(1) Clean the paper discharger unit. (See Section 2.5 of Chapter 6.)
(2) Clean the charger unit (corona wire) of the OPC belt cartridge. (See Section 2.6 of
Chapter 6.)
(3) Clean the rear face of the waste toner feeder.
(4) Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one.
8-54
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
I-11
Vertically Staggered Image
Phenomenon
Printed image staggered in the vertical direction as shown in print sample (11) of Page 8-45.
Main Causes
(1) Shock or vibration applied to the printer.
(2) Failure of the laser unit; vibration from rotation of the scanner motor.
Countermeasures
(1) Do not apply shock or vibration to the printer body.
(2) Installation location should be appropriate with no possibility of shock or vibration.
(3) Replace the laser unit with a new one. (See Section 4.5.3 of Chapter 7.)
I-12
Banding
Phenomenon
Banding line appears in the horizontal direction as shown in print sample (12) of Page 8-45.
Main Causes
This is a transfer failure due to the shock caused when the OPC belt seam passes over the
cleaning blade.
Belt seam
Fig. 8-11
Countermeasures
Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one. (See Section 4.1 of Chapter 6.)
8-55
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
I-13
White Band
Phenomenon
White banding line appears in the horizontal direction, and consequently causes a missing
image as shown in print sample (13) of Page 8-45.
Main Causes
(1) Installation failure of the transfer unit, and deformation of the transfer roller.
(2) Contact failure of the transfer roller bias pole.
(3) TR cam clutch failure.
Countermeasures
(1) Confirm if the transfer unit is properly locked in position and that both ends of the transfer
unit are held by the hooks.
(2) Confirm if the transfer unit is properly installed or not.
(3) Replace the TR cam clutch with a new one. (See Section 4.1.7 of Chapter 7.)
(4) Replace the transfer unit with a new one. (See Section 4.6.1 of Chapter 7.)
8-56
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
I-14
Toner Drop
Phenomenon
Toner spot stain is caused on the print by toner dropping within the printer engine as shown
in print sample (14) of Page 8-45.
Main Causes
(1) Toner drops onto the transfer drum due to the breakdown of the waste toner feeder.
1-1) Mylar of the waste toner feeder is deformed.
1-2) Waste toner is not properly collected by the waste toner feeder.
Drum Cleaner
Mylar
Cleaning brush
Waste toner feeder
Toner drop
Transfer Drum
Fig. 8-12
(2) Toner adhering to the developer roller drops on the OPC belt .
Countermeasures
(1) Check the cleaning brush and waste toner feeder.
1-1)
Clean the perimeter of the cleaning brush installation location.
1-2)
Check if the seal is deformed or damage. If there is any deformation or damage,
replace the waste toner feeder with a new one.
1-3)
Check if waste toner is stuck in the printer engine. Remove the waste toner with a
vacuum cleaner designed to manage toner.
2) Remove the toner cartridge.
2-1) Clean the surface of the developer roller.
2-2) Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
8-57
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
I-15
White Spot / Black Spot
Phenomenon
White spots and black spots appear on the print as shown in print sample (15) of Page 8-46.
Main Causes
(1) Foreign particles adhering to the OPC belt or transfer drum.
(2) The OPC belt or transfer drum is damaged.
(3) Foreign particles mixed in the toner.
(4) Foreign particles adhering to the transfer roller, or local deformation of the transfer roller.
Countermeasures
(1) Remove the OPC belt cartridge.
1-1)
Lightly wipe off the foreign particles adhering to the OPC belt using a cotton cloth.
1-2)
Replace the damaged OPC belt cartridge with a new one. (See Section 4.1 of
Chapter 6.)
(2) Open the transfer unit, and check the transfer drum.
2-1)
Lightly wipe off the foreign particles adhering to the transfer drum using a cotton
cloth.
2-2) Replace the damaged transfer drum with a new one. (See Section 4.8 of Chapter 6.)
(3) Remove the toner cartridge.
3-1)
Clean the surface of the developer roller.
3-2)
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
(4) Replace the transfer unit with a new one. (See Section 4.6.1 of Chapter 7.)
I-16
Mixed Color Image
Phenomenon
Mixed color image appears in the print as shown in print sample (16) of Page 8-46.
Main Causes
(1) Failure of toner cartridge: Blade pressure of the developer roller is incorrect or the blade is
deformed.
(2) Restitution error of toner cartridge.
Countermeasures
(1) Confirm the toner cartridge can be inserted smoothly.
(2) Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
(3) Reconfirm that the front cover unit is locked.
8-58
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
I-17
Color Misregistration
Phenomenon
Color misregistration is caused between two colors as shown in print sample (17) of Page 846.
Main Causes
(1) The OPC belt cartridge is not properly installed.
(2) The OPC belt cartridge is deformed.
(3) The cleaning brush of the drum cleaner is unstable in operation.
(4) Rotational load on the OPC belt cartridge is excessive.
** This problem might occur in the first page printed in color mode immediately after printing
in monochrome mode, or the first page immediately after turning on the printer.
Countermeasures
(1) Reset the OPC belt cartridge properly.
(2) Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one. (See Section 4.1 of Chapter 6.)
(3) Replace the drum cleaner with a new one.
I-18
Toner Streak
Phenomenon
Brush mark line of uneven scanning density is caused in the image as shown in print sample
(18) of Page 8-46.
Main Causes
(1) Main blade of the developer unit and the reset roller is not normal.
(2) Location of the toner cartridge is not correct.
(3) Transport paddle in the toner cartridge is deformed.
(4) Brush mark line appears in the continuous printing of high coverage (solid) patterns.
Countermeasures
(1) Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
(2) Temporarily suspending the printing, agitate the toner cartridge and stabilize the
replenishment of toner.
8-59
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
I-19
Mottle
Phenomenon
Variation of the scanning density is found in the image as shown in print sample (19) of Page
8-46.
Main Causes
(1) The transfer unit is not fixed in place.
(2) Assembly of the transfer roller is inaccurate.
(3) THV output of the high-voltage power supply unit is not normal.
(4) Failure of the toner cartridge.
(5) Deformation of the print paper.
Countermeasures
(1) Confirm that the transfer unit is firmly locked in place.
(2) Confirm that the transfer roller is properly installed.
(3) Replace the high-voltage power supply unit with a new one. (See Section 4.3.3 of Chapter
7.)
(4) Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
(5) Replace the paper with new paper from a freshly opened ream.
I-20
Residual Image
Phenomenon
Image of the preceding page appears on every other page as shown in print sample (20) of
Page 8-46.
Main Causes
(1) Cleaning failure due to lifting of the cleaning brush of the drum cleaner.
(2) Contact failure of the drum cleaner’s bias pole.
(3) Failure of the high-voltage power supply unit.
Countermeasures
(1) Check if the drum cleaner is properly installed or not.
(2) Replace the failed high-voltage power supply unit with a new one. (See Section 4.3.3 of
Chapter 7.)
8-60
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
I-21
Insufficient Gloss
Phenomenon
Gloss of the print is not sufficient as shown in print sample (21) of Page 8-46.
Main Causes
(1) The fuser cleaner is stained.
(2) The fuser roller is deteriorated.
Countermeasures
(1) Replace the fuser cleaner with a new one. (See Section 4.2 of Chapter 6.)
(2) Replace the fusing unit with a new one. (See Section 4.2 of Chapter 6.)
NOTE:
When replacing the fusing unit, wait approximately for 30 minutes after the new unit is
installed to allow the fusing oil to circulate in the new fusing unit.
I-22
Back Stain
Phenomenon
Back side of the print paper is stained as shown in print sample (22) of Page 8-46.
Main Causes
Fusing unit:
(1) The cleaning pad of the fuser cleaner is stained.
(2) Silicone oil in the oil bottle is short.
(3) The fuser roller and back-up roller are dirty.
Countermeasures
(1) Replace the fuser cleaner with a new one. (See Section 4.2 of Chapter 6.)
(2) Clean the fuser roller and back-up roller.
(3) Replace the fusing unit with a new one. (See Section 4.2 of Chapter 6.)
8-61
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
I-23
White Print
Phenomenon
A blank page (no print at all) is output or a specific color is missing (not printed) as shown in
print sample (23) of Page 8-46.
Main Causes
(1) Laser light path is blocked by paper or other material stuck at the opening of the laser
unit.
(2) The TR cam clutch is broken (not functioning).
(3) There is no belt bias voltage (CBV).
(4) There is no output from the high-voltage power supply unit (HVU) due to breakdown.
Countermeasures
(1) Confirm that there are no foreign objects stuck in the opening of the laser unit.
(2) Replace the TR cam clutch with a new one. (See Section 4.1.7 of Chapter 7.)
(3) Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one. (See Section 4.1 of Chapter 6.)
(4) Replace the high-voltage power supply unit with a new one. (See Section 4.3.3 of Chapter
7.)
I-24
Insufficient Fusing
Phenomenon
Printed image is partially missing as shown in print sample (24) of Page 8-46. This proves
that the fusing is insufficient.
Main Causes
(1) Wrong selection of print media (label or envelope, etc.) at the Host (driver) side.
(2) Recommended paper is not being used.
(3) Double-feed paper.
(4) Failure of the fusing unit.
Countermeasures
(1) Adjust the mode of Host side to suit the print media in use.
(2) Use the recommended paper.
(3) Fan the paper before loading in the media cassette.
(4) Replace the failed fusing unit with a new one. (See Section 4.2 of Chapter 6.)
8-62
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
I-25
Vertical Smear
Phenomenon
Printed image is smeared vertically as shown in print sample (25) of Page 8-46.
Main Causes
(1) Paper dust between the cleaning blade and OPC belt.
(2) Debris adhering to the base of a toner cartridge’s developer roller where it contacts with
the OPC belt.
Countermeasures
(1) Remove paper dust between the cleaning blade and OPC belt referring to the figure
below.
OPC belt cartridge
Fig. 8-13
(2) Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one.
I-26
Black Toner Light
Phenomenon
Black color of printed image is light as shown in print sample (26) of Page 8-46, and the
printer clatters at the same time.
Main Causes
Black toner in the cartridge has solidified because the printer is used under high temperature
circumstance or due to continuous printing.
Countermeasures
Replace the black toner cartridge with a new one.
8-63
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
I-27
Color Missing
Phenomenon
Color is missing in the printed image as shown in print sample (27) of Page 8-46.
Main Causes
Fusing failure due to using damp paper or using the printer under high humidity conditions.
Countermeasures
(1) Use the paper immediately after open the paper bag.
(2) Change the NVRAM setting. (Refer to ‘45-2 THV TUNE UP’ in Section 3.3 of Chapter 5.)
I-28
Horizontal Line 244mm from the Edge of Paper
Phenomenon
A horizontal line appears 244mm from the edge of the printed paper as shown in print
sample (28) of Page 8-46.
Main Causes
Vibration is caused when an OPC belt and the transfer drum contact.
Countermeasures
Change the resolution to 600 dpi.
I-29
Vertical Lines on OHP
Phenomenon
Vertical lines appear when printing the OHP sheet as shown in print sample (29) of Page 846.
Main Causes
Paper dust around the paper exit roller adhering to the OHP sheet.
Countermeasures
(1) Use the recommended OHP sheet.
(2) Clean the paper exit roller.
8-64
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
APPENDIX 1.
SERIAL NO. DESCRIPTIONS
The descriptions as below show how to read labels fitted to the printer parts.
< ID for production month of the Printer >
A:
January
E:
May
J:
September
B:
February
F:
June
K:
October
C:
March
G:
July
L:
November
D:
April
H:
August
M:
December
< ID for production month of parts other than the printer >
(1)
1:
January
5:
May
9:
September
2:
February
6:
June
X:
October
3:
March
7:
July
Y:
November
4:
April
8:
August
Z:
December
Printer
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
SERIAL NO.
FACTORY NO.
MODEL NO.
YEAR
MONTH
<Location>
Fig. A- 1
A-1
APPENDIX
(2)
Toner Cartridge
BR 1 2 2 1 1 X X X X X X X
TONER
PRODUCTION
YEAR
TONER
CARTRIDGE
PRODUCTIO
N DATE
SERIAL NO.
<Location>
Fig. A- 2
NOTE: There are two seals on each toner cartridge. On the starter toner, there is a “S”
written at the beginning of the first seal. Toner cartridges of accessories have “BR”
written as the above.
(3)
OPC Belt Cartridge
XXXXXX
REVISION
DATE OF CARTRIDGE
*MONTH OF CARTRIDGE
*MONTH OF BELT
YEAR OF BELT
*1-9 and X for Oct., Y for Nov., Z for Dec.
<Location>
Fig. A- 3
A-2
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(4)
Toner Cartridge, OPC Belt Cartridge Master Box
XXXX-XXX
REVISION
ND
2 LOT OF MONTH OF TONER CARTRIDGE
/BELT CARTRIDGE
ST
1 LOT OF MONTH OF TONER CARTRIDGE
/BELT CARTRIDGE
ND
2 LOT MONTH OF TONER/BELT
ND
2 LOT YEAR OF TONER/BELT
ST
1 LOT MONTH OF TONER/BELT
ST
1 LOT YEAR OF TONER/BELT
(5)
Fusing Unit
X X X X X X X X X
RATING VOLTAGE
REVISION
DATE OF FUSING UNIT
*MONTH OF FUSING UNIT
YEAR OF FUSING UNIT
*1-9 and X for Oct., Y for Nov., Z for Dec.
<Location>
Fig. A- 4
A-3
APPENDIX
(6)
Laser Unit
X X X X X REV
DATE
*MONTH
YEAR
*1-9 and X for Oct., Y for Nov., Z for Dec.
<Location>
Fig. A- 5
(7)
Transfer Drum
X X X X X X X X X X
*MONTH
FACTORY USE YEAR
*1-9 and X for Oct., Y for Nov., Z for Dec.
<Location>
Fig. A- 6
A-4
DATE
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
(8)
Power Supply Unit
S/N X X X X X X X
FACTORY USE
REV X X
YY/WW X X / X X
WEEK OF YEAR
YEAR OF POWER SUPPLY UNIT
<Location>
Fig. A- 7
A-5
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 2.
DIAMETER / CIRCUMFERENCE OF ROLLERS
The diameter or circumference of each roller is listed below;
No.
Parts Name
Diameter (Circumference)
1
OPC Belt
(509 mm)
2
Belt Drive Roller
I 32.4 mm (101.74 mm)
3
Developer Roller
I 22 mm (69.80 mm)
4
Transfer Roller
I 25 mm (78.5 mm)
5
Paper Pick-up Roller
I 40 mm (125.60 mm)
6
Transfer Drum
I 162 mm (508.68 mm)
7
Back-up Roller
I 40 mm (125.6 mm)
8
Fuser Roller
I 40 mm (125.6 mm)
9
Drum Cleaner
I 25 mm (78.50 mm)
10
Cleaning Roller
I 18 mm (56.52 mm)
11
Register Roller
I 18 mm (56.52 mm)
12
Paper Exit Roller
I 15.4 mm (48.36 mm)
A-6
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
APPENDIX 3.
SHELF LIFE OF EACH CONSUMABLE
Each consumable has its own shelf life as follows. Shelf life varies depending whether the
consumable packaging is open or not.
Consumable
Before unpacking *1
After unpacking *2
Toner cartridge (all colors)
3 years
1 year
OPC belt cartridge
3 years
1 year *3
N/A
N/A
Fuser cleaner
NOTE:
*1: The remaining consumable life is 1 year if it is stored for 2 years.
*2: Even though shelf life is one year after unpacking, the consumable life will be less than
one year if it is stored for more than 2 years before unpacking.
*3: The OPC belt cartridge must not be exposed to light after unpacking, if it is then this life is
invalid.
A-7
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 4.
CONSUMABLES REPLACEMENT
Each consumable below should be replaced according its own life.
1)
Toner Cartridge
Life:
K = 14,000 prints, CYM = 8,500 pritns
Condition:
Above figures are based on A4 or letter size 5% coverage. Life is
detected by the toner empty sensor.
NOTE:
Life of the starter toner cartridge supplied with the printer is half of the above figures.
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Oil Bottle
Life:
12,000 prints (A4 or letter)
Condition:
Life is detected by the oil empty sensor.
Waste Toner Pack
Life:
18,000 images
Condition:
Above figure is based on A4 or letter size 5% coverage for each color.
Life is detected by the waste toner sensor.
Fuser Cleaning Roller
Life:
20,000 images
Condition:
Above figure is based on A4 or letter size 5% coverage.
120K Kit
Life:
120,000 prints
Condition:
None
240K Kit
Life:
240,000 prints
Condition:
None
OPC Belt Cartridge
Life:
120,000 images
Condition:
Above figure varies depending on pages/job. Refer to the list below.
(Figures of the list below are based on the condition printed with 50%
of monochrome and 50% of color on the letter size paper.)
Pages per job
Life
1 page
60,000
2 pages
65,000
3 pages
75,000
4 pages
87,000
5 pages
96,000
Pages per job
Life
6 page
100,000
7 page
103,000
8 page
106,000
9 page
108,000
10 page
111,000
Pager per job
Life
11 page
115,000
12 page
117,000
13 page
120,000
A-8
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
PR2000101
8)
Cleaning Roller
Life:
20,000 pages
Condition:
Above figure varies depending on coverage. Refer to the list below.
Coverage
Additional life deleted
Life (pages)
9)
11)
20% ~ 40%
1
10,000
40% ~
2
6,666
Fusing Unit (70K Kit)
Life:
70,000 pages
Condition:
Above figure varies depending on coverage. Refer to the list below.
Coverage
Additional life deleted
Life (pages)
10)
~ 20%
0
20,000
~ 12.5%
0
70,000
12.5% ~ 20%
0.2
58,333
20% ~ 40%
0.5
46,666
40% ~ 60%
1
35,000
60% ~
2
23,333
Transfer Drum
Life:
600,000 images
Condition:
None
Paper Feeding Kit
Paper Feeding Roller
Life:
120,000 pages
Condition:
None
Separator Pad
12)
Life:
120,000 pages
Condition:
None
Oil Pad
Life:
35,000 pages
Condition:
Above figure varies depending on coverage. Refer to the list below.
Coverage
Additional life deleted
Life (pages)
~ 12.5%
0
35,000
12.5% ~ 20%
0.2
29,167
A-9
20% ~ 40%
0.5
23,333
40% ~ 60%
1
17,500
60% ~
2
11,667
APPENDIX
<40,020>
Add figure of
<Total pages 34>
Figure from <Next care information 32>
3) Add 20 pages
Modified by the additional life deleted figure
<40,000>
<40,000>
1) No change
This figure is actual
next care time
2) 10 pages
1) Print 10 pages
by 5 % coverage
<39,990>
This difference is
the actual life remaining
2) Print 10 pages
by 50 % coverage
2) 10 pages
1) 10 pages
3) <Clear care 36>
3) No change
<20>
<10>
<0>
Figure from <Total page 34>
Total page counter life
A-10
<20>
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
APPENDIX 5.
HOW TO RE-ENTER ORIGINAL DATA TO THE MCTL PWB
CAUTION
Actions 1) and 2) MUST be carried out BEFORE the MCTL PWB is removed or the
NVRAM initialized otherwise ALL READINGS WILL BE LOST.
1)
Go into the Engine Controller Mode. (Refer to Section 3 “ENGINE CONTROLLER
MODE” of Chapter 5.)
2)
Before initializing the NV-RAM or replacing the MCTL PWB, record the following
values;
i) Display TOTAL PAGE to record the value.
(i.e.) TOTAL PAGE (T) = 412P
ii) Display EACH IMAGE to record the values.
(i.e.) EACH IMAGE (IY)=348P
(IM)=353P
(IC)=365P
(IK)=439P
iii) Display NEXT CARE to record the values.
(i.e.) FC ROLL (NC2) = 12,050P
BL UNIT (NC7) = 49,135P
FU UNIT (NC8) = 39,684P
TR DRUM (NC9) = 599,943P
240K KIT (NC10) = 240,000P
PICK ROLL (NC13) = 120,000P
PICK LF1 (NC14) = 120,000P
PICK LF2 (NC15) = 120,000Piv) Display LIFE PERIOD SET of FACTORY
MODE to record the values.
(i.e.) FC ROLL (LP2) = 12,000P
BL UNIT (LP7) = 50,000P
FU UNIT (LP8) = 70,100P
TR DRUM (LP9) = 600,000P
240K KIT (LP10) = 240,000P
PICK ROLL (LP13) = 120,000P
3)
When you have recorded all the values above, initialize the data in the NV-RAM on the
MCTL PWB or replace the MCTL PWB.
A-11
APPENDIX
After initializing all the data in the NV-RAM on the MCTL PWB, or replacing the MCTL PW
B, all the original counter values for the cleaning roller, OPC belt cartridge, fusing unit, 120K
kit and 240K kit should be re-entered as below;
The method used to correct the counters is to reset the page counter to a calculated TOTAL
PAGE value and then to perform a CLEAR CARE for the item to reset the NEXT CARE for
that item to the value recorded in 2) iii).
The basic formula used in these calculations is:TOTAL PAGE = NEXT CARE - LIFE PERIOD
Where this formula would result in a negative number, the LIFE PERIOD should be
temporarily set to a lower value so that the result is a positive number and then this number
and LIFE PERIOD used to perform the CLEAR CARE to reset the NEXT CARE counter.
4)
Re-enter the FC ROLL (NC2) value as follows;
i) Enter the value of NC2 - LP2 into the TOTAL PAGE counter.
(i.e.) NC2 - LP2 Ÿ 12,050P - 12,000P = 50
Enter the value ‘50’ in the TOTAL PAGE counter.
ii) Perform CLEAR CARE 2. (Refer to ‘36 CLEAR CARE’ in page V-24 of Chapter V.)
iii) Check that the value of NEXT CARE is reset to the recorded value in 2) iii).
(i.e.) NC2 = 12,050P
5)
Re-enter the BL UNIT (NC7) value as follows;
i) After calculating the values so that they work in the following formula
(IY + IM + IC + IK) = NC7 - LP7,
enter each value of LP7, IY, IM, IC, IK.
(i.e.) (IY + IM + IC + IK) = NC7 - LP7
Ÿ (348 + 353 + 365 + 439) = 49,135 - 50,000
Since the above result is minus, reduce the value of LP7 is 40,000P in order to
make the result plus, then enter it into the LIFE PERIOD SET counter in
FACTORY MODE.
The formula is as follows;
(IY + IM + IC + IK) = NC7 - LP7
Ÿ (348 + 353 + 365 + 439) = 49,135 - 40,000
Ÿ (348 + 353 + 365 + 439) = 9,135
Change the value of IK from 439 to 8,069 so that the formula works out.
(348 + 353 + 365 + 8,069) = 9,135
Then, enter each value for IY=348, IM=353, IC=365, and IK=8,069 in the
EACH IMAGE SET counter in FACTORY MODE.
ii) Perform CLEAR CARE 7. (Refer to ‘36 CLEAR CARE’ in page V-24 of Chapter V.)
iii) Check that the value of NEXT CARE is reset correctly.
(i.e.) NC7 = 49,135P
iv) Reset the LIFE PERIOD counter in FACTORY MODE to 50,000.
A-12
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
6)
Re-enter the FU UNIT (NC8) value as follows;
i) Enter the value of NC8 - LP8 into the TOTAL PAGE counter.
(i.e.) NC8 - LP8 = 39,684 - 70,000 = - 30,316
Since the above result is minus, reduce the value of LP8 is 30,000P in order to
make the result plus, then enter it into the LIFE PERIOD SET counter in
FACTORY MODE.
The formula is as follows;
NC8 - LP8 = 39,684 - 30,000 = 9,684
Enter the value ‘9,684’ in TOTAL PAGE.
ii) Perform CLEAR CARE 8. (Refer to ‘36 CLEAR CARE’ in page V-24 of Chapter V.)
iii) Check that the value of NEXT CARE is reset correctly.
(i.e.) NC8 = 39,684P
iv) Reset the LIFE PERIOD counter in FACTORY MODE to 60,100.
7)
Re-enter the 240K KIT (NC10) value as follows;
i) Enter the value of NC10 - LP10 into the TOTAL PAGE counter.
(i.e.) NC9 - LP9 = 120,000 - 120,000 = 0
Enter the value ‘0’ into the TOTAL PAGE counter.
ii) Perform CLEAR CARE 9. (Refer to ‘36 CLEAR CARE’ in page V-24 of Chapter V.)
iii) Check that the value of NEXT CARE is reset correctly.
(i.e.) NC10 = 120,000P
8)
Re-enter the original TOTAL PAGE (T) value in TOTAL PAGE SET in FACTORY
MODE.
(i.e.)
9)
Re-enter the original EACH IMAGE (IY, IM, IC, IK) values in EACH IMAGE SET in
FACTORY MODE.
(i.e.)
10)
T = 412P
(IY)=348P, (IM)=353P, (IC)=365P, (IK)=439P
Ensure that the values in the LIFE PERIOD SET counters in FACTORY MODE are
correct.
(i.e.)
FC ROLL (LP2)=12,000P
BL UNIT (LP7)=50,000P
FU UNIT (LP8)=60,100P
120K KIT (LP10)=120,000P
11)
Completed.
A-13
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 6.
RE-PACKING INSTRUCTIONS
PRECAUTION
When re-packing the printer before shipping, be sure to follow the steps and cautions
below. Failure to do so will cause toner or oil spill in the printer and severe damage to
the printer.
6.1
Toner Cartridge
1)
Open the front cover and remove all the
toner cartridges (K, Y, M, C) from the
printer.
2)
Put the original protective cover (orange)
onto each cartridge and put it into the
polyethylene bag.
Protective
cover
Fig. A- 8
3)
Put the toner cartridges into the original
starter kit packings.
Starter kit
packing (U)
Toner
cartridge
Starter kit
packing (L)
Fig. A- 9
CAUTION
x
If you do not have the original protective cover, cover each toner cartridge with bubble
sheet to protect the developer roller.
x
If you do not have the original starter kit packing, pack each toner cartridge firmly with
bubble sheet and put them into the outer carton.
A-14
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
6.2
OPC Belt Cartridge
1)
Open the top cover and remove the OPC
belt cartridge from the printer.
2)
Open the shutter on the OPC belt
cartridge and remove toner in the
cartridge with a vacuum cleaner.
Fig. A- 10
3)
Cover the OPC belt cartridge with the
original protective sheet (black).
4)
Put the cartridge into the lightproof
polyethylene bag.
Protective sheet
Fig. A- 11
5)
Put the OPC belt cartridge into the
original starter kit packing (L).
OPC belt cartridge
Starter kit
packing (L)
Fig. A- 12
&$87,21
x
Do not directly touch the OPC belt surface with bare hands or gloves.
x
If the belt is exposed for more than two minutes to a light source of 800 lux, the belt may
be damage.
x
If you do not have the original starter kit packing, put the OPC belt cartridge in a light
proof bag and pack it firmly with bubble sheet and put it into the outer carton.
A-15
APPENDIX
6.3
Fusing Unit
1)
Remove the fusing unit securing
screws (2 pcs.)
Screw
Screw
Fig. A- 13
2)
Holding the handles at both ends of the
fusing unit and remove the fusing unit
from the printer.
3)
Remove the oil bottle and the fuser
cleaner from the fusing unit and put
each of them into the polyethylene bag.
CAUTION
Pack the oil bottle in the polyethylene bag
and seal it firmly. Failure to do so will
cause oil spill during shipping and damage
to the printer.
4)
Fusing unit
Fig. A- 14
Put the oil bottle and the fuser cleaner
into the original starter kit packing (L).
Oil bottle
Fuser cleaner
Starter kit
packing (L)
Fig. A- 15
5)
Remove the oil remaining in the fusing
unit with the supplied syringe to avoid
oil spill in the printer.
NOTE:
Re-install the fusing unit into the printer
after cleaning the printer as instructed in
the following section. For re-installation of
the fusing unit, see Section 6.6 ‘Packing’.
Fig. A- 16
A-16
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
6.4
Waste Toner Pack
Remove the waste toner pack from the
printer.
Waste toner pack
Fig. A- 17
2)
Clean toner from around the pack.
Then, remove the seal from the side of
the waste toner pack and fit it to cover
the hole of the waste toner pack
completely.
3)
Put the waste toner pack into the
polyethylene bag and seal it firmly.
Waste toner pack
Fig. A- 18
6.5
Cleaning
Clean the following areas with a vacuum cleaner to remove toner.
1)
Around the waste toner pack / Waste
toner feeder tube.
i) Remove the one screw of side
cover (R) at the rear of the printer to
remove the side cover (R).
ii) Vacuum toner from the exit of the
waste toner feeder tube and around
the waste toner pack holder.
Fig. A- 19
iii) Cover the exit of the waste toner
feeder tube with vinyl wrap.
Fig. A- 20
A-17
APPENDIX
2) Drum cleaner
Drum cleaner
i) Remove the cleaner cover by
releasing the two hooks.
ii) Holding the handle located on the
top of the drum cleaner, push it
backwards.
iii) Remove the drum cleaner by lifting
it out.
Fig. A- 21
iv) Clean the area where the drum
cleaner is mounted with a vacuum
cleaner and a cloth. (Refer to the
figure on the right.)
3) Inside the printer
i) Remove the upper side cover, side
cover (L), and upper cover from the
printer.
ii) Remove the control fan, and then
remove the waste toner feeder unit.
Fig. A- 22
iii) Vacuum toner from around the
other side of the waste toner feeder
tube and inside the printer. (Refer
to the figure on the right.)
iv) Reassemble the waste toner feeder
unit, control fan, upper cover, side
cover (L), and upper side cover.
v) Re-install the drum cleaner and
cleaner cover.
Fig. A- 23
&$87,21
x
Be sure not to damage the surface of the transfer drum with the vacuum cleaner nozzle
when cleaning the areas around the transfer drum.
x
Be sure not to contact the nozzle of the vacuum cleaner with the terminals inside the
printer. Failure to do so will cause damage to the electrical parts in the printer.
x
It is recommended to ground the nozzle of the vacuum cleaner by using an earth wire.
A-18
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
4) Paper cassette
Media cassette
i) Remove the paper cassette from
the printer and remove paper from
the cassette.
ii) Vacuum up any paper dust in the
paper cassette.
iii) Reinstall the paper cassette.
Fig. A- 24
6.6
Packing
1)
Re-install the fusing unit into the
printer.
i) After setting the fusing unit in place,
lightly press down the unit to firmly
connect it to the connector on the
base.
ii) Tighten the securing screws while
pressing down the fusing unit.
iii) Close the top cover.
Fusing unit
Fig. A- 25
2)
Check the following items are packed
in the starter kit packing;
Four toner cartridges (K, Y, M, C),
OPC belt cartridge, Oil bottle, Fuser
cleaner. (Refer to the figure on the
right.)
Starter packing
sleeve
Starter kit
packing (U)
Starter kit
packing (M)
Media cassette
3)
Put the printer into the polyethylene
bag.
OPC belt
cartridge
Oil bottle
Starter kit
packing (L)
Fuser cleaner
Fig. A- 26
A-19
Toner
cartridge
APPENDIX
4)
Pack the printer, starter kit packing,
waste toner pack, and power cable in
the carton using the original packing
material.
Outer carton
Starter kit
packing
Power cable
Waste toner pack
Printer
Fig. A- 27
5)
Seal the outer carton firmly.
6)
Band the carton with two plastic bands.
Band
Tape
Fig. A- 28
A-20
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
APPENDIX 7.
7.1
HIDDEN FUNCTION MENU
Line Test Menu
Hold down the + and - buttons and turn the print ON
LINE TEST ----- < Press the Go button >
Item
Descriptions
LCD TEST
1
LED TEST
2
SW TEST
3
SENSOR TEST
4
5
6
7
RAM SIZE TEST
TRAY1 CHECK
TRAY2 CHECK
FLASH CARD R/W TEST
8
All columns of the LCD are turned on to
check that the LCDs are all displayed
correctly.
All LEDs are turned on in LCD TEST above
and turned off in SW TEST below to check
the LED performance.
The corresponding number appears when
pressing the button to check the
performance of all buttons.
The corresponding character appears when
the sensor performs to check the
performance of all sensors.
Displays the size of the RAM installed in the
printer and checks that the size is correct.
Displays the paper size of the installed
cassette 1 to check it.
Displays the paper size of the installed
cassette 2 to check it.
Implements the reading/writing test of the
compact flash card to check the interface
and flash card.
DRAM CHECK START ----- < Press the Go button >
DRAM test mode
NV-RAM CLEAR ----- < Press the Go button >
SURE? (SET/ELSE)
NV-RAM clear
ROM/RAM WAIT SET ----- < Press the Go button >
CARD/CART SEL (WAIT LEVEL = 4*)
ROM/RAM wait setting (0 to 15)
A-21
APPENDIX
7.2
Professional Menu
The professional menu is open to users as per request to customize the printer functions
mainly.
To enter the professional menu, press the Go and Set buttons together.
The details for each menu are described as follows;
TRAY SETTING
TRAY PRIORITY ----- T1>T2(>T3), (T3>)T2>T1
Specifies the priority of the paper source when selecting ‘Auto’ in the paper source
setting.
ENGINE ADJUST
LEFT MARGIN
Adjusts the horizontal gap of the printing position when the optional lower cassette is
installed.
The setting in the main PCB is changed.
-3.5mm ~ +3.5mm
The setting value can be changed by 5mm.
TRAY1 = *** mm
TRAY2 = *** mm
TRAY3 = *** mm
DUPLEX = *** mm
YPOS ADJUST
Adjusts the vertical gap of the printing position when the optional lower cassette is
installed.
The range of the setting value is +100 ~ -100. (Default is 0.)
The setting value can be changed by 1 dot.
TRAY1 = **** dot
TRAY2 = **** dot
TRAY3 = **** dot
DUPLEX = **** dot
RESET SETTINGS
RESET SETTING1
Sets the current printer setting to the user setting 1.
A-22
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
SAVE SETTINGS
SAVE SETTING1
Saves the current printer setting to the user 1.
SAVE FONT
(Only when selecting the LaserJet emulation.)
PRIMARY FONT
Saves the fonts to be currently registered as the primary font into the storage device
(compact flash card, hard disk).
FONT ID = ####
SECONDARY FONT
Saves the fonts to be currently registered as the secondary font into the storage device
(compact flash card, hard disk).
FONT ID = ####
DOWNLOAD FONT
Saves the current download font into the storage device (compact flash card, hard disk).
FONT ID = ####
exit SAVE
SAVE MACRO
(Only when selecting the LaserJet emulation and any macros are registered.)
Saves the macros to be currently registered into the storage device (compact flash card,
hard disk).
MACRO ID = ####
SPOOL PRINT
Specifies the collated printing when implementing reprint (secure print, proof print, public
print).
COLLATE = ON*
COLLATE = OFF
A-23
APPENDIX
TRAYCOMMAND MODE
Makes the command to select the paper source compatible with HP LaserJet 3.
TRAY COM. = NORM *
HP LaserJet 4 command
TRAY COM. = SPEC.
HP LaserJet 3 command
READOUT SELECT
Specifies that the printer reads DC3 in the FX emulation or not.
READOUT = ON
The data is ignored until DC1 is received when DC3 is
received.
READOUT = OFF *
The data is not ignored even when DC3 is received.
FONT SELECT
SCALABLE FONT
(Only when selecting the LaserJet emulation.)
FONT = ALL*
All scalable fonts can be selected when selecting the PCL
font.
FONT = LJ4
The following fonts cannot be selected when selecting the
PCL font.
Atlanta, BermudaScript, PCBrussels, Copenhargen,
Germany, Portugal, Calgry, San Diego, UR Roman
FONT SELECT
(Only when selecting the LaserJet emulation.)
Selects the default font in the LaserJet emulation.
PRIMARY FONT
Selects the primary font.
SELECT FONT
SYMBOL FONT
SECONDARY FONT
Selects the secondary font.
SELECT FONT
SYMBOL FONT
IBM CHR SET MODE
IBM E1H = Beta
Places ‘Beta’ on E1h of the IBM character set.
IBM E1H = Esszet *
Places the character of ‘Esszet’ on E1h of the IBM character
set.
A-24
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
W BOLD ON/OFF
The application software is provided for the dot printer, which reprints the character
onto the same position to make the bold font. On the other hand, the laser printer
detects the reprinted character and converts it to the bold font. After the HL-8V
model, however, the function has caused that print speed gets slow in the FX and XL
emulations. Therefore the setting is added, which selects to implement the function
or to print fast without using the function.
W BOLD = OFF *
Not converts the reprinted character to the bold font in the FX
and XL emulations.
W BOLD = ON
Converts the reprinted character to the bold font in the FX and
XL emulations.
(The print speed is decreased.)
DLFNT Bd / It
Brother has an original function such that the printer creates the bold font when
receiving the command of the bold font which the printer does not have. If the
download font is selected by ID, however, the bold font which has been specified
before can remain in the printer so that the download font is printed in bold.
Though the function was deleted from the printer for the mean time, it also caused
the claims. Therefore the setting which deletes the function is added.
DLFNT Bd / It = YES
Creates the bold or italic font from the download font.
DLFNT Bd / It = NO * Not creates the bold or italic font from the download font.
B PROD ON/OFF
B PROD = ON*
Creates the bold or italic font from the bitmap font.
B PROD = OFF
Creates the bold or italic font from the bitmap font.
CONDENCE SELECT
The condensed font is printed at 16.66cpi in the dot printer emulation for the Brother
laser printers in conjunction with that the 16.66cpi font is used. However, some
customers need the same pitch with the one of the dot printer, and many customers
still use the printer at 16.66cpi on the other hand. Therefore the setting which selects
the pitch of the condensed font is added.
CONDENCE = 16.66p *
Sets the pitch of the Epson/IBM condensed character 16.66cpi.
CONDENCE = 17.14p
Sets the pitch the Epson/IBM condensed character 17.14cpi.
A-25
APPENDIX
OEM FONT SELECT
The special character set is necessary when the printer is supplied to the European
countries. For the HL-1260 printer, the special character set is stored into the
program ROM additionally. Since the font number is moved due to the addition, the
character set is disabled for the normal model.
OEM FONT = DISABL*
Disables to select the European character.
OEM FONT = ENABLE
Enables to select the European character.
BRO FONT SELECT
The Brougham bitmap font of 10 pitch and 12 pitch is built in due to the user’s
request.
BROBITM = DISABL*
Disables the internal 10/12 pitch Brougham bitmap
font.
BROBITM = ENABLE
Enables the internal 10/12 pitch Brougham bitmap
font.
ISR FONT SELECT
ISRFONT = DISABLE
Normal mode
ISRFONT = ENABLE
Israel mode
300DPI PRIORITY
Though it was necessary to select and print the cartridge font of Courier for the US
customer, the 300dpi bitmap font could not be selected because the priority of the
font selection was low in rank. Since the current model is compatible with HP
LaserJet 4, the setting is added, which disables the compatibility with HP LaserJet 4
and makes the priority of the 300dpi bitmap font high.
3B PRIO = LOW *
Makes the priority of selection for the 300dpi bitmap
font standard (low) in the font setting.
Command: <ESC><CR>!1T
3B PRIO = HIGH
Makes the priority of selection for the 300dpi bitmap
font high in the font setting.
Command: <ESC><CR>!2T
A-26
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
The priority in each setting is as follows;
< When the printer resolution is 600dpi >
3B PRIO = LOW
3B PRIO = HIGH
1. DOWNLOAD 600
1. DOWNLOAD 600
2. DOWNLOAD SCALABLE
2. DOWNLOAD 300
3. CARD 600
3. DOWNLOAD SCALABLE
4. CARD SCALABLE
4. CARD 600
5. CART 600
5. CARD 300
6. CART SCALABLE
6. CARD SCALABLE
7. RESIDENT 600
7. CART 600
8. RESIDENT SCALABLE
8. CART 300
9. DOWN 300
9. CART SCALABLE
10. CARD 300
10. RESIDENT 600
11. CART 300
11. RESIDENT 300
12. RESIDENT 300
12. RESIDENT SCALABLE
< When the printer resolution is 300dpi >
3B PRIO = either of low or high
1. DOWNLOAD 300
2. DOWNLOAD SCALABLE
3. CARD 300
4. CARD SCALABLE
5. CART 300
6. CART SCALABLE
7. RESIDENT 300
8. RESIDENT SCALABLE
FX / XL SCALE FONT
Specifies the setting for the default font and font selected on the control panel in the
Epson/IBM emulation.
SCAL.F = NORMAL*
Enables to select the only similar size of the font when the
scalable font is selected.
SCAL.F = ALL SIZE
Enables to select all sizes of the font when the scalable font is
selected.
FX / XL SCALE ITA
Specifies the setting for the italic font of the scalable font in the Epson/IBM emulation.
ITA = OBLIQUE*
Makes the upright font oblique to have italic when the scalable
font is selected.
ITA = ITALIC SEL
Uses the upright font to have italic when the scalable font is
selected.
A-27
APPENDIX
PAPER&TRAY SIZE
Specifies the default paper size.
DEF PAPER =LT
The default paper size is letter for the US and Canada
models.
DEF PAPER =A4
The default paper size is A4 for the other models.
PARALLEL MENU
Changes the signal timing of the Centronics interface
PARALLEL TIMING
CDCC PSW = L
The BUSY signal gets high when the STROBE signal goes
up.
CDCC PSW = H*
The BUSY signal gets high when the STROBE signal goes
down.
STB / ACK DELAY
CDCC BSSL = H
The ACK signal is output when the BUSY signal goes down.
CDCC BSSL = L*
The ACK signal is output before the BUSY signal goes down.
INPUT PRIME
INPUT PRIME = OFF* The INPUT PRIME signal does not reset the printer.
INPUT PRIME = ON
The INPUT PRIME signal resets the printer.
REPRINT ON/OFF
Specifies that the reprint function is enabled or disabled forcedly.
REPRINT = ON*
The reprint function is enabled or disabled following the
setting of the user menu.
REPRINT = OFF
The reprint function is enabled forcedly.
AUTO HRC OFF
Specifies that the smoothing control is enabled or disabled automatically depending on
the contents of the file.
AUTO HRC = OFF*
AUTO HRC = ON
A-28
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
APPLETALK AT/PS
Specifies that the emulation is switched to the PS mode forcedly with AppleTalk.
APPLE TALK = PS*
Switches the emulation to the PS mode with AppleTalk.
APPLE TALK = AUTO
Uses the auto emulation function with AppleTalk.
PS BINARY SELECT
Specifies that the data from the parallel interface is handled as the binary data.
PS BINARY = ASCII*
Default. Enables the commands such as Ctrl-T, Ctrl-C and
disables to use the binary data.
PS BINARY = BIN
Enables to print the binary data and disables the commands
such as Ctrl-T.
PS QUOTE BINARY
PS QUOTEBIN = OFF* Disables to input the binary data even by the special codes.
PS QUOTEBIN = ON
Enables to input the binary data by the special codes.
PS IMAGE MASK
Revises the image mask procedure to make print speed faster with an OS/2 driver.
PS IMAGEMSK = OFF* Not revises the image mask procedure.
PS IMAGEMSK = ON
Revises the image mask procedure.
PS CEIL MODE
PS CEIL = FLOOR*
PS CEIL = CEIL
PS STATUS
STATUS ECHO = ON*
STATUS ECHO = OFF
A-29
APPENDIX
PROTECT OFF MODE
Specifies the performance of the page protection function.
PRO.OFF = AUTO*
Protects the data spuriously even when the page protection is
turned off. (Countermeasure for the memory full or print
overrun error.)
PRO.OFF = NORMAL
Specification up to the 4 mask ROM.
th
HP ESC E COMMAND
Specifies the performance of the ESC E command.
HP ESC E = RESET*
Resets the printer.
HP ESC E = F / F
Implements form feed.
PS300RESO
Specifies that the resolution is reduced to 300dpi in the PS mode automatically.
PS300RESO = NO*
Not reduces the resolution automatically.
PS300RESO = IF 2M
Reduces the resolution to 300dpi when the RAM size is 2MB.
PS300RESO = FORCE Reduces the resolution to 300dpi.
COPY PAGES
Fixes the copy page number to one page when COPY PAGES = OFF.
COPY PAGES = ON*
COPY PAGES = OFF
PANEL RESET MODE
Changes the setting of the reset printer function.
RESET = JOB
Resets the data per job.
RESET = NORMAL*
A-30
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
JOB TIMEOUT SEL
Specifies the setting of the job timeout.
Though the job timeout has been set to 5 minutes in the PJL emulation since the HL-1260
printer, the setting to disable the timeout is added due to the user’s request.
TIME OUT = ON*
Enables the job timeout.
TIME OUT = OFF
Disables the job timeout.
DEMO PAGE ON/OFF
Specifies that the demo page is printed or not.
When the setting is OFF, the demo page is deleted from the control panel and printer Web
page, and the demo page is not printed by the PJL command and MIB.
DEMO PAGE = ON*
DEMO PAGE = OFF
JOB CANCEL TIME
Specifies the timeout of job cancel. (1~255)
TIME OUT = ???sec
PSCOPYPAGE
PSCOPYPAGE = L3*
PSCOPYPAGE = L2
Switches the copy page operator in the PS mode between Level2 and Level3.
@PJL DEFAULT PSCOPYPAGE = L3, L2
@PJL SET PSCOPYPAGE = L3, L2
@PJL DINQUIRE PSCOPYPAGE
@PJL INQUIRE PSCOPYPAGE
APPLEUSBPS
BINARY = OFF*
BINARY = ON
Enables to print the PS pure binary data through the Mac USB interface.
@PJL DEFAULT APPLEUSBPS = ON / OFF
@PJL SET APPLEUSBPS = ON / OFF
@PJL DINQUIRE APPLEUSBPS
@PJL INQUIRE APPLEUSBPS
A-31
APPENDIX
7.3
Reset Parts Life
The Reset parts life menu is implemented when the service personnel replaces the periodic
maintenance parts. For the parts to be replaced easily, however, it is assumed that the user
replaces them by him/herself. Therefore the reset parts life menu is distinguished from the
service menu described in the next section, ‘4. Service Menu’.
(The following descriptions are not open to other than the service personnel in principal. You
may let users know as necessary.)
To enter the reset parts life menu, press the Go and + buttons together.
The details for the menu are described as follows;
RESET PARTS LIFE
FC Roller
Initializes the life of the fuser cleaner.
OPC Belt
Initializes the life of the OPC belt cartridge.
FUSER UNIT
Initializes the remaining life of the fusing unit.
120K Kit
Initializes the life of the paper discharger.
Trf Drum
Initializes the life of the transfer drum.
240K Kit
Initializes the life of the 240K kit.
Oil Pad
Initializes the remaining life of the oil pad.
PF KIT1
Initializes the remaining life of the paper feeding kit 1.
PF KIT2
Initializes the remaining life of the paper feeding kit 2.
PF KIT3
Initializes the remaining life of the paper feeding kit 3.
A-32
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
7.4
Service Menu
The service menu provides the printer information for the service personnel. (The following
descriptions are not open to other than the service personnel.)
To enter the service menu, press the + and Set buttons in this order while holding down the
Go button.
The details for each menu are described as follows;
--SERVICE MENU-SERVICE INFO
PAGE COUNT
Number of printing pages
IMAGECOUNTERS
C=
The number of printing pages with using cyan.
M=
The number of printing pages with using magenta.
Y=
The number of printing pages with using yellow.
K=
The number of printing pages with using black.
TOTAL =
The number of printing pages with using all colors.
JAM COUNT
Paper jam frequency
REPLACE COUNT
Number of replacement
(Counts the frequency after clearing the counter when 100
pages or more are printed.)
C TONER
The number of the cyan toner cartridge replacement.
M TONER
The number of the magenta toner cartridge replacement.
Y TONER
The number of the yellow toner cartridge replacement.
K TONER
The number of the black toner cartridge replacement.
FC Roller
The number of the fuser cleaner replacement.
OPC Belt
The number of the OPC belt cartridge replacement.
FUSER UNIT
The number of the fusing unit replacement.
240K Kit
The number of the 240K kit replacement.
120K Kit
The number of the 120K kit replacement.
PF KIT1
The number of the paper feeding kit 1 replacement.
PF KIT2
The number of the paper feeding kit 2 replacement.
PF KIT3
The number of the paper feeding kit 3 replacement.
Waste Toner Box
The number of the waste toner box replacement.
Oil Bottle
The number of the oil bottle replacement.
Trf Drum
The number of the transfer drum replacement.
Oil Pad
The number of the oil pad replacement.
COVERAGE
Average coverage (Based on that the letter size printed all
black is 100%)
C=
Average coverage of cyan.
M=
Average coverage of magenta.
Y=
Average coverage of yellow.
K=
Average coverage of black.
A-33
APPENDIX
PRINT PAGES
Number of printing pages depending on the paper size.
(Counted up to 100K.)
A4 PAGE
The number of printing pages of the A4 size.
A4 S PAGE
The number of printing pages of the A4 S size.
LETTER PAGE
The number of printing pages of the letter size.
LETTER S PAGE
The number of printing pages of the letter S size.
LEGAL PAGE
The number of printing pages of the legal size.
LEDGER PAGE
The number of printing pages of the ledger size.
B4 PAGE
The number of printing pages of the B4 size.
B5 PAGE
The number of printing pages of the ISO B5 size.
JISB5 PAGE
The number of printing pages of the JIS B5 size.
EXEC PAGE
The number of printing pages of the EXECUTIVE size.
A3 PAGE
The number of printing pages of the A3 size.
A3NOBI PAGE
The number of printing pages of the A3 NOBI size.
(330mmx483mm size)
COM-10 PAGE
The number of printing pages of the COM10 size.
DL PAGE
The number of printing pages of the DL size.
* The number of replacement is counted after clearing the counter when 100 pages or
more are printed.
--SERVICE MENU-ERROR HISTORY
1 : #######
The 10 latest errors in order of the newest to the oldest.
2 : #######
3 : #######
…..
10 : #######
A-34
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
--SERVICE MENU-MODIFY COUNT
* For modifying of the number of pages and remaining life, the digit to be modified is
raised whenever pressing the Set button. The pages and remaining life are fixed on
when pressing the Set button on the highest digit.
JAM COUNT
Paper jam frequency
REPLACE COUNT
C TONER
The number of the cyan toner cartridge replacement.
M TONER
The number of the magenta toner cartridge replacement.
Y TONER
The number of the yellow toner cartridge replacement.
K TONER
The number of the black toner cartridge replacement.
FC Roller
The number of the fuser cleaner replacement.
OPC Belt
The number of the OPC belt cartridge replacement.
FUSER UNIT
The number of the fusing unit replacement.
240K Kit
The number of the 240K kit replacement.
120K Kit
The number of the 120K kit replacement.
PF KIT1
The number of the paper feeding kit 1 replacement.
PF KIT2
The number of the paper feeding kit 2 replacement.
PF KIT3
The number of the paper feeding kit 3 replacement.
Waste Toner Box
The number of the waste toner box replacement.
Oil Bottle
The number of the oil bottle replacement.
Trf Drum
The number of the transfer drum replacement.
Oil Pad
The number of the oil pad replacement.
--SERVICE MENU-RESET COUNT
COVER AGE
Clears the average coverage of the cyan, magenta, yellow
and black toner.
Caution 1
The counter is limited for the following items;
COVERAGE :
The number of pages over 100K is not stored.
PRINT PAGE :
Counted up to 100K pages.
ERROR HISTORY : Up to 100K errors are stored.
Caution 2
When modifying the life period, enter the Hitachi mode.
A-35
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 8.
TO LEVEL THE PRINTER CORRECTLY
Please read the leveling instructions described below carefully.
If the printer is not installed level, image failures may occur or the life expectancy of the OPC
belt cartridge may be shortened.
Please do not install the printer as shown in the figures below.
Note:
If the printer is inclined at 1° as shown in the figures below, the printer is approximately 9mm
out of level from one side to the other.
i)
Printer is installed across two or more tables.
Level
1°
Fig. A- 29
ii) There is something under the printer or something stuck to the printer base.
Fig. A- 30
A-36
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
iii) The table the printer is installed on is not level.
Level
1°
Fig. A- 31
iv) The table surface the printer is installed on is not strong enough.
Level
1°
Fig. A- 32
NOTE:
If you have a spirit level, put it on the output tray and install the printer as level as possible
referring to the level.
Spirit Level
Fig. A- 33
A-37
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 9.
PAPER POSITIONS DURING DUPLEX PRINTING
Fig. A-34 below shows the paper positions when printing using the available duplex printing
function.
Fig. A- 34
A-38
HL-3450CN SERVICE MANUAL
APPENDIX 10.
Object parts:
HOW TO REWRITE HL-3450CN FLASH ROM
LJ8901001 MAIN PCB ASSY, HL3450CN
Preparation tool
*PC (Windows 98 or later)
Create the folder “3450” in C drive.
*1 HL-3450CN printer
*1 parallel cable
*FILEDG32.EXE
Download “FILEDG32.EXE” from Utility DB, then copy it to “3450” folder in C drive.
Rewriting procedure (For BLF file)
(1)
Install the printer driver to the PC. Make a short-cut icon for FILEDG32 on the
Desktop.
(2)
Connect the parallel cable to the printer, then turn the printer power switch ON. Wait
until “READY” message appears on the LCD display.
(3)
Double click the FILEDG32 icon, and drag and drop the firmware data to the printer
icon in the FILEDG32.
Data LED (orange) blinks for approx. 2 minutes and 40 seconds.
>>>>> Alarm LED (red) blinks for approx. 2 minutes and 20 seconds.
(“NOW WRITING” and “NOW ERASING” appears on the LCD display alternately while
the Alarm LED is blinking.)
(4)
After finishing rewriting, the system will be rebooted. Wait until “READY” message
appears on the LCD display of the printer.
(5)
Set the paper size as “A4” or “LETTER”.
(6)
Print out the Print Settings by pushing the “Set” button three times to check the version
of the firmware.
A-39
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement